JP2021106941A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To make it possible to cause a movable accessory to perform a linear motion in a larger operation range, while making the installation space of a drive mechanism smaller.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a movable decoration body 1110 configured to be operable before a liquid crystal display device; a left transmission arm 1154 and a right transmission arm 1164 for supporting the movable decoration body 1110 from both sides; and a left drive transmission member and a right drive transmission member for transmitting the power from a motor to each of the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164. Each of the left drive transmission member and the right drive transmission member is housed in a smaller range, when viewed from the front, on both sides of the liquid crystal display device than the operation range of the movable decoration body 1110. The left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164, while performing an arc motion with each of one ends as a fulcrum, support the movable decorative body 1110 from both sides slidably at each of the other ends.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 92

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine.

Conventionally, there are known gaming machines such as pachinko machines or pachislot machines that perform a winning determination and execute a game advantageous to the player according to the result of the winning determination.

In this type of gaming machine, as an expected effect for expecting the result of the winning determination to be an advantageous result for the player, there is one in which a movable accessory is operated so that the effect of the effect is enhanced.

For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine in which a movable accessory is operated so that an effect of effect is enhanced. In the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1, the movable accessory is operated in the vertical direction by a linear motion in the vertical direction by drive mechanisms provided on both sides of the movable accessory.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2007-13599

However, like the game machine described in Patent Document 1, the movable accessory is operated by the linear motion in the vertical direction by the drive mechanisms provided on both sides of the movable accessory, so that the movable accessory is operated in the vertical direction. Although the operating range of the drive mechanism can be increased, a large area is required for the installation space of the drive mechanism.

In recent years, a gaming machine has been proposed in which the installation space of the drive mechanism is reduced by operating the movable accessory by circular motion, but such a drive mechanism cannot linearly move the movable accessory. ..

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to make it possible to linearly move a movable accessory in a larger operating range while saving space for installing a drive mechanism. It is to provide a game machine to play.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a winning determination means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S118 and S119) for performing a winning determination (for example, a winning determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the winning determination. It is possible to execute a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) in which a predetermined display is performed based on the result of the determination, and a specific game advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning determination being a specific result. A movable accessory (for example, movable) configured to be operable in front of the display means based on the specific game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the large winning opening opening process in step S106) and the result of the winning determination. The decorative body 1110), the first arm (for example, the left transmission arm 1154) and the second arm (for example, the right transmission arm 1164) that support the movable accessory from both sides, and a predetermined drive source (for example, the left motor 1151). , The first drive transmission member (for example, left arm member 1155, driven gear 1156, drive gear 1157) that transmits the power from the right motor 1161) to the first arm and the second drive transmission member that transmits the power to the second arm. (For example, right arm member 1165, driven gear 1166, drive gear 1167), and the first drive transmission member and the second drive transmission member are the movable accessories on both sides of the display means in front view, respectively. The first arm and the second arm each support one end of the first arm and the second arm, and the first arm and the second arm use the one end as a fulcrum. It is characterized in that the movable accessory is slidably supported from both sides at the other end while performing the arc motion.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the first arm (for example, the left transmission arm 1154) and the second arm (for example, the right transmission arm 1164) each perform an arc motion with one end as a fulcrum. On the other hand, the movable accessory is slidably supported from both sides at the other end. Therefore, the installation space of the first drive transmission member (for example, left arm member 1155, driven gear 1156, drive gear 1157) and the second drive transmission member (for example, right arm member 1165, driven gear 1166, drive gear 1167) can be used as a movable combination. The movable accessory can be linearly moved in a larger operating range while keeping the range smaller than the operating range of the object (for example, the movable decorative body 1110).

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the movable accessory (for example, the movable decorative body 1110) is controlled by one operation from a predetermined drive source (for example, the left motor 1151 and the right motor 1161). For example, a protagonist (for example, a movable decoration) that can be operated in a predetermined direction by one operation control such that the left motor 1151 only rotates counterclockwise and one operation control such that the right motor 1161 only rotates clockwise). The body 1110) and the main character are rotatably supported by one fulcrum (for example, holes 11102, 11106), and a secondary character (for example, an auxiliary material that can be operated following the operation of the main character by gravity). It has a covering decoration body 1120, 1124), and when the operation of following the main character is restricted by the action of gravity, the auxiliary material rotates with respect to the main character around the one fulcrum. By doing so, the operation is different from that of the main character.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, one operation control (for example, the left side motor 1151) from a predetermined drive source (for example, the left side motor 1151 and the right side motor 1161) to the main character (for example, the movable decorative body 1110) Only one motion control such as rotating counterclockwise and one motion control such as rotating the right motor 1161 clockwise) are the main character (for example, movable decorative body 1110) and the secondary character (for example, covering decoration). The bodies 1120, 1124) can perform different operations independently of each other. That is, by operating the secondary accessory by using a natural force such as gravity, one motion control is performed for one drive source without providing a power source corresponding to each of the main accessory and the secondary accessory. It is possible to make the main character and the secondary character perform different operations independently by simply performing. As a result, space saving and simplification of configuration and control can be achieved.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (2) above, the operation of the secondary accessory (for example, the covering decorative body 1120, 1124) following the main accessory (for example, the movable decorative body 1110) by the action of gravity is restricted. A longitudinal member (eg, lower left arm 1174, lower right arm 1178) is further provided, the longitudinal member being located behind the protagonist and / and the sub-role and the sub-role. The posture (the direction in which the lower arms 1174 and 1178 face) changes in the vertical direction between the horizontal direction and the vertical direction with the operation, and the posture of the longitudinal member of the auxiliary accessory is constant. When it changes beyond the range, it operates so as to be located in front of the longitudinal member.

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when the posture of the longitudinal member (for example, the lower left arm 1174, the lower right arm 1178) changes beyond a certain range, the secondary member is positioned in front of the longitudinal member. Since the accessory (for example, the covering decorative body 1120, 1124) operates, it is possible to prevent the longitudinal member from being exposed from behind the main accessory (movable decorative body 1110) or the auxiliary accessory.

According to the present invention, it is possible to linearly move a movable accessory in a larger operating range while saving space for installing a drive mechanism.

It is an example of the perspective view which shows the appearance in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. This is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the front view which shows the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is an example which shows the external perspective view of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. This is an example showing a front exploded perspective view of a gaming board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from diagonally above right. It is an example of the front view which shows the LED unit including the 1st and 2nd special symbol display part. This is an example of a block diagram showing a main control circuit. (A) An example of a table showing the specifications of a special symbol game, (b) An example of a table showing the specifications of a normal symbol game, (c) An example of a table showing the distribution per hit, (d) A table showing the types of hits This is an example. This is an example of a flowchart showing the flow of the game. It is a table which shows an example of the basic specifications of a pachinko gaming machine 1. , Is an example of a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the main control circuit. This is an example of a flowchart showing the system timer interrupt process executed by the main control circuit. , This is an example of a flowchart showing a special symbol control process executed by the main control circuit. This is an example of a flowchart showing a special symbol memory check process executed by the main control circuit. This is an example of a flowchart showing a special symbol determination process executed by the main control circuit. This is an example of a flowchart showing a special symbol fluctuation time management process executed by the main control circuit. This is an example of a flowchart showing a special symbol display time management process executed by the main control circuit. This is an example of a flowchart showing the hit start interval management process executed by the main control circuit. , This is an example of a flowchart showing a large winning opening reopening waiting time management process executed by the main control circuit. This is an example of a flowchart showing a large winning opening opening process executed by the main control circuit. This is an example of a flowchart showing the hit end interval processing executed by the main control circuit. This is an example of a flowchart showing a special symbol game end process executed by the main control circuit. This is an example of a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the sub control circuit. This is an example of a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the sub control circuit. This is an example of a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the sub control circuit. This is an example of a flowchart showing a command analysis process executed by the sub-control circuit. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the continuation of FIG. This is an example of a flowchart showing a hit start effect determination process executed by the sub control circuit. This is an example of a front view of the game board unit 17 showing a mode in which the game ball flows down the right side region when the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is open. This is an example of a front view of the game board unit 17 showing a mode in which the game ball flows down the right side region when the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is closed. This is an example of a front view of the game board unit 17 showing a mode in which the game ball flows down the left side region when the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is open. It is an example of the front view of the back unit 176. It is an example of the rear view of the back unit 176. This is an example of a perspective view of the back unit 176 viewed from diagonally above the front right. This is an example of a perspective view of the back unit 176 as viewed from diagonally above the left side of the back. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the back unit 176 viewed from diagonally above the front right. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the back unit 176 as viewed from diagonally above the left side of the back. This is an example of a rear perspective view of the attacker unit 500 viewed from diagonally above to the right. It is an example of the front view of the attacker unit 500. It is an example of the side view of the attacker unit 500. This is an example of a plan view of the attacker unit 500. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit 500 viewed from diagonally above the front right. It is an example of the front view which shows the base member of the attacker unit 500. This is an example of a rear view showing the front plate portion 520 of the attacker unit 500. This is an example of a front sectional view of the attacker unit 500. This is an example of an exploded cross-sectional perspective view of the attacker unit 500 viewed from diagonally above the front right. It is an example of a plan view showing (a) a large winning opening solenoid 620, (b) an example of a plan view showing a link arm 630, and (c) an example of a plan view showing a shutter 610. (A) is an example of a plan view showing the attacker unit 500 when the shutter 610 is in the second position, and (b) is also an example of a plan view showing the special electric accessory 600. (A) is an example of a plan view showing the attacker unit 500 when the shutter 610 is in the first position, and (b) is also an example of a plan view showing the special electric accessory 600. It is an example of the plan view which shows the special electric accessory 6000 which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. This is an example of a perspective view of the special electric accessory 6000 according to the second embodiment as viewed from diagonally above the front right. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the special electric accessory 6000 according to the second embodiment as viewed from diagonally above the front right. (A) An example of a plan view showing the accommodating portion 6001, (b) An example of a perspective view of the accommodating portion 6001 viewed from diagonally above the front right, and (c) An example of a rear perspective view of the accommodating portion 6001 viewed from diagonally above right. Is. (A) An example of a plan view showing the large winning opening solenoid 6003, (b) An example of a perspective view of the large winning opening solenoid 6003 viewed from diagonally above right, and (c) Viewing the winning opening solenoid 6003 from diagonally above right. This is an example of a rear perspective view. (A) is an example of a plan view showing the link arm 6004, and (b) is an example of a rear perspective view showing the link arm 6004 seen from diagonally above right. (A) An example of a plan view showing the regulating member 6005, (b) an example of a perspective view of the regulating member 6005 viewed from diagonally above right, and (c) an example of a rear perspective view of the regulating member 6005 viewed from diagonally above right. be. It is a front perspective view which showed the assembly structure of the special electric accessory 6000 without the accommodating part 6001. It is an example of the front perspective view which showed the assembly structure of the big prize opening solenoid 6003, the link arm 6004 and the regulation member 6005. It is an example of the rear perspective view which showed the assembly structure of the big prize opening solenoid 6003, the link arm 6004 and the regulation member 6005. (A) is an example of a plan view showing an assembly configuration of a large winning opening solenoid 6003, a link arm 6004, and a regulating member 6005, and (b) is an example of a diagram in which the link arm 6004 in (a) is not shown. (A) An example of a plan view showing an assembly configuration of a large winning opening solenoid 6004, a link arm 6004, and a regulating member 6005 in a closed state, and (b) (a) a diagram omitting the illustration of the link arm 6004. This is an example. (A) A plan view showing the assembly configuration of the large winning opening solenoid 6004, the link arm 6004, and the regulating member 6005 when the driving force transmission unit 6034 of the large winning opening solenoid 6004 starts moving from the state shown in FIG. 61. As an example, it is an example of the figure which omits the illustration of the link arm 6004 of (b) (a). (A) A plan view showing the assembly configuration of the large winning opening solenoid 6004, the link arm 6004, and the regulating member 6005 when the driving force transmission unit 6034 of the large winning opening solenoid 6004 continues to move from the state shown in FIG. 62. As an example, it is an example of the figure which omits the illustration of the link arm 6004 of (b) (a). (A) A plan view showing the assembly configuration of the large winning opening solenoid 6004, the link arm 6004, and the regulating member 6005 when the driving force transmission unit 6034 of the large winning opening solenoid 6004 continues to move from the state shown in FIG. 63. As an example, it is an example of the figure which omits the illustration of the link arm 6004 of (b) (a). (A) is an example of a schematic plan view showing a state of being locked by the restricting member 6005, and (b) is an example of a schematic plan view showing a state of being released by the regulating member 6005. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 viewed from diagonally above the front right. This is an exploded perspective view of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 as viewed from diagonally above the rear left. It is a figure which shows the ordinary electric accessory 460, the second start port switch 441, and the accommodating member 443. It is a rear view of the ordinary electric accessory 460. This is an example of a rear view of the ordinary electric accessory 460 as viewed from diagonally above to the right. The mode of the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in the closed state (shown by the alternate long and short dash line) and the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in the transition state from the closed state to the open state. It is an example of the rear view which shows the aspect (shown by a solid line). The mode of the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in the transition state (shown by the alternate long and short dash line) and the mode of the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in the open state (shown by the solid line). It is a rear view which shows. It is a rear view of the blade member 4620 and the power transmission mechanism 4640 for explaining the function of the flange connecting member 4646, and (A) the figure for explaining that the opening of the blade member 4620 is prevented, (B). It is a figure for demonstrating that opening of a blade member 4620 is allowed. This is an example of a front view of the upper front accessory 1000 in a normal mode (a mode when it is in the origin position). It is an example of the rear view of the upper front accessory 1000 in a normal aspect. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper front accessory 1000 viewed from diagonally above the front right. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper front accessory 1000 viewed from diagonally above the rear left. It is a front view which shows an example of the upper front part 1000 at the origin position. FIG. 5 is a front view showing an example of an upper front accessory 1000 in which the movable decorative body 1040 is moving downward. It is a front view which shows an example of the upper front part 1000 when the movable decorative body 1040 moves downward to an operation limit position. This is an example of a front view of the upper back accessory 1100 in a normal mode (a mode when it is in the origin position). It is an example of the rear view of the upper back accessory 1100 in a normal aspect. This is an example of a perspective view of the upper back accessory 1100 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper back accessory 1100 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper back accessory 1100 as viewed from diagonally above the rear left. (A) is an example of a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in FIG. 82, and (B) is an example of an enlarged view of part X shown in (A). (A) is an example of a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB shown in FIG. 82, and (B) is an example of an enlarged view of the Y portion shown in (A). It is a figure which shows an example of the upper back accessory 1100 before the start of operation, that is, in the normal aspect (the aspect when it is in the origin position), (A) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode after the upper back part 1100 starts operation, and before the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 reach the limit position, (A) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode when the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 reached the limit position, (A) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. After the upper left arm 1172 and upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 are operated to the operating limit position, the left motor 1151 and the right motor 1161 are further rotated, and the movable decorative body 1110 is placed on the paper by the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode when it operated downward (when the covering decorative body 1120 started the operation with respect to the movable decorative body 1110), (A) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. Is. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode in which the covering decorative body 1120 moved to the operation limit with respect to the movable decorative body 1110, (A) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. It is an example of the front view of the lower accessory 1200 in the normal aspect (the aspect when it is in the origin position). It is an example of the rear view of the lower accessory 1200 in a normal aspect. This is an example of a perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 viewed from diagonally above the front right. This is an example of a rear perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 as viewed from diagonally above left. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 viewed from diagonally above the front right. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 viewed from diagonally above the rear left. It is a figure which shows an example of the lower accessory 1200 in the aspect when it is in the origin position, (A) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. , It is a figure which shows an example of the lower accessory 1200 when it operated to an intermediate position, (A) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. It is a figure which shows an example of the lower accessory 1200 when it operated to the operation limit, (A) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. This is an example of a front view of the upper corner accessory 1320. This is an example of a rear view of the upper corner accessory 1320. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper corner accessory 1320 viewed from diagonally above the front right. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper corner accessory 1320 viewed from diagonally above the rear left. This is an example in the rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are in the origin position. This is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 start operating from the origin position. This is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are further operated from the position shown in FIG. 107. This is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are operated to the operating limit position. It is a front view of the lower corner accessory 1350. It is an example of the rear view of the lower corner accessory 1350. It is an exploded perspective view of the lower corner accessory 1350 seen from diagonally above the front right. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower corner accessory 1350 viewed from diagonally above the left side of the back. This is an example of a rear view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are at the origin position. This is an example of a rear view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 start operating from the origin position. This is an example of a rear view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to the operating limit position. It is an example of the front view of the back unit 176 which shows the mode when all of the 1st movable body 1330, the 2nd movable body 1340, the 3rd movable body 1355 and the 4th movable body 1357 are operated to the operation limit position. The front view of the back unit 176 showing the mode when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 operate to the operation limit position and the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 stand by at the origin position. This is an example. The front view of the back unit 176 showing the mode when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to the operation limit position and the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are waiting at the origin position. This is an example. It is an example of the front view of the side accessory 1400 in a normal aspect. It is an example of the rear view of the side accessory 1400 in a normal aspect. This is an example of a front view of an exploded perspective view of the side accessory 1400 viewed from diagonally above the front right. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the side accessory 1400 viewed from diagonally above the rear left. FIG. 5 is a front view showing an example of a side accessory 1400 in which the movable decorative body 1450 is moving toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 5 is a rear view showing an example of a side accessory 1400 in which the movable decorative body 1450 is moving toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 5 is a front view showing an example of a side accessory 1400 when the movable decorative body 1450 is most advanced toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 5 is a rear view showing an example of a side accessory 1400 when the movable decorative body 1450 is most advanced toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. It is a rear view which shows an example of the side accessory 1400 when the side accessory motor 1440 is further rotated in the same direction from the state where the movable decorative body 1450 is most advanced toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. .. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the second middle panel 1550 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the second middle panel 1550 as viewed from diagonally above the rear left. (A) is an example of a front view of the second middle panel 1550, and (B) is an example of a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC shown in (A).

[Composition of gaming machines]
First, an overview of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is an example showing an external perspective view of a gaming board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is an example showing an exploded perspective view of a gaming board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 6 is an example of a front view showing the LED unit including the first and second special symbol display units. FIG. 7 is an example of a block diagram showing a main control circuit. Further, the direction shown in the drawing is the direction in the front view. Therefore, for example, "left" is described in the right direction of the drawing because the drawing is a rear view, so "right" on the drawing is "left" in the front view. Similarly, in the case where "right" is described in the left direction of the drawing, the "left" on the drawing becomes the "right" in the front view for the same reason.

In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the front-rear direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is defined with the front side as the front side and the back side as the rear side when viewed from the player. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player, the left-hand side is the left side and the right-hand side is the right side, and the left-right direction is defined. Further, the front surface is a surface on the side that can be visually recognized when viewed from the player side, and the back surface is a surface on the side that can be visually recognized when viewed from the opposite side of the player.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a wooden frame 11, a base door 12, a glass door 13, a plate unit 14, a launching device 15, a liquid crystal display device 16, a gaming board unit 17, and a payout unit 18. It also includes a substrate unit 19.

The wooden frame 11 is a frame body having a substantially rectangular shape in front view. The wooden frame 11 is provided with an opening 21 that penetrates in the front-rear direction. The base door 12 is fitted into the opening 21 of the wooden frame 11. The base door 12 supports various members. Specifically, the base door 12 supports the payout unit 18 and the substrate unit 19 on the back surface side, and the glass door 13, the plate unit 14, the launching device 15, the liquid crystal display device 16, and the game board unit 17 on the front surface side. Support.

The glass door 13 is pivotally attached to the base door 12 so as to be openable and closable. The glass door 13 is provided with an opening 22. A transparent protective glass 23 is arranged in the opening 22 of the glass door 13. The protective glass 23 is arranged so as to face the game board unit 17, which will be described later, in the front-rear direction in a state where the glass door 13 is closed with respect to the base door 12. Further, a speaker 24 and a lamp 25 are arranged on the upper part of the glass door 13. The speaker 24 is, for example, a voice notification, an effect, an error notification, and the like. The lamp 25 is used for, for example, announcing with light, producing an effect, or the like.

The plate unit 14 is a unit body in which the upper plate 26 and the lower plate 27 are integrated. The dish unit 14 is a lower front portion of the base door 12 and is arranged below the glass door 13.

The upper plate 26 stores game balls, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 26 are launched from the launching device 15 toward the game area 20 described later. The upper plate 26 is provided with a payout port 61 and an effect button 62. The rented game balls and the game balls to be paid out as prize balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26. The effect button 62 is a so-called "CHANGE button", a "push button", or the like. The effect button 62 is operated by the player.

The lower plate 27 is mainly for storing the game balls overflowing from the upper plate 26. The lower plate 27 is provided with a payout port 63. The game ball overflowing from the upper plate 26 is paid out from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27.

The launching device 15 is for launching the game ball stored in the upper plate 26 toward the game area 20. The launcher 15 is located in the lower right front of the base door 12 and is located in the lower right of the dish unit 14. The launching device 15 includes a panel body 31, a driving device (not shown), and a launching handle 32.

The panel body 31 is integrated with the lower right portion of the dish unit 14 in the launching device 15. The firing handle 32 is arranged on the surface side of the panel body 31. The drive device is arranged on the back surface side of the panel body 31, and is composed of, for example, a firing solenoid. In this way, when the launching handle 32 is operated by the player in the launching device 15, the game ball is launched by the operation of the driving device in response to the operation.

The liquid crystal display device 16 displays the result of the hit determination and various images related to the game. The various images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 16 include, for example, an identification symbol (decorative symbol) for effect, an effect image during a big hit, a demo effect image, a number of hold times for variable display of the identification symbol, and the like. included. The liquid crystal display device 16 (more specifically, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) is arranged substantially at the center of the game board unit 17 (on the inner peripheral side of the center rail 1742 described later).

The game board unit 17 is arranged in front of the base door 12 so as to be located behind the protective glass 23. On the front side surface of the game board unit 17, a game area 20 in which the launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the game board unit 17 is arranged in a transparent panel 172 in which a game area 20 in which a launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed, and a substantially central portion of the game area 20. It includes a center unit 174, an ordinary electric accessory unit 400, an attacker unit 500, a passage gate 49, and a back unit 176. The center unit 174, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400, the attacker unit 500, and the passage gate 49 are provided on the front side of the transparent panel 172. The back unit 176 is provided on the rear side of the transparent panel 172.

The transparent panel 172 is formed with an opening 1722 at a portion where a display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 described later is arranged. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 5, a guide rail 26 is provided on the front surface of the transparent panel 172, and game nails and the like are planted. The game ball launched from the launching device 15 jumps out from the guide rail 26 toward the game area 20, collides with a game nail or the like, changes the direction of travel, and flows down toward the lower part of the game area 20.

The guide rail 26 is composed of two rail-shaped members (hereinafter, referred to as "outer rail 26a" and "inner rail 26b"). The game area 20 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rail 26. The inner rail 26b, together with the outer rail 26a, is for guiding the launched game ball to the upper part of the game area 20. The inner rail 26b is arranged inside the outer rail 26a on the left side of the transparent panel 172.

The center unit 174 is provided with a center rail 1742 above the opening 1722 of the transparent panel 172 (above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16), and is formed in an arc shape when viewed from the front. The center rail 1742 is arranged in the upper part of the game area 20, and divides the flow-down area of the game ball in the game area 20 into the left and right sides of the center rail 1742.

The game ball launched by the launching device 15 is divided into the left and right sides of the center rail 1742 and flows down the game area 20, and the game ball flowing down the game area 20 is planted in the game board unit 17 (specifically, the transparent panel 172). Due to a collision with the installed game nails, etc., it flows downward while changing the direction of travel. The flow-down area of the launched game ball is distributed according to the amount of operation of the launch handle 52. Specifically, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 52 is small, the launched game ball flows down the left region of the center rail 1742. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 52 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right region of the center rail 1742. The method of hitting the game ball to the left side area of the center rail 1742 is called "left-handed hitting", and the method of hitting the game ball to flow down to the right side area of the center rail 1742 is called "right-handed hitting". It is said that it can be divided by the player.

The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the first starting port 5442, the large winning opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is located at a substantially lower right portion in the game area 20 and below the passage gate 49.

The large winning opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the case of a hit game state (large hit game state or small hit game state), which is a game state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is arranged in the large winning opening 540 (see FIG. 7). When a game ball wins in the large winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the count switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out from the payout port 47 to the upper plate 42 (or from the payout outlet 48 to the lower plate 44).

The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move forward and backward, and a large winning opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 7) that drives the shutter 610. The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the large winning opening 540. The special electric accessory 600 is in an open state in which the shutter 610 is driven by the large winning opening solenoid 620 to enable (or easily) win a game ball in the large winning opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600 is in an open state. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. The open drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) is based on the result of the hit determination performed when the game ball wins the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440 described later, and the hit game state (big hit). It is performed when the player shifts to the gaming state or the small hit gaming state). The result of the hit determination performed when the game ball wins the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440 described later is the special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74. It is indicated by the stop display mode of.

The first starting port 5442 gives an opportunity for a hit determination on the condition that the game ball wins (passes), and an opportunity for displaying the result of the hit determination on the liquid crystal display device 16 or the first special symbol display unit 73, which will be described later. Is what gives. A first start port switch 5472 is arranged at the first start port 5442 (see FIG. 7). When a game ball wins in the first start port 5442, the winning game ball is detected by the first start port switch 5472. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 5472, a hit determination is made inside the pachinko game machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 7), and a preset number of game balls are ejected from the payout port 61. It is paid out (discharged) to the upper plate 26 or from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 is performed by left-handed striking.

The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is a unit body in which the second starting port 440, the out port 450, and the ordinary electric accessory 460 are integrated. The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged at a substantially left lower portion of the game area 20. The second starting port 440 and the out port 450 are arranged adjacent to each other, and the second starting port 440 is arranged on the right side in the front view and the out port 450 is arranged on the left side in the front view. Conventionally, many of the ordinary electric accessory units 400 are arranged below, for example, the first starting port 5442. However, in recent years, it has been required to increase the size of the liquid crystal display device 16, and it is difficult to arrange the liquid crystal display device 16 below the first starting port 5442. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged at a substantially left lower portion of the gaming area 20.

The second starting port 440 gives an opportunity for a hit determination on the condition that the game ball wins (passes), and an opportunity for displaying the result of the hit determination on the liquid crystal display device 16 or the second special symbol display unit 74 described later. Is what gives. A second start port switch 441 is arranged at the second start port 440 (see FIG. 7). When a game ball wins in the second starting port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441, a hit determination is made inside the pachinko game machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 5), and a preset number of game balls are delivered to the payout port 61. Is discharged (discharged) from the upper plate to the lower plate 27 from the payout port 63. The difficulty of winning the second starting port 440 is determined by the ordinary electric accessory 460. As a general rule, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is performed by right-handed hitting.

The ordinary electric accessory 460 transmits the power of the blade member 4620, the start port solenoid 4630, and the start port solenoid 4630 (see, for example, FIG. 74) that can rotate to the right to the blade member 4620, which will be described in detail later. A power transmission mechanism 4640 (see, for example, FIG. 74) is provided. The ordinary electric accessory 460 can shift (drive) between an open state in which the game ball easily passes and a closed state in which the game ball does not easily pass by driving the blade member 4620 by the start port solenoid 4630. It is composed of. When the game ball passes above the blade member 4620 while the blade member 4620 is being driven, the game ball either wins the second starting port 440 or is discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the out port 450. Will be done. The opening / closing drive by the ordinary electric accessory 460 (blade member 4620) is performed for a predetermined period and number of times when the ordinary symbol has a specific stop display mode on the ordinary symbol display unit 71.

The passing gate 49 provides an opportunity for determining a normal symbol on the condition that the game ball wins (passes). The passage gate 49 is located on the lower right side of the center unit 174 and on the upper right side of the attacker unit 500. A passing gate switch 49a is provided at the passing gate 49 (see FIG. 7). When the game ball passes through the passing gate 49, the passing game ball is detected by the passing gate switch 49a. When a game ball is detected by the passing gate switch 49a, a normal symbol determination is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 2). The passing of the game ball through the passing gate 49 is performed by right-handed striking.

The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the first starting port 5442, the large winning opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is arranged at a substantially lower right portion of the game area 20. The reason why the attacker unit 500 is arranged at a substantially lower right portion of the game area 20 is that the liquid crystal display device 16 is required to be larger in recent years, and various members such as the attacker unit 500 are arranged in the game area 20. This is because it is necessary to avoid such an enlarged liquid crystal display device 16.

The large winning opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the case of a hit game state (large hit game state or small hit game state), which is a game state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is arranged in the large winning opening 540 (see FIG. 7). When a game ball wins in the large winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the count switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out (discharged) from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout outlet 63 to the lower plate 27).

The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move forward and backward, and a large winning opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 7) that drives the shutter 610. The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the large winning opening 540. The special electric accessory 600 is in an open state in which the shutter 610 is driven by the large winning opening solenoid 620 to enable (or easily) win a game ball in the large winning opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600 is in an open state. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. In the open drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610), the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74, and the hit game state (big hit game state or It is performed when the mode is changed to the small hit game state).

The general winning openings 53, 54, and 55 are arranged at the lower left of the game board unit 17, and the general winning openings 56 are arranged at the lower right of the game board unit 17. Further, the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a are arranged in the general winning opening 53, 54, 55, 56 (see FIG. 7). When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 53, 54, 55, 56, the winning game ball is detected by the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a. When a game ball is detected in the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a, a preset number of game balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout outlet 63 to the lower plate 27). (Discharged).

In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls in the first starting port 5442 and the second starting port 440 is 3, the number of prize balls in the general winning openings 53, 54, 55, and 56 is 10, and the number of winning balls is 540. The number of prize balls is set to 15 respectively. This value (number of prize balls) can be arbitrarily changed in design.

The out port 57 is arranged at the lowermost center of the game area 20 (the most downstream position in the flow direction of the game ball). The out port 57 is finally flowed in when the launched game ball does not win a prize in any of the starting ports or winning openings.

The LED unit 70 is a lower right portion of the game board unit 17 and is arranged outside the guide rail 41. The LED unit 70 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated. Specifically, the LED unit 70 has, as the various display units, a normal symbol display unit 71, a normal symbol hold display unit 72, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, and a first special. It includes a symbol hold display unit 75 and a second special symbol hold display unit 76.

The ordinary symbol display unit 71 displays the result of determination (ordinary symbol determination) for the ordinary symbol game. Here, the ordinary symbol game refers to a game in which it is determined whether or not to drive the ordinary electric accessory 460 to open the state based on the result of the determination (ordinary symbol determination). The ordinary symbol display unit 71 includes display LEDs 71a and 71b. When the predetermined variation display start condition is satisfied, the display LEDs 71a and 71b start the variation display that alternately turns on and off. The combination (display pattern) of the display LEDs 71a and 71b by turning on and off is displayed as a normal symbol. The display LEDs 71a and 71b perform a stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the determination (normal symbol determination) is correct, the combination of turning on / off the display LEDs 71a / 71b (special symbol) is the specific stop display mode. In this way, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is determined that the normal electric accessory 460 is in the open state, the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the second starting port is opened. The difficulty of winning a game ball to 440 is changed.

The hold display unit 72 for a normal symbol displays the number of times of execution of the variable display of the held normal symbol (hereinafter, referred to as "the number of times of holding the variable display of the normal symbol"). The hold display unit 72 for a normal symbol includes display LEDs 72a and 72b. The hold display unit 72 for the normal symbol displays the number of hold times of the variable display of the normal symbol by the combination of turning on and off the display LEDs 72a and 72b. For example, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended for one time, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned off. Further, when the execution of the variation display of the normal symbol is suspended for two times, the display LED 72a is lit and the display LED 72b is lit. Further, when the execution of the variation display of the normal symbol is suspended for three times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b lights up. Further, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended for four times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b blinks.

The first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 display the result of determination (hit determination) for the special symbol game. Here, the special symbol game refers to a game in which the transition or maintenance of the gaming state is determined based on the result of the determination (hit determination).

The first special symbol display unit 73 includes a display LED group 73a composed of eight LEDs. The display LED group 73a displays the variation with the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 (starting winning), and displays the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball. When the predetermined variation display start condition is satisfied, the display LED group 73a starts the variation display in which the eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 73a, the combination (display pattern) by turning on / off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 73a performs a stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 is a hit, the combination of turning on / off the eight LEDs of the display LED group 73a (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. .. In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the game ball can be won in the large winning opening 540. Become. In the following description, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display unit 73 based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 is referred to as the first special symbol.

The second special symbol display unit 74 includes a display LED group 74a composed of eight LEDs. The display LED group 74a displays the variation with the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (starting winning), and displays the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball. When the predetermined variation display start condition is satisfied, the display LED group 74a starts the variation display in which the eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 74a, the combination (display pattern) of turning on / off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 74a performs a stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is a hit, the combination of turning on / off the eight LEDs of the display LED group 74a (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. .. In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the game ball can be won in the large winning opening 540. Become. In the following description, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display unit 74 based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is referred to as the second special symbol.

In this way, when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode in the display LED groups 73a and 74a of the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, it is normal. The transition from the gaming state (normal gaming state) to the hit gaming state, which is a state advantageous to the player, is determined. In the present embodiment, the hit determination includes a big hit determination and a small hit determination. That is, when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state as a hit gaming state. Further, when the result of the hit determination is a small hit, the gaming state is shifted to the small hit gaming state as the hit gaming state. As described above, in the present embodiment, two types of hit game states are provided as the game states that shift from the normal game state.

The first special symbol hold display unit 75 and the second special symbol hold display unit 76 determine the number of times the reserved special symbol variable display is executed (hereinafter, referred to as "the number of times the special symbol variable display is held"). It is to be displayed. The hold display unit 75 for the first special symbol includes display LEDs 75a and 75b. The second special symbol hold display unit 76 includes display LEDs 76a and 76b. The first special symbol hold display unit 75 and the second special symbol hold display unit 76 display the number of hold times of the variable display of the special symbol by turning on / off the display LEDs 75a / 75b and 76a / 76b. The display modes of turning on / off the display LEDs 75a / 75b and 76a / 76b are the same as those of the display LEDs 72a / 72b of the normal symbol hold display unit 72.

As shown in FIG. 5, the back unit 176 decorates the game board unit 17 and has an upper front accessory 1000 arranged above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 and a rear portion of the upper front accessory 1000. An upper back accessory 1100 arranged on the side and above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 36), a lower accessory 1200 arranged below the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and a liquid crystal display. A corner accessory 1300 (see, for example, FIG. 36) is arranged so that a movable body described later is located at four corners of the display area of the device 16, and is arranged at the right side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. It includes a side accessory 1400, a middle panel 1500, an attacker ball trough 1600, a main board case 1700, and a rear box 1800 that accommodates each of the above accessories and is equipped with a main board case 1700 to form a unit. Details of each of the accessories 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, and 1400 included in the back unit 176 will be described later.

Hereinafter, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above, the outline of the internal processing when the game ball wins the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440 will be described.

When the game ball wins the first starting port 5442, the winning game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 5472, and the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first special symbol display unit 73 is started. The memory is suspended (the variable display of the first special symbol is started). As for the hold of the start memory for the first special symbol, both the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display unit 73 and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 74 are executed. It will be canceled on condition that it does not exist. That is, if the game ball wins in the first starting port 5442 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the hold of the start memory is released after the special symbol being displayed in the variable display is stopped and displayed. If the game ball wins the first starting port 5442 when the variable display is not performed for either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the holding of the starting memory is immediately released. When the hold of the start memory is released, the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display unit 73 is started.

When the game ball wins the second start port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441, and the start of the variation display of the second special symbol based on the game ball to the second start port 440. The memory is suspended (the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended). As for the hold of the start memory for the second special symbol, both the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display unit 73 and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 74 are executed. It will be canceled on condition that it does not exist. That is, when the game ball wins the second starting port 440 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the hold of the start memory is released after the special symbol being displayed in the variable display is stopped and displayed. If the game ball wins the second starting port 440 when the variable display is not performed for either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the holding of the starting memory is immediately released. When the hold of the start memory is released, the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 74 is started.

In the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, the special symbols (first and second special symbols) do not change at the same time. That is, while one display unit of the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 is performing the variable display of the special symbol, the other display unit is not performing the variable display of the special symbol. .. In the present embodiment, when both the start memory for the first special symbol and the start memory for the second special symbol are reserved, the second special symbol is held regardless of which start memory is reserved first. The second special symbol display unit 73 performs variable display of the second special symbol, giving priority to the release of the hold for the start memory of the above.

In addition, an upper limit is set for the number of times of holding the variable display of the first and second special symbols. In the present embodiment, the number of times of holding the variable display of the first and second special symbols is set up to 4 times each. Therefore, the maximum number of holdings for the variable display of the special symbol is eight, which is the total number of holdings for the variable display of the special symbol due to the winning of the first starting port 5442 and the second starting port 440.

Further, during the change of the first or second special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, the identification symbol consisting of numbers changes in the liquid crystal display device 16 except in a specific case. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, symbols from "1" to "8" are used as the numbers. Further, as for the identification symbol that is variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the first or second special symbol that is being variablely displayed on the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 is stopped and displayed, and is stopped. Is displayed. The identification symbol is also used as identification information for the effect.

Further, when the first or second special symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 is in a specific stop display mode, the player is notified that it is a hit. The effect image to be produced is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In this embodiment, as will be described later, a plurality of types of hits are provided. In addition, when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the specific stop display mode is set according to the type of hit. In such a configuration, the combination of the identification symbols that are stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is a specific display that can be recognized by the player according to the specific stop display mode of the first or second special symbol. It becomes an aspect. As a result, the player can recognize the type of the hit in addition to the hit. It should be noted that some of the types of hits are in a specific display mode that makes it difficult for the player to recognize, depending on the specific stop display mode of the first or second special symbol. According to this, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that it is a hit and the type of the hit.

[Electrical configuration of gaming machines]
Hereinafter, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 7.

As shown in FIG. 7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mainly composed of a main control circuit 100 that controls the game and a sub control circuit 200 that controls the effect according to the progress of the game.

The main control circuit 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (read-only memory), a main RAM 103 (read / write memory), and the like.

A main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, and the like are connected to the main CPU 101. The main CPU 101 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 102.

The main ROM 102 stores a program for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 101, various tables, and the like.

The main RAM 103 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101. In the present embodiment, the main RAM 103 is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 101, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read or written may be used.

The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area in which information on the special symbol game is stored as start-up memory. Specifically, in the main RAM 103, the first special symbol start storage area (0) in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the fluctuating first special symbol is stored as the start memory, and the first for the upper limit of four times. The first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the special symbol is stored as the start memory, are provided. Similarly, in the main RAM 103, the second special symbol start storage area (0) in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is stored as the start memory, and the second special for the upper limit of 4 times are stored. The second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the symbol is stored as the start memory, are provided.

Further, the main control circuit 100 includes an initial reset circuit 104 that generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, an I / O port 105, a command output port 106, a backup capacitor 107, and the like. The initial reset circuit 104 is connected to the main CPU 101. The I / O port 105 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 101, and transmits output signals from the main CPU 101 to various devices. The command output port 106 transmits a command from the main CPU 101 to the sub control circuit 200. The backup capacitor 107 holds various data stored in the main RAM 103 by promptly supplying power to the main RAM 103, for example, when the power is cut off.

Further, various devices (members) are connected to the main control circuit 100.

For example, the main control circuit 100 includes a normal symbol display unit 71, a normal symbol hold display unit 72, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, and a first special symbol hold display unit 75. The second special symbol hold display unit 76, the start port solenoid 4630 that drives the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460, the large winning opening solenoid 620 that drives the shutter 610, and the like are connected. The main control circuit 100 can control the operation of these devices (members) by transmitting signals. Further, the main control circuit 100 is used to transmit data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk, a function of displaying the number of hits, and the like, and a hall computer that manages a pachinko gaming machine for the entire hall. The external terminal board 320 is connected.

Further, the first start port switch 5472, the second start port switch 441, the passing gate switch 49a, the count switch 541, the general winning port switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a and the like are connected to the main control circuit 100. .. When a game ball is detected by these members, a predetermined detection signal is supplied to the main control circuit 100 from the members. Further, the main control circuit 100 is connected to a backup clear switch 330 or the like that clears the backup data at the time of power failure according to the operation of the manager of the amusement park.

Further, a payout / launch control circuit 300 is connected to the main control circuit 100. The payout / launch control circuit 300 is connected to a payout device 340 for paying out game balls, a launcher 15 for firing game balls, a card unit 360, and the like. The payout device 340 is provided in the payout unit 18. A ball lending operation panel 370 is connected to the card unit 360, and a signal corresponding to the player's operation is supplied to the ball lending operation panel 370.

When the payout / launch control circuit 300 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 100 and the rental ball control signal supplied from the card unit 360, the payout / launch control circuit 300 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 340. Control is performed so that the payout device 340 pays out the game ball. Further, in the payout / launch control circuit 300, when the launch handle 32 is gripped by the player and is rotated in the clockwise direction, electric power is applied to the launch solenoid according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). It supplies and controls the launch of the game ball.

Further, a sub control circuit 200 is connected to the command output port 106. The sub control circuit 200 performs display control on the liquid crystal display device 16, control on sound generated from the speaker 24, control on light of the lamp 25, and the like in response to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 100 supplies a command to the sub control circuit 200, while the sub control circuit 200 cannot supply a signal to the main control circuit 100. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured so that a signal can be transmitted from the control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100.

The sub control circuit 200 includes a sub CPU 201, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203, a display control circuit 204, a voice control circuit 205, a lamp control circuit 206, an accessory control circuit 207, and the like. The sub control circuit 200 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 100. Further, the sub control circuit 200 is connected to an effect button switch 310 that is turned on / off by operating the effect button 62.

The sub CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 202. In particular, the sub CPU 201 controls the sub control circuit 200 according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

The program ROM 202 stores a program for controlling the gaming effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 201, various tables, and the like.

In the present embodiment, the main ROM 102 and the program ROM 202 are configured to be used as storage means for storing programs, tables, and the like, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a storage medium readable by a computer provided with control means is used. If it is, it may be another aspect. For example, as the storage means, a hard disk device or a storage medium such as a CD-ROM, a DVD-ROM, or a ROM cartridge may be used. Further, the program, the table, or the like may not be recorded in advance, but may be downloaded after the power is turned on and recorded in the work RAM 203 or the like. Further, the programs, tables, and the like may be recorded on different storage media.

The work RAM 203 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201. In the present embodiment, the work RAM 203 is used as the temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read or written may be used.

The display control circuit 204 is a circuit for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 16. The display control circuit 204 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM in which data for generating various image data is stored, a frame buffer for buffering the image data, and an image signal for the image data. It is provided with a D / A converter or the like that converts the data.

The display control circuit 204 can perform various processes for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 16 according to the data supplied from the sub CPU 201. The display control circuit 204 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the frame buffer in response to the image display command supplied from the sub CPU 201. The image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 includes various image data related to the game, such as identification symbol image data indicating the identification symbol, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 204 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the liquid crystal display device 16 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the liquid crystal display device 16, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In this way, the display control circuit 204 can control the liquid crystal display device 16 to display an image related to the game.

The voice control circuit 205 is a circuit for controlling the voice generated from the speaker 24. The voice control circuit 205 includes a sound source IC that controls voice, a voice data ROM that stores various voice data, an amplifier for amplifying voice signals (hereinafter referred to as AMP), and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 24. The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM in response to the voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Further, the sound source IC reads the selected voice data from the voice data ROM, converts the voice data into a predetermined voice signal, and supplies the converted voice signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies the audio signal and generates audio from the speaker 24.

The lamp control circuit 206 is a circuit for controlling the lamp 25 including the decorative lamp and the like. The lamp control circuit 206 includes a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a decorative data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp decorative patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 207 is a circuit for controlling each accessory 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, 1400. The accessory control circuit 207 is a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each accessory 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, 1400, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, an operation pattern, and a lighting pattern. Has an accessory data ROM or the like in which is stored.

Further, the drive circuit selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to the accessory operation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Then, the selected operation pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is supplied to control the mechanical operation of each accessory 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, 1400. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on the lighting command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern is supplied to control the lighting operation of each accessory 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, 1400.

[basic specifications]
Hereinafter, the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 8 is a table showing the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, FIG. 8A is a table showing the specifications of the special symbol game. Further, FIG. 8B is a table showing the specifications of the ordinary symbol game. Further, FIG. 8C is a table showing the distribution of hits. Further, FIG. 8D is a table showing the types of hits. The data in the table shown in FIGS. 8A to 8D is stored as a table in the main ROM 102.

In the special symbol game, the jackpot determination is performed in a low probability state or a high probability state. In this way, in the special symbol game, the gaming state in which the jackpot determination is performed in the low probability state is simply referred to as the low probability state (or the normal state or the non-probability change state). Further, in the special symbol game, the gaming state in which the jackpot determination is performed in the high probability state is simply referred to as the high probability state (or the probability variation state). In this way, when the gaming state becomes the probabilistic state, the player is given a state more advantageous than the normal state.

Further, in the normal symbol game, the normal symbol determination is performed in a high probability state or a low probability state. The hit probability of a normal symbol in a high probability state is 100/100. The hit probability of a normal symbol in the low probability state is 1/60. When the result of the normal symbol determination in the high probability state is a hit, the normal electric accessory 460 is opened (normal hit game) three times for 1.5 seconds each time. When the result of the normal symbol determination in the low probability state is a hit, the normal electric accessory 460 is opened (normal hit game) only once for 2.0 seconds each time. In a normal symbol game, a game state in which a normal symbol determination is performed with a high probability is referred to as an electric support state. In addition, when it is not in the electric support state (low probability state), the time per normal symbol determination is 3.0 seconds. A gaming state (a gaming state other than the time saving state) in which the normal symbol determination is performed with a low probability is called a normal state (or a non-time saving state). In the electric support state, the time per normal symbol determination is shorter than in the normal state. Such a state in which the electric support state is performed and the time per normal symbol determination is performed in a short time is referred to as a time saving state. It should be noted that the high-probability state of the normal symbol determination is configured to be able to shift when the jackpot game state ends or the like. Further, the high probability state of the normal symbol determination ends when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, for example, when the time saving state ends. The time saving state is continued until, for example, the hit determination (big hit determination and small hit determination) in the special symbol game is performed a predetermined number of times after the transition from the normal state.

As described above, the normal state indicates a game state in which the jackpot determination is performed with a low probability in the special symbol game, and the normal symbol determination is performed with a low probability in the normal symbol game. There is.

First, the specifications of the special symbol game will be described with reference to FIG. 8A.

As shown in FIG. 8A, in the special symbol game, the probability that the result of the jackpot determination in the low probability state (normal state) will be a jackpot (hereinafter referred to as the jackpot probability) is the first starting port 5442 and the second. In any case of the starting prize of the starting port 440, it is commonly set to 1/200 (one coefficient for 200 random values). Further, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (probability change state) is 1/100 (for 200 random values) in common regardless of the starting prize of either the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440. 2 coefficients). In addition, the probability that the result of the small hit determination will be a hit due to the start winning of the second starting port 440 (hereinafter referred to as the small hit probability) is reduced to 1/4 (50 coefficients for 200 random values). Set. It should be noted that the small hit determination based on the starting prize of the first starting port 5442 is not performed. In other words, the probability that the small hit game will be started based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 440 is that the small hit game is started based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 5442. It is set higher than the probability of

Further, the number of STs is commonly set to 100 regardless of which of the first starting port 5442 and the second starting port 440 is a big hit. The ST (special time) is a probabilistic state in which the process ends according to the number of times (number-cut type). In the following, unless otherwise specified, "times" means the number of hit determinations (big hit determination and small hit determination) after the transition to the probabilistic state.

The number of STs is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 when the super-probability change state described later is reached. Specifically, 0 is displayed as an initial value in the super-probability change state. Then, each time the hit determination (the determination result is lost) is repeated once, a state in which the numerical value is added by 1 is displayed. Then, when the numerical value of the number of STs reaches 100, the super-probability change state ends. The initial value may be 100 instead of 0. In this way, when the initial value of the number of STs is 100, the numerical value is subtracted by 1 each time the hit determination is repeated once.

In addition, the number of prize balls for winning the first starting port 5442 is three, the number of prize balls for winning the second starting port 440 is one, and the number of prize balls for winning the general winning opening 53, 54, 55 is The number of prize balls for winning 10 pieces and the prize opening 540 is set to 15, respectively. Further, the maximum number of winning counts per opening of the jackpot 540 in the jackpot game is set to 10 counts. In addition, the maximum number of winning counts per opening of the ordinary electric accessory 460 in the ordinary symbol game is set to 10 counts. In addition, the number of jackpot symbols is commonly set to 100 regardless of which of the first starting port 5442 and the second starting port 440 is a starting prize. Further, the number of small hit symbols in the case of starting winning of the second starting port 440 is set to 100.

Next, the specifications of the ordinary symbol game will be described with reference to FIG. 8 (b).

As shown in FIG. 8B, in the normal symbol game, the normal symbol determination is not performed in the low probability state. Further, the probability that the result of the normal symbol determination in the high probability state will be a hit is set to 100/100. Further, when the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit, the second starting port 440 (normal electric accessory 460) is opened three times for 1.5 seconds, which is a relatively long time.

Next, the distribution of big hits and small hits will be described with reference to FIG. 8 (c).

As shown in FIG. 8C, the jackpots due to the start winning of the first starting port 5442 are divided into 6 types of jackpot contents (big hit types). Specifically, the jackpot due to the start winning of the first starting port 5442 is divided into 15R probability variation, substantial 10R probability variation, substantial 5R probability variation, 15R normal, substantial 10R normal, and substantial 5R normal. These jackpot contents are set so as to correspond to the special figures (1) jackpots -1 to 6 as jackpots by the starting prize of the first starting port 5442, respectively.

Specifically, a 15R probability variation is set corresponding to the special figure (1) jackpot -1. In addition, a substantial 10R probability variation is set corresponding to the special figure (1) jackpot-2. In addition, a substantial 5R probability variation is set corresponding to the special figure (1) jackpot-3. Further, 15R normal is set corresponding to the special figure (1) jackpot-4. In addition, a substantial 10R normal is set corresponding to the special figure (1) jackpot-5. In addition, a substantial 5R normal is set corresponding to the special figure (1) jackpot-6.

In addition, the big hits due to the start winning of the second starting port 440 are divided into 6 types of big hit contents (big hit types). Specifically, the jackpot due to the start winning of the second starting port 440 is divided into 15R probability variation, real ball output small probability variation, special probability variation, 15R normal, real ball output small normal, and special normal. These jackpot contents are set so as to correspond to special figures (2) jackpots -1 to 6 as jackpots by starting winning of the second starting port 440, respectively.

Specifically, a 15R probability variation is set corresponding to the special figure (2) jackpot -1. In addition, the actual ball output small probability change is set corresponding to the special figure (2) jackpot-2. In addition, a special probability variation is set corresponding to the special figure (2) jackpot-3. Further, 15R normal is set corresponding to the special figure (2) jackpot-4. In addition, in response to the special figure (2) jackpot -5, a small amount of actual balls is set. In addition, a special normal is set corresponding to the special figure (2) jackpot-6.

In addition, small hits are divided into two types of small hit contents (small hit types). Specifically, small hits are divided into two open (1) and two open (2). These small hit contents are set so as to correspond to the special figures (2) small hits -1 and 2 as small hits, respectively. Specifically, the opening (1) is set twice corresponding to the special figure (2) small hit-1. Further, the opening (2) is set twice corresponding to the special figure (2) small hit-2.

Here, the column (notation) of "number" shown in the table of FIG. 8C indicates the number of big hit symbols or the number of small hit symbols corresponding to each hit content. That is, since the number of jackpot symbols due to the starting prize of the first starting port 5442 is 100 as described above, the special figure (1) jackpots -1 to 6 are the jackpots due to the starting winning of the first starting port 5442. The probabilities (expected values) to be distributed are set to be 25%, 15%, 10%, 25%, 15%, and 10%. Similarly, in the case of the special figure (2) jackpots -1 to 6 being jackpots due to the start winning of the second starting port 440, the probabilities (expected values) of being distributed are 25%, 15%, 10%, respectively. It is set to be 25%, 15%, and 10%. Similarly, the small hits -1 and 2 in the special figure (2) are set so that the probability (expected value) of distribution is 98% and 2%, respectively, when the small hits are made.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8 (c), special figures (1) big hits -1 to 6, special figures (2) big hits -1 to 6, and special figures (2) small hits -1 and 2 are shown. The number of time reductions given after the end of each hit game (big hit game or small hit game) is set. The number of time reductions given after the end of the hit game is set to be different depending on the state of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game when the big hit determination or the small hit determination is performed.

Here, the notation of "HH" shown in the table of FIG. 8C indicates that the special symbol game is in the probabilistic state and the normal symbol game is in the time saving state. Further, the notation of "HL" indicates that the special symbol game is in the probabilistic state and the normal symbol game is in the non-time saving state. Further, the notation of "LH" indicates that the special symbol game is in the non-probability changing state and the normal symbol game is in the time saving state. Further, the notation of "LL" indicates that the special symbol game is in the non-probability changing state and the normal symbol game is in the non-time saving state. Further, the notation of "during high probability" indicates that during the high probability state in the special symbol game, that is, a maximum of 100 time saving times are given.

In such a setting, for example, when the special symbol game is in the non-probability state and the normal symbol game is in the non-time saving state (in the case of "LL"), the special symbol (1) jackpot -1 or 6 is a jackpot. , 50 times of time saving is given. On the other hand, for example, in the case of "LL" as well, if the jackpot is from 2 to 5 in the special figure (1) jackpot, the number of time reductions is not given. That is, in the case where the special symbol game is in the non-probability changing state and the normal symbol game is in the non-time saving state, if the jackpot is due to the starting prize of the first starting port 5442, 35% (special symbol (1) jackpot- With a probability of 25% in the case of 1 + 10% in the case of special figure (1) jackpot -6), 50 time reductions are given, and with a remaining 65% probability, the time reductions are not given.

Further, in the case of a small hit, after the small hit game is completed, in principle, the game state before the small hit is not changed and is maintained as it is. Specifically, when a small hit is made during ST, after the small hit game is completed, ST is restarted so as to continuously count from the number of STs related to the hit determination which is the small hit. For example, if a small hit is reached at the 60th time during ST, the ST is restarted so as to count from the 61st time after the small hit game is completed. In this case, the remaining number of STs after the end of the small hit game is 40 times. Similarly, if a small hit is made during the time saving state, the time saving state is restarted so as to continuously count from the number of times related to the hit determination in which the small hit is made after the small hit game is completed.

As an exception to the above principle, for example, if a small hit is made at the 100th inning (the last inning of ST) during ST, the ST will be in a state of being completed after the small hit game is completed (a state before the small hit is made). Is not maintained). Similarly, for example, if a small hit is made at the 100th time during the time saving state of 100 times, the time saving state is finished after the small hit game is completed (the state before the small hit is not maintained).

In the following, the hit contents (big hit contents and small hit contents) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 8 (d).

As described above, in the present embodiment, as the jackpot content (type of jackpot), 15R probability variation, 15R normal, real 10R probability variation, real 10R normal, real 5R probability change, real 5R normal, special probability change, special normal, real ball ejection A small probability change and a small number of actual balls are usually provided. Further, as the contents of the small hit (type of small hit), the opening twice (1) and (2) are provided.

15R probability variation and 15R normal are jackpots in which the number of open seconds of the jackpot 540 per round is set to 27.996 seconds in all rounds of all 15 rounds when the jackpot game is started. be. In this way, in the 15R probability variation and the 15R normal, when the big hit game is started, the maximum number of game balls can be set to win the big winning opening 540 in all rounds.

In the real 10R probability variation and the real 10R normal, when the big hit game is started, the number of open seconds of the big winning opening 540 per round is 27.996 seconds in the 1st to 10th rounds out of all 15 rounds. It is a big hit that is set and the number of open seconds of the big winning opening 540 per round is set to 0.102 seconds in the 11th to 15th rounds. In this way, in the real 10R probability variation and the real 10R normal, when the big hit game is started, the game ball is set so as to be able to win the big winning opening 540 in the 1st to 10th rounds, and in the 11th to 15th rounds. The game ball is set so as to be difficult (almost impossible) to win in the large winning opening 540.

In the real 5R probability variation and the real 5R normal, when the big hit game is started, the number of open seconds of the big winning opening 540 per round is 27.996 seconds in the 1st to 5th rounds out of all 15 rounds. It is a big hit that is set and the number of open seconds of the big winning opening 540 per round is set to 0.102 seconds in the 6th to 15th rounds. In this way, in the real 5R probability variation and the real 5R normal, when the big hit game is started, the game ball is set so as to be able to win the big winning opening 540 in the 1st to 5th rounds, and in the 6th to 15th rounds. The game ball is set so as to be difficult (almost impossible) to win in the large winning opening 540.

Special probability change and special normal are set so that when the big hit game is started, the big winning opening 540 is opened three times in the first round out of all 15 rounds, and the first round is concerned. The opening seconds of the large winning opening 540 are set to 0.896 seconds in the first and second opening of the above, and the opening seconds of the large winning opening 540 are set to 26.466 seconds in the remaining third opening. In the 15th round from the beginning, the number of open seconds of the big winning opening 540 per round is set to 27.966 seconds. In this way, in the special probability variation and the special normal, when the big hit game is started, it is difficult to win the game ball into the big winning opening 540 in the first and second opening in the first round (for example, 1 per opening). It is set so that the maximum number of game balls can be won in the large winning opening 540 in the remaining 3rd opening and the 2nd to 15th rounds. In the special probability variation and the special normal, the interval between the second opening and the third opening in the first round is set to 5.0 seconds.

When the big hit game is started, the number of seconds to open the big winning opening 540 per round is 0 in the 1st and 2nd rounds out of all 15 rounds. It is a big hit set to .896 seconds, and the number of open seconds of the big winning opening 540 per round is set to 0.102 seconds in the 3rd to 15th rounds. In this way, it is usually difficult to win a game ball in the big winning opening 540 in all rounds when the big hit game is started (more specifically, the first and second rounds). Is set so that, for example, one game ball is won for each opening, and the game ball cannot be won in the third and subsequent rounds). It should be noted that, in the actual ball output small probability change and the actual ball output small amount, the interval between the second round and the third round is usually set to 5.0 seconds.

The double opening (1) and (2) are small hits in which the large winning opening 540 is opened twice for 0.896 seconds each when the small hit game is started. That is, the small hit game is to operate the large winning opening 540 in a predetermined opening / closing mode. Thus, in the two opening (1) and (2), even if the small hit game is started, the game It is set so that it is difficult to win a ball in the large winning opening 540 (for example, one prize is won for each opening). In the second opening (1), the small hit end interval after the opening of the second large winning opening 540 is set to 1.0 second. Further, in the second opening (2), the small hit end interval after the opening of the second large winning opening 540 is completed is set to 5.0 seconds.

In this way, when the type of big hit is special probability variation and special normal, the number of open seconds of the big winning opening 540 in the first and second opening of the first round, and when it is a small hit (opening twice (1)). And (in the case of (2)), the number of opening seconds of the large winning opening 540 in the first and second opening is set to 0.896 seconds, which is the same as each other. That is, the special probability variation and special normal and the small hit (opened twice (1) and (2)) have the same opening mode of the large winning opening 540 until the second opening of the large winning opening 540 is completed. Set. In this way, in the special probability variation and the special normal big hit game, in the first and second opening of the first round, the big winning opening 540 is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing mode (pseudo small hit opening and closing mode) that pretends to be a small hit game. It is something that makes you.

In the small hits (opening twice (1) and (2)), the hit end intervals after the opening of the second large winning opening 540 is completed are set so as to be different from each other. Specifically, in the second opening (1), the hit end interval after the opening of the second large winning opening 540 is completed is set to 1.0 second. Further, in the second opening (2), the hit end interval after the opening of the second large winning opening 540 is completed is set to 5.0 seconds.

In addition, the interval between the opening between the second opening and the third opening in the special probability variation and the special normal, and the small hit end interval in the second opening (2) of the small hits are the same number of seconds. It is set to (5.0 seconds). That is, the special probability variation and special normal and the small hit twice opening (2) are set in the same opening mode of the large winning opening 540 until the third opening of the large winning opening 540 is started. In other words, the special probability variation and the special normal jackpot game are found to be jackpot games after the third opening of the first round is performed. In this way, the special probability variation and the special normal big hit game are operated in the pseudo small hit opening / closing mode, and then the big winning opening 540 is opened / closed in the specific opening / closing mode (opening / closing mode after the big hit is found) that is found to be the big hit game. It is something to make.

Similarly, the number of seconds for opening the big winning opening 540 in the opening of the first and second rounds when the type of big hit is the real ball output small probability change and the real ball output small normal, and the case where the big hit is a small hit (opened twice). The number of opening seconds of the large winning opening 540 in the first and second opening of (1) and (2) is set to 0.896 seconds, which is the same as each other. That is, the real ball output small probability change and the actual ball output small normal, and the small hit (opened twice (1) and (2)) are the large winning opening 540 until the second opening of the large winning opening 540 is completed. The opening mode of is set to be the same.

In addition, the interval between rounds between the opening of the second round and the opening of the third round in the actual ball ejection small probability change and the actual ball ejection small amount normal, and the small hit end interval in the small hit opening twice (2). And are set to the same number of seconds (5.0 seconds) as each other. That is, the real ball output small probability change and the actual ball output small normal, and the small hit twice opening (2) are the opening modes of the large winning opening 540 until the third opening of the large winning opening 540 is started. Set to the same. In this way, in the normal big hit game with a small probability of a small number of balls and a small number of balls, the big winning opening 540 is a predetermined opening / closing mode (pseudo small hit opening / closing mode) that pretends to be a small hit game in the opening of the first and second rounds. Is to open and close.

[Game flow]
Hereinafter, the flow of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming progresses while repeating the transition to an appropriate gaming state at a predetermined timing. Here, the corresponding effect modes are set for each of the game states. Various production contents are set in the production mode. That is, when the game is started, the game shifts to an appropriate game state, and the effect mode corresponding to the shifted game state is produced. In the present embodiment, the effect modes 1 to 6 are mainly provided as the effect modes.

As shown in FIG. 9, at the start of the game, in many cases, the game state is the normal game state (non-probability change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state). Further, in the normal gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 1 is performed as the effect mode (step S900). The transition from the normal gaming state to another gaming state is mainly triggered by the result of the winning determination by the starting prize of the first starting port 5442. Exceptionally, for example, when there is a hold of the variation display of the second special symbol when the electric support state of 100 times is completed, the hit determination of the second special symbol is the maximum number of holds in the normal game state. It is performed up to 4 times, and if some big hit is made according to the judgment result, it will shift to the electric support state, but since it is a rare case, it is omitted from this drawing. In addition, since the above four times are in a state where it is possible to return to the electric support state if a big hit occurs at that time even though the electric support state has ended, it is a normal game state and the second special symbol While the hit determination is being performed, the player may have a sense of expectation as a special effect mode different from the effect mode 1.

In the normal game state, the jackpot determination is made by a so-called left-handed start winning of the first start port 5442. Further, when the result of the big hit determination by the start winning of the first starting port 5442 becomes a big hit and the gaming state shifts to the time saving (electric support) state, so-called right-handed hitting is performed. In this way, while the time saving (electric support) state continues, the big hit determination is made by the starting prize of the second starting port 440. In addition, although the result of the big hit judgment by the start winning of the first starting port 5442 is a big hit, the game state does not shift to the time saving (electric support) state (the game state is the non-time saving (non-electric support) state). If it remains), left-handed strikes will continue.

When the gaming state shown in step S900 is a non-probability change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 1 is performed, the result of the jackpot determination (hit determination) is the special figure (1) jackpot. When it becomes -1, the game state shifts from the normal game state to the probabilistic state / time saving (electric support) state. Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 1 ends and the effect of the effect mode 2 starts (steps S901 and S902). In the gaming state in which the effect of the effect mode 2 is performed, the number of STs is set to 100 times, and the number of time reductions is set to 50 times.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S902 is the probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 2 is performed, the result of the jackpot determination (hit determination) is the special figure (2) jackpot-. When any of 1 to 3 is set, the gaming state shifts to the probabilistic change state / time saving (electric support) state (steps S910 and S911). That is, the gaming state after the transition is the same as the gaming state before the transition. Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 2 ends and the effect of the effect mode 3 starts. In the gaming state in which the effect of the effect mode 3 is performed, the number of STs is set to 100, and the number of time reductions is set to continue during the probability change state (up to 100 times).

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S911 is a probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 3 is performed, the result of the jackpot determination (hit determination) is the special figure (2) jackpot-. When any of 1 to 3 is set, the gaming state shifts to the probability change state / time saving (electric support) state again (steps S912 and S911). Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 3 is continued. In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the number of STs and the number of time reductions counted up to the big hit are cleared. That is, the number of STs and the number of time reductions are counted from 0.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S911 is a probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 3 is performed, the result of the jackpot determination (hit determination) is the special figure (2) jackpot-. When any of 4 to 6 is set, the gaming state shifts to the non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state described later (steps S913 and S921). With the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 3 ends and the effect of the effect mode 4 starts.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S911 is in the probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 3 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (hit determination) is a hit (opened twice (opened twice). In 1) and (2)), the gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the hit. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is a predetermined number (100 times), the ST (probability variation state) and the time saving state are terminated, so that the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state. (Steps S914, S915; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 3 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 starts. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the hit is not the predetermined number (100 times), the current gaming state (probability change state / time saving (electric support) state) is maintained, and the ST number and time saving number are cleared. The count is restarted (steps S914, S915; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 3 is continued.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S911 is in the probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 3 is performed, the results of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (hit determination) are lost. , The game state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number of times (100 times), the ST (probability change state) and the time saving state are terminated, so that the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state. (Steps S916, S915; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 3 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 starts. On the other hand, if the number of hit judgments related to the loss is not the predetermined number (100 times), the current gaming state (probability change state / time saving (electric support) state) is maintained, and the ST number and time saving number are cleared. The count is restarted (steps S916, S915; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 3 is continued.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S902 is the probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 2 is performed, the result of the jackpot determination (hit determination) is the special figure (2) jackpot-. When any of 4 to 6 is reached, the gaming state shifts to the non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state (steps S920 and S921). Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 2 ends and the effect of the effect mode 4 starts. In the gaming state in which the effect of the effect mode 4 is performed, the number of time reductions is set to 100 times.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S921 is a non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect mode 4 is performed, the result of the jackpot determination (hit determination) is the special figure (2) jackpot -1. When any of 3 to 3, the gaming state shifts to the probabilistic state / time saving (electric support) state (steps S922 and S911). Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 4 ends and the effect of the effect mode 3 starts. Along with this transition of the game state, the number of time reductions counted until the big hit is cleared.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S921 is a non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect mode 4 is performed, the result of the jackpot determination (hit determination) is the special figure (2) jackpot-4. When it becomes any of 6 to 6, the gaming state shifts to the non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state again (steps S923, S921). Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 4 is continued. In addition, with the transition of the game state, the number of time reductions counted until the big hit is cleared.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S921 is a non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect mode 4 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (hit determination) is a hit (opened twice (1). ) And (2)), the gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the hit. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is a predetermined number (100 times), the time saving state ends, so that the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state (steps S924, S925; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 4 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 starts. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the hit is not the predetermined number (100 times), the current gaming state (non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state) is maintained, and the time saving number is not cleared. , Counting is resumed (steps S924, S925; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 4 is continued.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S921 is a non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 4 is performed, the results of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (hit determination) are lost. Then, the gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number of times (100 times), the time saving state ends, so that the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state (steps S926, S925; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 4 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 starts. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not the predetermined number (100 times), the current gaming state (non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state) is maintained, and the time saving number of times is not cleared. , Counting is resumed (steps S926, S925; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 4 is continued.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S902 is the probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 2 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (hit determination) is a hit (opened twice (opened twice). In 1) and (2)), the gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the hit. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is a predetermined number (50 times), the ST (probability change state) continues, while the time reduction state ends, so that the probability change state / non-time reduction (probability change state / non-time reduction) The gaming state shifts to the non-electric support) state (steps S930, S931; Yes, S933). That is, the effect of the effect mode 2 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 5 starts. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the hit is not the predetermined number (50 times), the current gaming state (probability change state / time saving (electric support) state) is maintained, and the ST number and time saving number are cleared. The count is restarted (steps S930, S931; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 2 is continued.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S902 is in the probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 2 is performed, the results of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (hit determination) are lost. , The game state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number of times (50 times), the ST (probability change state) continues, while the time saving state ends, so that the probability change state / non-time reduction (probability change state / non-time reduction) The gaming state shifts to the non-electric support) state (steps S932, S931; Yes, S933). That is, the effect of the effect mode 2 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 5 starts. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not the predetermined number (50 times), the current gaming state (probability change state / time reduction (electric support)) is maintained, and the ST number and time reduction number are cleared. Instead, counting is restarted (steps S932, S931; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 2 is continued.

In this way, when the effect of the effect mode 2 ends and the effect of the effect mode 5 starts, the ST (probability change state) continues, while the time saving (electric support) state ends. That is, the player does not right-handed but left-handed. In the present embodiment, the effect of the effect mode 5 is set to the same content as the effect of the effect mode 1. In this way, when the effect of the effect mode 5 is started, the player is in a game state (latent probability change state) in which it is difficult to recognize that the ST (probability change state) is continuing. The effect of the effect mode 5 may be the same as the effect of the effect mode 1, and may be performed by notifying the player that the latent probability change state has been determined.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S933 is a probability change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is the special figure (1). When either the jackpot -1 or 2 is reached, the gaming state shifts to the probability change state / time saving (electric support) state (steps S934 and S911). Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 5 ends and the effect of the effect mode 3 starts. With this transition of the gaming state, the number of STs counted up to the big hit is cleared.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S933 is a probabilistic change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is the special figure (1). When the jackpot is -3, the gaming state shifts to the probabilistic state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state again (steps S935 and S933). Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 5 is continued. In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the number of STs counted up to the big hit is cleared.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S933 is a probability change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is the special figure (1). When either the jackpot-4 or 5 is reached, the gaming state shifts to the non-probability change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state (that is, the normal gaming state) (steps S936 and S900). Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 5 ends and the effect of the effect mode 1 starts. With this transition of the gaming state, the number of STs counted up to the big hit is cleared.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S933 is a probability change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is the special figure (1). When the jackpot reaches -6, the gaming state shifts to the non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state (steps S937 and S951). Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 5 ends and the effect of the effect mode 6 starts. With this transition of the gaming state, the number of STs counted up to the big hit is cleared.

Further, if the gaming state shown in step S933 is a probabilistic change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, if the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is lost, the said. The game state is changed according to the number of hit judgments related to loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number, the ST (probability change state) ends, so that the game state shifts to the normal game state (steps S938, S939; Yes). , S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 5 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 starts. On the other hand, if the number of hit judgments related to the loss is not the predetermined number, the current gaming state (probability change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state) is maintained, the ST number is not cleared, and the count is counted. It is restarted (steps S938, S939; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 5 is continued.

The predetermined number of times in step S939 is set according to what triggered the production of the production mode 5 currently being performed. Specifically, when the production of the production mode 5 currently being performed is started when the number of hit determinations reaches 50 after the production of the production mode 2 is started (step S931; Yes). ), The predetermined number of times in step S939 is 50 times (from the start of the effect of the effect mode 5). On the other hand, the effect of the effect mode 5 currently being performed is the special figure (1) jackpot-2 or 3 shown in step S960, or the special figure (1) jackpot-3 shown in step S935. When the operation is started with the above as an opportunity, the predetermined number of times in step S939 is 100 times (from the start of the effect in the effect mode 5).

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S900 is a non-probability change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (1). ) When the jackpot reaches -6, the game state shifts from the normal game state to the non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state. Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 1 ends and the effect of the effect mode 6 starts (steps S950 and S951). In the gaming state in which the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the number of time reductions is set to 50 times.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S951 is a non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the result of the jackpot determination (hit determination) is the special figure (2) jackpot. When any of -1 to 3 is set, the gaming state shifts to the probabilistic change state / time saving (electric support) state (steps S952 and S911). Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 6 ends and the effect of the effect mode 3 starts. Along with this transition of the game state, the number of time reductions counted until the big hit is cleared.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S951 is a non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the result of the jackpot determination (hit determination) is the special figure (2) jackpot. When any of -4 to 6, the gaming state shifts to the non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state (steps S953, S921). Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 6 ends and the effect of the effect mode 4 starts. Along with this transition of the game state, the number of time reductions counted until the big hit is cleared.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S951 is a non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (hit determination) is a hit (opened twice). In (1) and (2)), the gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the hit. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is a predetermined number (50 times), the time saving state ends, so that the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state (steps S954, S955; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 6 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 starts. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the hit is not the predetermined number (50 times), the current gaming state (non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state) is maintained, and the time saving number is not cleared. , Counting is restarted (steps S954, S955; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 6 is continued.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S951 is a non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the results of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (hit determination) are lost. Then, the game state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number of times (50 times), the time saving state ends, so that the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state (steps S956, S955; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 6 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 starts. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not the predetermined number (50 times), the current gaming state (non-probability change state / time reduction (electric support)) is maintained, and the time reduction number is not cleared. Counting is resumed (steps S956, S955; No).

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S900 is a non-probability change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (1). ) When the jackpot is -2 or 3, the gaming state shifts to the probabilistic state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state (steps S960 and S933). That is, the effect of the effect mode 1 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 5 starts.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S900 is a non-probability change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (1). ) When the jackpot reaches -4 or 5, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state again. Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 1 is continued (steps S970 and S900).

Further, when the game state shown in step S900 is a non-probability change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 1 is performed, if the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is lost, The normal gaming state is maintained. That is, the effect of the effect mode 1 is continued (steps S980 and S900).

In such a game flow, when the effect mode 2 is started (step S902), the number of STs is set to 100 by shifting the game state to the probability change state / time saving (electric support) state. NS. Similarly, when the effect mode 3 is started (step S911), the number of STs is set to 100 by shifting the game state to the probabilistic change state / time saving (electric support) state. In this way, after the effect mode 2 or 3 is started (that is, after the ST is started), for example, when the result of the hit determination is a small hit, the current gaming state is maintained after the end of the small hit game (in principle). , ST count is not cleared and counting is restarted. In this way, the effect of the effect mode 2 or 3 is continued.

Here, as described above, when the small hit game is started, the large winning opening 540 is opened twice to the extent that one game ball is won for each opening. That is, when the effect mode 2 or 3 is started (when the ST is started), for example, until the number of hit determinations becomes a predetermined number and the effect mode ends (until the ST ends). In the meantime), the small hit game can be repeated. In this way, when the small hit game is repeatedly performed, the prize ball can be acquired by the small hit game, and the number of game balls in the player's hand can be increased.

In the following, an ST capable of acquiring a prize ball by a small hit game and increasing the number of game balls in the player's hand will be referred to as a super-probability change state. Further, a game in which a prize ball is acquired by a small hit game after the super-probability state is reached and the number of game balls in the player's hand is increased is referred to as RUSH. That is, the rush (per time) shall continue from the big hit that triggered the transition to the super-probability change state to the next big hit or the end of the time saving state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the game in which the time saving state ends (for example, the game of 100 times or 50 times of the hit determination described later) is the end condition of the rush.

If the effect mode 3 is started by any of the jackpots -1 to 3 in the special figure (2) after the effect mode 2 is started, the game states before and after the jackpot are also in a super-probable state. Therefore, it is assumed that the super-probability change state continues. In such a case, it is assumed that the rush has been performed continuously (the second rush has been performed).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the super-probability change state is reached, the ball ejection display regarding the acquired ball ejection is performed. A detailed description of the payout display will be described later.

[Explanation of operation of main control circuit]
Hereinafter, the processing performed by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) will be described.

[Main processing]
First, the main processing performed by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S10, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a backup restoration process, an initialization setting process, and the like. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S11.

In step S11, the main CPU 101 performs a random number value update process. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the initial value random value counter, the effect condition selection random value counter, and the like. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S12.

In step S12, the main CPU 101 performs a timer update process. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates various timers such as a timer for synchronizing the main CPU 101 and the sub CPU 201, and an opening time timer of the large winning opening 540. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S13.

In step S13, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol control process. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the hit determination result is a hit according to the detection signal from the first start port switch 5472 or the second start port switch 441, and stores the determination result in the main RAM 103. Perform processing, etc. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S14. The details of this process will be described later.

In step S14, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol control process. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit according to the detection signal from the passing gate switch 49a, and performs a process of storing the determination result in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S15.

In step S15, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol display device control process. In this process, the main CPU 101 has the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 according to the determination results of the hit determination and the normal symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 in the processes in steps S13 and S14. A process of storing the control signal for driving the normal symbol display unit 71 and the normal symbol display unit 71 in the main RAM 103 is performed. The main CPU 101 transmits the stored control signal to the first special symbol display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74, and the normal symbol display unit 71. In this way, the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 fluctuates and stops the special symbol based on the received control signal. Further, the normal symbol display unit 71 fluctuates and stops the normal symbol based on the received control signal. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S16.

In step S16, the main CPU 101 performs game information output processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs game information to an external device (for example, the calling device, the hall computer, or the like). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S17.

In step S17, the main CPU 101 performs port output processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs a control signal for driving the large winning opening 540 (shutter 610) and the second starting opening 440 (ordinary electric accessory 460). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S18.

In step S18, the main CPU 101 performs a command output process. In this process, the main CPU 101 transmits various commands to the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU 201). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S19.

In step S19, the main CPU 101 performs a payout process. In this process, the main CPU 101 hits various winning openings (specifically, a large winning opening 540, a first starting opening 5442, a second starting opening 440, and a general winning opening 53, 54, 55, 56). Determines whether or not a prize has been won. When the main CPU 101 determines that the game ball has won a prize in various winning openings, the main CPU 101 transmits a payout request command corresponding to the winning to the payout / launch control circuit 300. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S11 again, and repeats the processes from step S11 to step S19.

[System timer interrupt processing]
Hereinafter, the system timer interrupt process performed by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) will be described with reference to FIG. The system timer interrupt process is performed by interrupting the main process at predetermined intervals even when the main process is being performed.

In step S20, the main CPU 101 performs a register save process. In this process, the main CPU 101 saves the running program stored in the register. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S21.

In step S21, the main CPU 101 performs a random number value update process. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the jackpot determination random number value counter, the jackpot symbol determination random number value counter, and the like. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S22.

In step S22, the main CPU 101 performs a switch input process. In this process, the main CPU 101 uses various switches (specifically, a first start port switch 5472, a second start port switch 441, a passing gate switch 49a, a count switch 541, and a general winning port switch 53a, 54a, 55a. -It is determined whether or not a signal is input to (56a, etc.) (that is, whether or not a game ball is detected by various switches). When the main CPU 101 determines that the game ball has been detected in any of the various switches (when the game ball wins in any of the various winning openings), the main CPU 101 transmits a command to the sub control circuit 200. .. For example, when the count switch 541 counts (detects) a game ball, the main CPU 101 transmits a large winning opening winning command to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S23. The details of this process will be described later.

In step S23, the main CPU 101 performs a register reset process. In this process, the main CPU 101 returns the saved program to the register. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Special symbol control processing]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (special symbol control process) performed in step S13 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 13, the numerical values described on the sides of steps S101 to S108 indicate the control state flags corresponding to these steps. Here, the control state flag indicates the state of the game of the special symbol game, and enables any of the processes from step S101 to step S108 to be executed. The numerical value is stored in a storage area that functions as a control state flag in the main RAM 103.

In step S100, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading the control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 101 reads out the control state flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S101.

In steps S101 to S108, which will be described later, the main CPU 101 executes a step corresponding to the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. More specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to perform processing in each step based on the value of the control state flag, and according to the determination result, each at a predetermined timing set for each step. Perform the processing in the step. As a result, the specific symbol game is advanced. The predetermined timing is determined according to a waiting time timer or the like. Before reaching the predetermined timing, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine without performing the processing in each step, and performs another subroutine. In addition to this subroutine, the main CPU 101 also performs the system timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 12 at predetermined cycles.

In step S101, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol memory check process. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S102.

In step S102, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol fluctuation time management process. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag as a value (01H) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management, and when the fluctuation time elapses, sets the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management as the control state flag. Is set to, and the waiting time (for example, 600 ms) after confirmation is set in the waiting time timer. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S103 after the waiting time has elapsed after the determination. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S103.

In step S103, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol display time management process. In this process, the main CPU 101 has a control state flag of a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management, and when the waiting time elapses after confirmation, the result of the hit determination is a hit (big hit or small hit). It is determined whether or not it is. When the result of the hit determination is a hit, the main CPU 101 sets a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management in the control state flag, and sets the time corresponding to the hit start interval in the waiting time timer. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S104 after the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed. On the other hand, the main CPU 101 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when the result of the hit determination is a loss. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to execute the process of step S108. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S104.

In step S104, the main CPU 101 performs a hit start interval management process. In this process, the main CPU 101 sends a signal that the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management and the large winning opening 540 is opened when the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed. , Supply to the large winning opening solenoid 620. As a result, the main CPU 101 controls the opening and closing of the large winning opening 540.

Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (04H) indicating that the large winning opening is open in the control state flag, and sets the opening upper limit time (for example, about 0.1 seconds or about 30 seconds) to the large winning opening opening time timer. Set to. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S105. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S105.

In step S105, the main CPU 101 performs the large winning opening reopening waiting time management process. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the large winning opening reopening count counter when the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the large winning opening reopening waiting time management and the time corresponding to the inter-round interval elapses. The memory is updated so as to increase by "1". The main CPU 101 sets a value (04H) indicating that the large winning opening is open in the control state flag. The main CPU 101 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, about 0.1 second or about 30 seconds) in the large winning opening opening time timer. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S106. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S106.

In step S106, the main CPU 101 performs a large winning opening opening process. In this process, when the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating that the large winning opening is open, the main CPU 101 has elapsed the condition that the large winning opening winning counter is "10" or more, and the opening upper limit time has elapsed ( It is determined whether or not any of the conditions that the large winning opening opening time timer is "0") is satisfied. When any of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the grand prize opening 540. Then, it is determined whether or not the condition that the large winning opening opening number counter satisfies the condition that the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or more than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening number (the final round) is satisfied. The main CPU 101 sets a value (06H) indicating the winning end interval in the control state flag when it is the final round, and sets a value (05H) indicating the large winning opening reopening waiting time management when it is not the final round. Set to the control status flag. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S107.

In step S107, the main CPU 101 performs a hit end interval process. In this process, the main CPU 101 controls a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval and the time corresponding to the hit end interval elapses. Set to the status flag. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S108. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S108.

In step S108, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol game end process. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (00H) indicating the special symbol memory check when the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S101. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

As described above, the special symbol game is advanced by setting the control state flag by the main CPU 101. Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags to "00H", "01H", "02H", and "07H" when the result of the hit determination is lost in the case where the game is not in the big hit or small hit game state. By setting in this order, the processes of step S101, step S102, step S103, and step S108 shown in FIG. 13 are performed at predetermined timings. Further, when the main CPU 101 is not in the big hit or small hit gaming state and the result of the hit determination is the big hit or the small hit, the control state flags are set to "00H", "01H", "02H", "03H". By setting in this order, the processes of step S101, step S102, step S103, and step S104 shown in FIG. 13 are performed at predetermined timings to control the big hit or small hit gaming state. Further, when the main CPU 101 is controlled to the big hit or small hit gaming state, the control state flags are set in the order of "04H" and "05H", so that steps S105 and S106 shown in FIG. 13 are set. Is performed at a predetermined timing to perform a big hit or a small hit game. Further, when the end condition of the big hit or small hit game is satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "04H", "06H", and "07H", so that step S105 shown in FIG. 13 The processes of steps S107 and S108 are performed at predetermined timings to end the big hit or small hit game.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (special symbol memory check process) performed in step S101 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S110, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (00H) indicating a special symbol memory check. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol memory check, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S111. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not a value indicating the special symbol memory check, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

In step S111, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the presence / absence of start storage. In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no start memory of the special symbol game, that is, from the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) or the second special symbol start storage. If the data (hit determination random value) is not stored in the second special symbol start storage area (4) from the area (0), the process is transferred to step S112. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is a start memory (more specifically, a start memory corresponding to at least one of the first and second special symbols), the process shifts to step S113.

In step S112, the main CPU 101 performs a demo display process. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a demo display permission value in the main RAM 103. When the state in which the start memory of the special symbol game becomes 0 is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the main CPU 101 sets a value that permits execution of the demo display as the demo display permission value. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the demo display command when the demo display permission value is a predetermined value. The demo display command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the demo display is performed on the liquid crystal display device 16 under the control of the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S113, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is 0. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines the presence / absence of data from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is 0. That is, when it is determined that no data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process is transferred to step S115. On the other hand, in the main CPU 101, the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is not 0, that is, data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). If it is determined, the process is moved to step S114.

In step S114, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (02H) indicating that the second special symbol is fluctuating as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S116.

In step S115, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (01H) indicating that the first special symbol is fluctuating as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S116.

In step S116, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol fluctuation time management as a control state flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S117.

In step S117, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage transfer process. In this process, when the special symbol to be variablely displayed is the first special symbol, the main CPU 101 displays each of the data from the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). A process of shifting (storing) from the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (3) is performed. Further, when the special symbol to be variablely displayed is the second special symbol, the main CPU 101 displays the data of the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) in the second. A process of shifting (storing) from the special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (3) is performed. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S118.

In step S118, the main CPU 101 performs a jackpot determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 reads out the high probability flag, and selects one hit judgment table from a plurality of hit judgment tables having different numbers of judgment values (big hit judgment values) to be big hits based on the read high probability flag. do. That is, when the high probability flag is a predetermined value, the hit (big hit) judgment table for high probability with a large number of big hit judgment values is referred to, and when the high probability flag is not a predetermined value, the big hit judgment is made. A normal hit (big hit) judgment table with a small value is referred to. As described above, when the high probability flag is a predetermined value, that is, when the gaming state is the high probability state (probability variation state), the probability of shifting to the jackpot gaming state is higher than in the normal time.

Then, the main CPU 101 is extracted at the time of winning a start, and is a random value for hit determination of the special symbol start storage area previously set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). And the selected hit determination table. Then, when the hit determination random number value and the jackpot determination value match, the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot is a jackpot. On the other hand, when the hit determination random number value and the jackpot determination value do not match, the main CPU 101 determines that the hit determination is not a jackpot (missing). In this way, in the jackpot determination process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to set the jackpot gaming state advantageous to the player (big hit determination). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S119.

In step S119, the main CPU 101 performs a small hit determination process. The small hit determination process is performed when the large hit determination process in step S118 is not a large hit. In this process, the main CPU 101 presets the hit determination random value of the special symbol start storage area set earlier in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). It is determined whether or not the determination value of the small hit is the same. Then, when the hit determination random number value and the small hit determination value match, the main CPU 101 determines that the hit is a small hit. On the other hand, when the hit determination random number value and the small hit determination value do not match, the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a small hit (it is a loss). In this way, the main CPU 101 determines in the small hit determination process whether or not to enter the small hit game state (small hit determination).

In the present embodiment, two types of hit judgment tables, one for normal use and the other for high probability (probability variation), are prepared as the hit judgment random value stored in the first special symbol start storage area and the hit judgment table to be referred to. Two types of hit judgment tables, one for normal use and the other for high probability (probability variation), are prepared as the hit judgment random value stored in the second special symbol start storage area and the hit judgment table to be referred to, for a total of four types of hit judgment. A table is prepared. The two types of hit determination tables for normal use have the same jackpot probability, and the two types of hit determination tables for high probability have the same jackpot probability. On the other hand, the number of small hit judgment values in the normal hit judgment table and the high probability (probability variation) hit judgment table, which are referred to as the hit judgment random values stored in the first special symbol start storage area. Is the same. Further, the number of small hit judgment values in the normal hit judgment table and the high probability (probability variation) hit judgment table referred to as the hit judgment random value stored in the second special symbol start storage area is the same. Is. In this way, the main CPU 101 has a th A hit game state of 1, a second hit game state in which a small amount of game balls can be obtained as compared with the first hit game state, and a third hit in which a game ball equivalent to the second hit game state can be obtained. This is an example of a hit determination means for determining whether or not to shift to the gaming state.

The small hit probability due to winning the first starting port 5442 in the normal game may be larger or smaller than the small hit probability due to winning the second starting port 440. The jackpot probability of winning a prize at the first starting port 5442 of a normal game may be larger or smaller than the jackpot probability of winning a prize at the second starting port 440.

In this way, by the processing of steps S118 and S119, one of a big hit, a small hit, and a loss is determined as a result of the hit determination for the special symbol game. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S120.

In step S120, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines a big hit symbol when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, determines a small hit symbol when the result of the hit determination is a small hit, and when it is neither a big hit nor a small hit, That is, in the case of loss, the loss pattern is determined. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S121.

In step S121, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines the variation pattern for determining the special symbol variation pattern based on the special symbol determined in the process of step S120 and the result of the hit determination determined in the processes of steps S118 and S119. Select a table. Then, the main CPU 101 determines (selects) a variation pattern based on the effect condition determination random number value extracted from the effect condition determination random number counter and the selected variation pattern determination table. The main CPU 101 stores the selected fluctuation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines the variation display mode of the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 based on the data showing such a variation pattern.

The data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied to the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74. As a result, the special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 in the determined variation pattern. Further, the data indicating the fluctuation pattern stored in this way is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command. As a result, under the control of the sub control circuit 200, the effect display corresponding to the received special figure fluctuation pattern designation command is performed. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S122.

In step S122, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol fluctuation time setting process. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined special symbol fluctuation pattern in the waiting time timer. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S123.

In step S123, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a special symbol effect start command in the main RAM 103. The special symbol effect start command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. The sub-control circuit 200 starts the effect based on the received special symbol effect start command. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S124.

In step S124, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the value of the storage area (0) used for the fluctuation display this time. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Special symbol determination process]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (special symbol determination process) performed in step S120 of FIG. 14 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S150, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the jackpot determination in step S118 is a jackpot. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S151. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is not a jackpot, the process shifts to step S156.

In step S151, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the fluctuation state number is (01H). When the main CPU 101 determines that the fluctuation state number is (01H), the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S152. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the fluctuation state number is not (01H), the process shifts to step S154.

In step S152, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol based on the jackpot symbol determination random value and the hit determination table extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S153.

In step S153, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the data of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the command of the jackpot symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the data of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it to the first special symbol display unit 73. The first special symbol display unit 73 fluctuates the first special symbol and stops and displays it in a manner based on the data of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a command of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and supplies the command from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command. As a result, the identification symbol is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the jackpot stop display mode under the control of the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S162.

In step S154, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol based on the jackpot symbol determination random value and the hit determination table extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S155.

In step S155, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the data of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol and the command of the jackpot symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the data of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it to the second special symbol display unit 74. The second special symbol display unit 74 fluctuates the second special symbol and stops and displays it in a manner based on the data of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a command of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and supplies the command of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command. As a result, the identification symbol is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the jackpot stop display mode under the control of the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S162.

In step S156, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether the result of the small hit determination in step S119 is a small hit. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small hit determination is a small hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S160. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small hit determination is not a small hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S164.

In step S160, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining a small hit symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the small hit symbol of the second special symbol based on the random number value extracted from the big hit symbol determination counter. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S161.

In step S161, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the data of the small hit symbol of the second special symbol and the command of the small hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the data of the small hit symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it to the second special symbol display unit 74. The second special symbol display unit 74 fluctuates the second special symbol and stops and displays it in a manner based on the data of the small hit symbol of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a command of the small hit symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and supplies the command of the small hit symbol of the second special symbol from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command. .. As a result, the identification symbol is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the small hit stop display mode under the control of the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S162.

In step S162, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the hit start interval display time data corresponding to the hit symbols (big hit symbol, small hit symbol). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the hit start interval display time data corresponding to the hit symbol (big hit symbol, small hit symbol) in the predetermined area of the main RAM 103 in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S163.

In step S163, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting data related to the number of times the large winning opening is opened. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the data related to the number of times the large winning opening is opened in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S164, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the lost symbol data and the lost symbol command. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the data of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and depending on whether the fluctuating special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first special symbol display unit. It is supplied to 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74. The first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 variablely displays the special symbol and stops and displays the special symbol in a mode based on the data of the lost symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a command of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and supplies the command of the lost symbol from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command. As a result, the identification symbol is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the loss stop display mode under the control of the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Special symbol fluctuation time management process]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (special symbol fluctuation time management process) performed in step S102 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S200, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S201. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not a value (01H) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

In step S201, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time timer is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S202. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S202, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management as a control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management in the control state flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S203.

In step S203, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a symbol stop command. The symbol stop command data is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the symbol stop. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S204.

In step S204, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a waiting time timer as a waiting time after confirmation. In this process, the main CPU 101 stores the waiting time after determination in the area that functions as the waiting time timer in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Special symbol display time management process]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (special symbol display time management process) performed in step S103 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18.

In step S300, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the process shifts to step S301. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

In step S301, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S302. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S304.

In step S302, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the jackpot determination in step S118 is a jackpot. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S303. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is not a jackpot, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S303, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the game state flag of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S304, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the jackpot determination in step S118 is a jackpot. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S311. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is not a jackpot, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S305.

In step S305, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time reduction counter of the main RAM 103 is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the time reduction counter is "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S325. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the time reduction counter is not "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S306.

In step S306, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time reduction counter of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S307.

In step S307, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time reduction counter of the main RAM 103 is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the time reduction counter is “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S308. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the time reduction counter is not "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S325.

In step S308, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the time reduction flag of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S309.

In step S309, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the time saving end command in the main RAM 103. The time saving end command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the time saving end. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S325.

In step S325, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the ST count counter of the main RAM 103 is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the ST count counter is “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S310. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the ST count counter is not "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S326.

In step S326, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the ST count counter of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S327.

In step S327, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the ST count counter of the main RAM 103 is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the ST count counter is “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S328. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the ST count counter is not "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S310.

In step S328, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the ST count flag of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S329.

In step S329, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the ST end command in the main RAM 103. The ST end command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the end of ST. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S310.

In step S310, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether the result of the small hit determination in step S119 is a small hit. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small hit determination is a small hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S311. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small hit determination is not a small hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S315.

In step S311 the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (03H) indicating a hit start interval management process as a control state flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S312.

In step S312, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a waiting time timer as a hit start interval time corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol). In this process, the main CPU 101 stores the hit start interval time in the area that functions as the waiting time timer in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S313. The hit start interval time is also determined for each hit type, but in this embodiment, at least special probability variation, special normal, real ball output small probability variation, real ball output small normal and special figure (2) small hit-2 The hit start interval time is set to the same time or a time that is difficult for the player to distinguish (for example, 1 second).

In step S313, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a special symbol effect stop command. The special symbol effect stop command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the stop of the special symbol effect. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the step S314 process.

In step S314, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a big hit start command or a small hit start command corresponding to the special symbol. The big hit start command or the small hit start command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the start of a big hit or a small hit. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S315, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (07H) indicating a special symbol game end process as a control state flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S316.

In step S316, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a special symbol effect stop command. The special symbol effect stop command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the stop of the special symbol effect. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Hit start interval management process]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (hit start interval management process) performed in step S104 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S401, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating a hit start interval management process. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the process shifts to step S402. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

In step S402, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S403. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S403, the main CPU 101 sets the upper limit value of the large winning opening opening number counter of the main RAM 103.

In step S404, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the large winning opening opening count counter of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S405.

In step S405, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting an opening / closing pattern for each round or small hit according to the type of the big hit symbol. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S406.

In step S406, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a large winning opening opening display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. In this case, the display command for opening the large winning opening is the data indicating the first round. The large winning opening opening display command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a large winning opening opening command. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S407.

In step S407, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating a large winning opening reopening waiting time management process as a control state flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S408.

In step S408, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the large winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S409.

In step S409, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the opening time of the large winning opening in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S410.

In step S410, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the large winning opening opening data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the variables positioned in the main RAM 103 based on the data read from the main ROM 102 in order to open the big winning opening 540. The variable stored in this way drives the large winning opening solenoid 620 to open the large winning opening 540. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Large winning opening reopening waiting time management process]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (large winning opening reopening waiting time management process) performed in step S105 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S500, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the large winning opening reopening waiting time management process. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the large winning opening reopening waiting time management process, the process is transferred to step S501. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not a value (05H) indicating the large winning opening reopening waiting time management process, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

In step S501, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S502. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S502, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the large winning opening opening number counter of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S503.

In step S503, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a large winning opening opening display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. In this case, the display command for opening the large winning opening is data indicating the second and subsequent rounds. The display command data during the opening of the winning opening is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. The large winning opening opening display command includes an instruction to perform the round counter +1 for the sub CPU 201. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S504.

In step S504, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating a large winning opening opening process as a control state flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S505.

In step S505, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the jackpot determination in step S118 is a jackpot. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S506. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is not a jackpot, the process shifts to step S507.

In step S506, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the large winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S507.

In step S507, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the opening time of the large winning opening in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S508.

In step S508, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the large winning opening opening data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Large winning opening opening process]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (large winning opening opening process) performed in step S106 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S600, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating a large winning opening opening process. In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the large winning opening opening process, the process shifts to step S601. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not a value (04H) indicating the large winning opening opening process, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

In step S601, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the large winning opening winning counter is “10” or more. In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines that the large winning opening winning counter is "10" or more, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S604. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the large winning opening winning counter is not "10" or more, the process shifts to step S602.

In step S602, the main CPU 101 performs a large winning opening opening / closing process according to the opening / closing pattern for each set round or small hit. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of opening and closing the large winning opening 540 according to the opening / closing pattern for each round or small hit set in step S405. Specifically, the process of opening and closing the large winning opening 540 a plurality of times during a predetermined round by repeating the process of closing and opening the large winning opening 540 after waiting for a time according to the opening / closing pattern of each round or small hit. I do. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S603.

Here, in the present embodiment, the special probability variation, the special normal interval time between the first opening and the second opening of the first round, and the first opening and the second opening of the special figure (2) small hit-2. The interval time between openings is set to a time (for example, 0.1 second) that is the same or difficult for the player to distinguish. That is, in the process of step S602, the special probability variation, the special normal, and the special figure (2) small hit-2 are "0.896 seconds open time → 0.1 seconds open interval time → 0.896 seconds open. It will be executed in the order of "time". Further, although it is not processed in this step but is set in step S607, the actual ball output small probability change and the actual ball output small amount are the same or the interval time between the normal first and second rounds is also the same or By setting a time that is difficult for the player to distinguish (for example, 0.1 seconds), "the opening time of the first round of 0.896 seconds → the interval time between rounds of 0.1 seconds → the two rounds of 0.896 seconds" It will be executed in the order of "opening time of eyes". As a result, it is difficult for the player to distinguish the winning type even based on the time when the big winning opening 540 is closed.

In step S603, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the waiting time timer as the large winning opening opening time timer is “0”. In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S604. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S604, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the large winning opening closing data. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 based on the data read from the main ROM 102 in order to close the big winning opening 540. The variable stored in this way closes the grand prize opening solenoid 620. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S605.

In step S605, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether the result of the small hit determination in step S119 is a small hit. In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small hit determination is a small hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S610. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small hit determination is not a small hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S606.

In step S606, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the large winning opening opening count value is equal to or greater than the large winning opening opening number upper limit value. In this process, the main CPU 101 compares the large winning opening opening count value stored in the main RAM 103 with the large winning opening opening number upper limit value or more, and the large winning opening opening count value is the large winning opening opening count value. Determine if it is greater than or equal to the upper limit. When the main CPU 101 determines that the large winning opening opening count value is equal to or greater than the winning opening opening number upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S610. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the large winning opening opening count value is not equal to or greater than the winning opening opening number upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S607.

In step S607, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the open time interval display time in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S608.

In step S608, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (05H) indicating a large winning opening reopening waiting time management process as a control state flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S609.

In step S609, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting an inter-round display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. The inter-round display command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S610, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S611.

In step S611, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (06H) indicating a hit end interval process as a control state flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S612.

In step S612, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a special symbol per interval end display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. Specifically, when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the big hit end display command is set, and when the result of the hit determination is a small hit, the small hit end display command is set. The big hit end display command and the small hit end display command are supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Hit end interval processing]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (hit end interval processing) executed in step S107 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S700, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 103 is a value (06H) indicating a hit end interval process. When it is determined that the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval processing, the processing shifts to step S701. If it is not determined that the control status flag is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval processing, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S701, when the control state flag of the main RAM 103 has a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval processing, the value of the waiting time timer (t) corresponding to the hit end interval is “0”. Judge whether or not. Further, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S702 when the value of the waiting time timer is "0", and ends this subroutine when the value of the waiting time timer is not "0".

In step S702, the main CPU 101 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game of the main RAM 103 in the control state flag. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S703.

In step S703, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol and the control data according to the game state in the predetermined area of the main RAM 103. Specifically, as control data, a game state such as a normal game state and a probability change state is set. Further, the main CPU 101 hits the sub control circuit 200 and transmits an end command. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Special symbol game end processing]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (special symbol game end processing) executed in step S108 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG. 23.

First, in step S710, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 103 is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end process. If it is determined that the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end processing, the processing is transferred to step S711. If it is not determined that the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end processing, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S711, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check in the main RAM 103 as a control state flag. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Explanation of operation of sub control circuit]
Hereinafter, the processing of the sub control circuit 200 will be described. The sub control circuit 200 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100, and the sub CPU 201 performs various processes such as display processing.

[Sub-control main processing]
First, the sub-control main process performed by the sub-CPU 201 of the sub-control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIG. 24.

In step S1101, the sub CPU 201 performs the initialization process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 initializes the work area of the work RAM 203 in response to the power being turned on. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1102.

In step S1102, the sub CPU 201 performs a random number value update process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 updates the random number value stored in the work RAM 203 (for example, the random value for determining the effect, the random value for determining the jackpot effect, the random value for determining the stop symbol, etc.). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1103.

In step S1103, the sub CPU 201 performs a command analysis process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 analyzes the command stored in the receive buffer of the work RAM 203. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1104.

In step S1104, the sub CPU 201 performs the effect control process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 controls the effect using the effect button 62. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1105.

In step S1105, the sub CPU 201 performs display control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 transmits data for displaying in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 to the display control circuit 204. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1106.

When data is received from the sub CPU 201 in the display control circuit 204, the VDP of the display control circuit 204 receives various types of identification symbol data, background image data, effect image data, and the like based on the received data. The image data of is read from the image data ROM. The VDP superimposes various image data read from the image data ROM and displays them in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

In step S1106, the sub CPU 201 performs sound / lamp control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 controls the sound generated from the speaker 24 and controls the light emission of various lamps such as the lamp 25. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1107.

In step S1107, the sub CPU 201 performs the accessory control process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 controls the operations (mechanical operation and lighting operation) of the respective accessories 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, and 1400 via the accessory control circuit 207. When the control processing of the operation of each accessory 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, 1400 by the sub CPU 201 is completed, the processing is again transferred to the random number value update processing in step S1102.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Even in the state where the sub-control main process shown in FIG. 24 is being performed, the sub-control main process may be interrupted and the timer interrupt process may be performed. Hereinafter, the timer interrupt processing performed by the sub CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 25.

In step S1201, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 201 saves the value used in the running program stored in each register (storage area). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1202.

In step S1202, the sub CPU 201 performs a timer update process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 updates the timer stored in the work RAM 203. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 updates a timer for round effect and the like. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1203.

In step S1203, the sub CPU 201 performs the effect button switch input detection process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 detects whether or not the effect button switch 310 is input by operating the effect button 62. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1204.

In step S1204, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the register. In this process, the sub CPU 201 restores the value saved in step S201 to each register. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

[Command interrupt processing]
Even in the state in which the sub-control main process shown in FIG. 24 is being executed, the sub-control main process may be interrupted and the command interrupt process may be performed. Hereinafter, the command interrupt processing performed by the sub CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 26.

In step S1301, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 201 saves the value used in the running program stored in each register (storage area). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1302.

In step S1302, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of storing the received command in the buffer. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1303.

In step S1303, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the register. In this process, the sub CPU 201 restores the value saved in step S1301 to each register. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

[Command analysis processing]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (command analysis process) performed in step S1103 of FIG. 23 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28.

In step S1401, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not a command has been received. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a receive command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1402. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that there is no reception command, the subroutine terminates this subroutine.

In step S1402, the sub CPU 201 performs a read processing of the received command. In this process, the sub CPU 201 reads the command stored in the receive buffer. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1403.

In step S1403, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the receiving command is a large winning opening winning command. In this process, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the reception command is a large winning opening winning command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1404. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the reception command is not the big winning opening winning command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1405.

In step S1404, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of updating the acquisition number counter and the total acquisition number counter during the jackpot. In this way, the sub CPU 201 can acquire data regarding the number of prize balls (the number of acquired game balls) acquired by the player by winning the game balls in the large winning opening 540. In addition, the acquisition number counter and the total acquisition number counter during the big hit start counting (counting) with the start of the big hit game as a delimiter. In this way, data on the number of prize balls is acquired each time a big hit or a small hit is made. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1405, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the reception command is a special symbol designation command. In this process, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the receive command is a special symbol designation command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1406. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the reception command is not a special symbol designation command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1407.

In step S1406, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the stop symbol based on the special symbol designation command. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1407, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the reception command is a special figure variation pattern designation command. In this process, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the receive command is a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1408. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the reception command is not the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1409.

In step S1408, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the effect pattern based on the special figure variation pattern designation command, the stop symbol, and the extracted random value for effect determination. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1409, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the received command is a hit start command (big hit start command, small hit start command). In this process, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is a hit start command (big hit start command, small hit start command), the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1410. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not a hit start command (big hit start command, small hit start command), the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1411.

In step S1410, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the jackpot start effect. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1411, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the reception command is a large winning opening opening effect display command. In this process, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the reception command is the effect display command during the opening of the big winning opening, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1412. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the reception command is not the effect display command during the opening of the big winning opening, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1413.

In step S1412, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the effect during the opening of the big winning opening. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1413, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the reception command is an inter-round display command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the receive command is an inter-round display command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1414. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the reception command is not an inter-round display command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1415.

In step S1414, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the effect between rounds. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1415, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the reception command is a hit end display command. In this process, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the receive command is a hit end display command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1416. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the reception command is not a hit end display command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1417.

In step S1416, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the effect at the end of the big hit. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1417, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the reception command is a time saving end command. In this process, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the receive command is a time saving end command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1418. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the reception command is not the time saving end command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1419.

In step S1418, the sub CPU 201 controls such as clearing the time saving flag and ending the time saving display. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1419, the sub CPU 201 performs processing corresponding to other received commands. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

[Flow of game balls]
Hereinafter, the flow of the game ball launched toward the game area 20 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. FIG. 29 is an example of a diagram showing a mode in which the game ball flows down the right side region when the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is open. FIG. 30 is an example of a diagram showing a mode in which the game ball flows down the right side region when the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is closed. FIG. 31 is an example of a diagram showing a mode in which the game ball flows down the left side region when the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is open.

As described above, the attacker unit 500 is located in the lower right part of the game area 20 and below the passage gate 49. Therefore, in the big hit game state, so-called right-handed hitting is performed. When the large winning opening 540 is opened by the shutter 610, the right-handed game ball is likely to win the large winning opening 540. In addition, even if it is not in the big hit game state, right-handed hitting is performed even during the electric support.

However, when the player hits the right side, the game ball that has flowed down the right side area loses the sense of expectation when it does not win the big winning opening 540, and just waits for it to flow into the out opening 57 as it is. Will be. Therefore, when the right-handed game ball does not win the grand prize opening 540, the player feels a disadvantage and causes a decrease in interest. In particular, in recent years, there has been a demand for an increase in the size of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the current situation is that the place where the attacker unit 500 or the like can be arranged in the game area 20 is limited. Therefore, in order to meet the demand for larger size of the liquid crystal display device 16, the attacker unit 500 must be arranged in the lower part of the game area 20 as in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment. When the attacker unit 500 is arranged at the lower part in the game area 20, if the right-handed game ball does not win the big winning opening 540, it becomes more remarkable that it flows into the out opening 57 as it is.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged in the substantially left lower part of the game area 20. Furthermore, the attacker unit 500 is provided with a game ball guiding member 580. The game ball guiding member 580 is a game area 20 in which an out port 57 is arranged, including a guide nail 700, for a game ball that has been hit right (flows down the right area) and has not won a prize in the large winning opening 540. A member that leads beyond the center to the upstream of the blade member 4620 arranged in the left region, and forms a path for the game ball extending on an extension of the large winning opening 540 in the flow direction of the game ball. Is. Here, the "upstream of the blade member 4620" is a region where the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 440 if the blade member 4620 is open (hereinafter, "second starting port acceptance" in this specification. Area "). The second starting port receiving area is, for example, a peripheral area of the game ball 223 located above the blade member 4620 in FIG. 30.

In the game area 20, the game ball guiding member is used as a flow path of the game ball that is hit right (flows down the right side area) and reaches the exit side of the large winning opening 540 without winning the big winning opening 540. A flow path connecting the outlet side portion of the 580 and the outlet port 57 is formed by the guide nail 700. Then, the game ball flowing down the flow-down path always passes through the second start port receiving area before reaching the out port 57.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the normal symbol determination shifts to the high probability state when the jackpot game state ends, the blade member 4620 is frequently in the electric support state during the time saving state. Be released.

As shown in FIG. 29, when the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is open, if the right-handed game ball (flowing down the right area) does not win the large winning opening 540, the game is concerned. The ball is always guided by the game ball guiding member 580 and the guiding nail 700 to the second starting port receiving area upstream of the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460.

Of the game balls hit to the right (flowing down the right area), the game balls that did not win the large winning opening 540 are always guided to the second starting port receiving area upstream of the blade member 4620. If the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened when the game ball is guided to the start port receiving area, the blade member 4620 is accepted by the blade member 4620 without flowing into the out port 57, and the second start port 440. There is a high possibility of winning a prize. That is, when the blade member 4620 is closed, the out port 57 is at the most downstream position of the game area 20 as described above, but when the blade member 4620 is open, the second out port 57 is replaced with the second out port 57. The starting port 440 is the most downstream position. As described above, the blade member 4620 has a function of changing the most downstream position in the game area 20.

In this way, even if the right-handed game ball (flowing down the right area) does not win the large winning opening 540, the game ball always reaches the second starting port receiving area (upstream of the blade member 4620). Since it is guided, the expectation of winning the second starting port 440 will continue, and it will be possible to enhance the interest.

In particular, right-handed strikes are performed in the electric support state. Therefore, although the large winning opening 540 is not opened during the electric support, the most downstream position is changed from the out port 57 to the second starting port 440 by the blade member 4620, so that the game progresses in the electric support state. It can be promoted and enhanced.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 30, when the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is closed, the game ball that is hit right (flows down the right area) and does not win the big winning opening 540. Although it is always guided to the upstream of the blade member 4620, it flows into the out port 57 through between the blade member 4620 and the guide nail 700 (that is, the left side of the guide nail 700).

Among the right-handed game balls (flowing down the right area), the game balls that did not reach the large winning opening 540 (for example, the game balls that flowed down the flow passage leading from the right side of the general winning opening 56 to the out opening 57). ) May be configured to be guided to the out port 57. At this time, among the right-handed game balls, as the game balls that did not win the large winning opening 540, the game balls that reached the large winning opening 540 but did not win, and the game balls that did not reach the large winning opening 540 without reaching the large winning opening 540. There are game balls that did not win a prize, but any game ball may be guided to the upstream of the blade member 4620, or only one of the game balls may be guided to the upstream of the blade member 4620. ..

By the way, as shown in FIG. 31, a left-handed game ball (a game ball that has flowed down the left side region) generally wins at the first starting opening 5442 or the general winning openings 53, 54, 55. It flows into the out port 57 or the out port 450. After the game ball is hit to the left, the game ball 224 that rolls in the flow path 222 toward the first start port 5442 continues to be expected to win a prize at the first start port 5442, but heads toward the first start port 5442. Regarding the game ball 2226 that deviates from the flow path 222 and does not win a prize in the general winning openings 53, 54, 55, the first starting opening (corresponding to the first starting opening 5442 of the present embodiment) in the conventional pachinko machine. The expectation for winning a prize is lost. Further, even if the game ball 224 rolls on the flow path 222 toward the first starting port 5442, if the first starting port 5442 is not won, the feeling of expectation for winning is lost at that time. In the present embodiment, when the left-handed game ball (the game ball that has flowed down the left side region) rolls the flow path 222 toward the first start port 5442 but does not win the first start port 5442, and , In any case where the game balls deviate from the flow path 222 toward the first starting port 5442 and do not win the general winning openings 53, 54, 55, these game balls reach the out opening 57. In between, it always passes through the second start port receiving area (upstream of the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460). As described above, the upstream of the blade member 4620 is a region (second starting port receiving region) in which the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 440 if the blade member 4620 is open. When the flow path 222 toward the first start port 5442 is rolled but the first start port 5442 is not won, and when the flow path 222 toward the first start port 5442 is deviated from the general winning port 53, 54, 55. In any case, the expectation of winning the second starting port 440 will continue, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, since the passing gate 49 is arranged in the right side region, there is little expectation that the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 will be opened when it is hit to the left. However, immediately after the jackpot game state or the time saving state ends, the variable display of the normal symbol may be suspended. Further, even if the player hits the left side, the game ball that vigorously jumps out into the game area 20 may flow down the right side area. Therefore, even in the normal gaming state, the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is rarely opened. Moreover, the guide nail 700 immediately flows into the out port 57 not only for the game ball that has flowed down the right side region but also for the game ball that has flowed down to the left side region and has rolled to the guide member 700 side. Since it has a function of suppressing, if the blade member 4620 is open, there is a possibility that the second starting port 440 will win a prize. Therefore, even if the left-handed game ball loses the expectation of winning the first starting port 5442 and the general winning openings 53, 54, 55, the expectation of winning the second starting port 440 continues. , It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In the present embodiment, the passage gate 49 is arranged in the right side region, but instead, the passage gate 491 may be arranged in the left side region. In this case, the frequency with which the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened may be increased as compared with the case where the passing gate 49 is arranged in the right side region. Therefore, even if the left-handed game ball loses the expectation of winning the first starting port 5442, it is possible to continue with a higher expectation of winning the second starting port 440. ..

Among the left-handed game balls (game balls that have flowed down the left side region), as a game ball that has not reached the upper part of the normal electric accessory unit 400 or has not reached the first starting port 5442, for example. A game ball that has flowed down the outflow port 450 (see, for example, FIGS. 3 and 66) existing below the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 or the downflow passage leading to the out port 57 may be present. At this time, among the left-handed game balls, as the game balls that did not win the first starting port 5442, the game balls that did not reach the upper side of the normal electric accessory unit 400 or the first starting port 5442, and the normal There are game balls that have reached above the electric accessory unit 400 or near the first starting port 5442 but have not won a prize, but any game ball may be guided to the upstream of the blade member 4620, and eventually. Only one of the game balls may be guided to the upstream of the blade member 4620.

Further, when the game ball that has rolled in the direction of the large winning opening 540 among the left-handed game balls (the game ball that has flowed down the left side region) rolls the game ball guiding member 580, the game ball is the large winning opening 540. It is configured to collide with a rib provided on the shutter 610 or the game ball guiding member 580 to win a prize at the first starting port 5442 or to flow into the out 55 or the out port 450.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball that has been hit right (flows down the right side area) and has not won the big winning opening 540 is always left beyond the center of the game area 20 in which the out opening 57 is arranged. It is provided with a game ball guiding member 580 that guides the area to the second starting port receiving area. However, the game ball guiding member 580 has a function of guiding such a game ball (a game ball that is hit right (flows down the right side area) and does not win the large winning opening 540) to the second starting opening receiving area. It is not necessary to have, and it may be limited to guiding beyond the center of the game area 20 to the left side area. For example, although the game ball guiding member 580 has a function of guiding such a game ball to the left side region, the game ball guided to the left side region is further distributed to a plurality of regions including the second starting port receiving region. The one that is configured corresponds.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball that is hit right (flows down the right side area) and does not win the large winning opening 540 is guided to the left side area by the game ball guiding member 580. The game ball guiding member 580 is not always indispensable. For example, a game ball that has been hit right and has not won a prize in the large winning opening 540 may be guided to the left side region only with a guide nail.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball guiding member is used as a flow path of the game ball that is hit right (flows down the right side area) and reaches the exit side of the large winning opening 540 without winning the big winning opening 540. A flow path connecting the exit side portion of the 580 and the out port 57 is formed, and the game ball flowing down the flow path always passes through the second start port receiving area before reaching the out port 57. It is designed to do. In the present embodiment, since the second starting port 440 is formed in the left side region, the game ball flowing down the flow path is always guided to the left side region. However, in view of the idea that the game ball flowing down the above path always passes through the second starting port receiving area before reaching the out port 57, in such a case, the second starting port 440 is in the left side area. It is not mandatory to be in place.

[Back unit configuration]
Hereinafter, the configuration of the back unit 176 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 37. FIG. 32 is an example of a front view of the back unit 176. FIG. 33 is an example of a rear view of the back unit 176. FIG. 34 is an example of a perspective view of the back unit 176 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 35 is an example of a perspective view of the back unit 176 as viewed from diagonally above the back left. FIG. 36 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the back unit 176 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 37 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the back unit 176 as viewed from diagonally above the left side of the back.

As described above, the back unit 176 includes an upper front accessory 1000, an upper back accessory 1100, a lower accessory 1200, a corner accessory 1300, a side accessory 1400, a middle panel 1500, and an attacker ball gutter 1600. And at least a main board case 1700 and a rear box 1800. The corner accessory 1300 includes an upper corner accessory 1320 and a lower corner accessory 1350.

The rear box 1800 has a box shape, and an opening 1820 is formed substantially in the center. A liquid crystal display device 16 and the like are arranged in the opening 1820.

The upper back accessory 1100 (specifically, the base member 1180 (see, for example, FIG. 84) described later) is mounted and fixed above the opening 1820 on the front side of the rear box 1800. Details of the upper back accessory 1100 will be described later.

The lower accessory 1200 (more specifically, the lower accessory fixing base 1220 (see, for example, FIG. 92) described later) is mounted and fixed below the opening 1820 on the front side of the rear box 1800. The details of the lower accessory 1200 will be described later.

The side accessory 1400 (specifically, the mounting plate 1410 described later (see, for example, FIG. 116)) is mounted and fixed to the right side of the opening 1820 on the front side of the rear box 1800. Details of the side accessory 1400 will be described later.

In the upper corner accessory 1320 (see, for example, FIG. 100), the first movable body 1330 is moved to the upper left corner of the liquid crystal display device 16 so as to be on the front side of the upper back accessory movable decorative body 110. The body 1340 is attached and fixed to the rear box 1800 so as to be located at the upper right corner of the liquid crystal display device 16. In the lower corner accessory 1350, the third movable body 1355 is in the lower left corner of the liquid crystal display device 16 and the fourth movable body 1357 is in the lower right corner of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the lower corner accessory 1350 is on the front side of the lower accessory 1200. It is mounted and fixed to the rear box 1800 so as to be located at each position. The first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are arranged so as to be substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. Details of the upper corner accessory 1320 will be described later.

The upper front accessory 1000 (specifically, the decorative accessory base member 1010 (see, for example, FIG. 84) described later) is attached and fixed to the rear box 1800 so as to be arranged in front of the upper back accessory 1000. NS. Details of the upper front accessory 1000 will be described later.

The middle panel 1500 is arranged in an area corresponding to a part of the game area 20 on the back surface of the transparent panel 172, and includes a first middle panel 1520 and a second middle panel 1550. The first middle panel 1520 is a plate-shaped member having a pattern or pattern on the front surface, and the pattern or pattern on the front surface can be visually recognized via the transparent panel 172. The second middle panel 1550 is a plate-shaped member having an annular opening window 1552, which will be described in detail later, and is configured such that a predetermined picture appears on the opening window when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Details of the second middle panel 1550 will be described later.

The attacker ball gutter 1600 is a gutter-shaped one that accepts a game ball that has won a prize in the general winning opening 56 and discharges it to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 joins the game ball that has won the prize in the large winning opening 540 and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

The lamp relay board 1710, the main control relay board 1720, and the like are housed in the main board case 1700.

The back unit 176 further comprises a first decorative design 1900 and a second decorative design 1920. The first decorative design 1900 is attached to the right side of the front side of the upper back accessory 1100. The second decorative design 1920 is attached to the left side of the front side of the upper back accessory 1100. The first decorative design 1900 and the second decorative design 1920 are decorated on the front surface, and both have a design function without being movable.

[Attacker unit]
Hereinafter, the configuration of the attacker unit 500 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 38 to 49.

The attacker unit 500 includes a base member 510, a front plate portion 520, a guide path 530, a large winning opening 540, a rear case 550, and a special electric accessory 600.

The base members 510 shown in FIGS. 38 to 43 and 45 and 46 are the members that form the basis of the attacker unit 500. The base member 510 is formed in an elongated substantially flat plate shape. The base member 510 is arranged so that its longitudinal direction is directed to the left-right direction and its plate surface is directed to the front-rear direction. Various members constituting the attacker unit 500 are attached to the base member 510. A slit 511 is formed in the base member 510.

The slit 511 is formed so as to penetrate the base member 510 in the front-rear direction. The slit 511 is formed on the upper portion of the base member 510 in a substantially straight line extending from the right side to the left side while being gently inclined in a front view. A shutter 610 (more specifically, an induction portion 611 of the shutter 610), which will be described later, is arranged in the slit 511.

The front plate portion 520 shown in FIGS. 38 to 42 and 44 is a member arranged at the front end portion of the attacker unit 500. The front plate portion 520 is formed to have substantially the same shape and size as the base member 510. The front plate portion 520 is arranged with its plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The front plate portion 520 is arranged so as to face the base member 510 in the front-rear direction and to be separated from the base member 510 in the front direction. In this way, a gap (hereinafter, referred to as "special electric accessory space R2") is formed between the front plate portion 520 and the base member 510 so that the game ball can enter. The special electric accessory space R2 is formed to have substantially the same shape and size as the front plate portion 520 and the base member 510 when viewed from the front. The front plate portion 520 is attached to the base member 510 via screws or the like. The front plate portion 520 is formed of a transparent resin material so that the player can see the rear of the front plate portion 520.

The guide path 530 shown in FIGS. 38 and 40 to 46 appropriately guides the moving game ball in a predetermined direction. The guide path 530 is formed by a shutter 610 and a substantially plate-shaped member (wall portion) erected rearward from the front plate portion 520. The guideway 530 includes a first guideway 531 and a second guideway 532 and a third guideway 533.

As described above, the guide path 530 (more specifically, the first guide path 531) is formed by the shutter 610. Here, as will be described later, the shutter 610 is configured to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction with respect to the base member 510 via the slit 511. In such a configuration of the shutter 610, the first guide path 531 is formed when the shutter 610 advances forward with respect to the base member 510. Therefore, for the sake of convenience, the shutter 610 will be described below assuming that the shutter 610 is advanced forward with respect to the base member 510 (a state in which the first guide path 531 is formed).

The first guide path 531 is arranged near the upper end portion of the special electric accessory space R2. The first guide path 531 is formed in a substantially straight line extending from the right side to the left side while gently sloping. The length of the first guide path 531 in the left-right direction (longitudinal direction) is formed to be slightly shorter than that of the base member 510. The left end portion of the first guide path 531 is formed in the vicinity of the left end portion of the special electric accessory space R2. The right end portion of the first guide path 531 is formed in the vicinity of the right end portion of the special electric accessory space R2. The first guide path 531 configured in this way guides the moving game ball from right to left. The first guide path 531 includes a deceleration rib 534.

The deceleration rib 534 reduces the moving speed of the game ball guided (moved) by the first guide path 531 (deceleration means). The reduction rib 534 is composed of a plurality of rear projections 534a projecting forward from the base member 510, and a plurality of front projections 534b projecting rearward from the front plate portion 520. In the present embodiment, six rear protrusions 534a are provided. Further, five front projections 534b are provided. These plurality of posterior projections 534a and anterior projections 534b are arranged at appropriate intervals along the extending direction (left-right direction) of the first guide path 531. The appropriate interval is set to be at least longer than the diameter of the game ball. Further, these plurality of posterior projections 534a and anterior projections 534b are arranged so as not to overlap each other in the front view (so as not to face each other in the front-rear direction but to deviate in the left-right direction).

With such a configuration of the first guide path 531, the game ball (moved by the first guide path 531) moves in a zigzag shape in a plan view while colliding with the posterior protrusion 534a and the front protrusion 534b. (Because the smooth movement of the game ball is restricted), the movement speed will be reduced.

By reducing the moving speed of the game balls moved by the first guide path 531 in this way, it is possible to create a situation in which a plurality of game balls are moving on the first guide path 531. In this way, when a plurality of game balls are moving on the first guide path 531, the plurality of game balls are guided to the third guide path 533 only by opening the shutter 610 once. However, it is possible to win a prize in the large prize opening 540. That is, the round digestion in the jackpot game can be performed quickly. Further, even if the opening time of the shutter 610 is short, if many game balls are retained on the shutter 610, many prizes can be generated. In addition, since many game balls can be won at one time, it is easy to generate more prizes (so-called over prizes) than the number of prizes that can be won in one round of the jackpot game.

The second guideway 532 is arranged immediately to the right of the first guideway 531 in the special electric accessory space R2. The second guideway 532 is formed in a substantially straight line extending from the right side to the left side while gently inclining. The inclination angle of the second guideway 532 is formed to be substantially the same as the inclination angle of the first guideway 531. In this way, the second guideway 532, together with the first guideway 531 is configured as one substantially linear guideway that gently slopes from right to left. The second guideway 532 configured in this way guides the moving game ball from the right side to the left side (first guideway 531 side).

The third guide path 533 is arranged in the substantially central portion of the special electric accessory space R2 in the vertical direction. The third guideway 533 is formed in a substantially straight line extending from the right side to the left side while gently inclining. The third guideway 533 is arranged below the first guideway 531. The third guideway 533 is formed to have substantially the same shape and size as the first guideway 531 when viewed from the front.

Further, as shown in FIG. 46 and the like, a wall portion connected to the third guideway 533 is arranged between the left end of the third guideway 533 and the left end of the first guideway 531. Further, a wall portion connected to the third guideway 533 is arranged between the right end of the third guideway 533 and the right end of the second guideway 532. In this way, the third guide path 533 is formed in a concave shape when viewed from the front.

The third guide path 533 configured in this way guides the moving game ball from the right side to the left side (the large winning opening 540 side). The third guideway 533 includes a guide portion 535.

The guide portion 535 is formed at the lowermost portion of the third guide path 533. The guide portion 535 is a plate-shaped member having a substantially triangular shape in a plan view. The guide unit 535 is configured to be able to guide the game ball guided (moved) by the third guide path 533 to the rear.

The large winning opening 540 shown in FIGS. 42, 43, 45 and 46 is formed by the base member 510 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The taxiing opening 540 is formed behind the lowermost part of the third guideway 533 (behind the guide portion 535). The large winning opening 540 includes a count switch 541. As shown in FIG. 42, the count switch 541 is arranged below the rear of the large winning opening 540.

The rear case 550 shown in FIGS. 38, 40 to 42, 46, 48 and 49 includes various members (shutter 610, large winning opening solenoid 620, link arm 630, etc.) constituting the special electric accessory 600. ) Is housed. The rear case 550 is formed in a substantially rectangular hollow substantially box shape in a plan view. As shown in FIG. 48, in the rear case 550, the upper space and the lower space are partitioned by a substantially flat plate-shaped mounting portion 551 formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a plan view. That is, the rear case 550 is formed in a double-decker structure by the mounting portion 551, and predetermined members are arranged in the upper space and the lower space, respectively. Specifically, a shutter 610, a link arm 630, and the like are arranged in the upper space. Further, in the space on the lower side, a large winning opening solenoid 620 and the like are arranged. The rear case 550 is attached to the rear side surface of the base member 510 via screws or the like. The inside and the outside of the rear case 550 (in front of the base member 510) are communicated with each other through the slit 511.

[Special electric accessory]
Hereinafter, the configuration of the special electric accessory 6000 according to the second embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 50 to 65.

The special electric accessory 6000 switches between a state in which it is easy to win a prize in the large winning opening 540 of the game ball (open state) and a state in which it is difficult to win a prize in the large winning opening 540 of the game ball (closed state). Although it is a member that operates for this purpose, the arrangement configuration and the like of various members will be described below assuming that the member is in a closed state unless otherwise specified.

As shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the special electric accessory 6000 includes an accommodating portion 6001, a shutter 6002, a large winning opening solenoid 6003, a link arm 6004, and a regulating member 6005.

The accommodating portion 6001 shown in FIGS. 50 to 53 is a member accommodating various members (shutter 6002, large winning opening solenoid 6003, link arm 6004, regulating member 6005, etc.) constituting the special electric accessory 6000. The accommodating portion 6001 is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper side and the front side open. The accommodating portion 6001 is attached to the rear side surface of the base member 510 (see FIG. 38, etc.) via screws or the like. The accommodating portion 6001 includes a communication opening 6011, a support shaft 6012, a boss portion 6013, and an induction opening 6014.

The communication opening 6011 communicates the upper side and the lower side of the accommodating portion 6001. The communication opening 6011 is formed on the right side of the accommodating portion 6001. The communication opening 6011 is formed so as to penetrate the accommodating portion 6001 in the vertical direction. The communication opening 6011 is formed so as to surround the boss portion 6013, which will be described later, from the rear to the right in a plan view.

The support shaft 6012 rotatably supports the link arm 6004 described later. The support shaft 6012 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with the longitudinal direction directed in the vertical direction. The support shaft 6012 is formed so as to project upward. The support shaft 6012 is the right rear portion of the accommodating portion 6001 and is formed behind the communication opening 6011.

The boss portion 6013 rotatably supports the regulation member 6005 described later. The boss portion 6013 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with the longitudinal direction directed in the vertical direction. The boss portion 6013 is formed so as to project upward. The boss portion 6013 is formed in the vicinity of the center of the accommodating portion 6001 (slightly to the right from the center) in a plan view, and is formed on the left front side of the communication opening 6011. In appropriate drawings such as FIGS. 50 to 52, the boss portion 6013 shows a state in which a screw is attached to support the regulation member 6005.

The guide opening 6014 is for inserting the guide shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005, which will be described later. More specifically, as will be described later, the movement (displacement) path of the guide shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 is defined. The guide opening 6014 is formed in the vicinity of the center of the accommodating portion 6001 in a plan view (slightly to the right of the center and to the left of the boss portion 6013). The guide opening 6014 is formed so as to penetrate the accommodating portion 6001 in the vertical direction. The guide opening 6014 is formed in a substantially L-shape in a plan view that is bent halfway from one end to the other end in the longitudinal direction. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 53 (a), the guide opening 6014 comprises a first guide opening 6016 and a second guide opening 6017.

The first guide opening 6016 is formed so as to extend substantially linearly in the left-right direction. The first guide opening 6016 is formed rearward in the front-rear direction with respect to the center P of the boss portion 6013. The length of the first induction opening 6016 in the left-right direction is formed to be substantially the same as the length of the connection opening 6036 of the large winning opening solenoid 6003, which will be described later.

The second guide opening 6017 is formed so as to extend in an arc shape in a plan view. More specifically, the second induction opening 6017 is formed so as to overlap a part of the virtual circle centered on the center P of the boss portion 6013 (see the arrow of the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 53 (a)). In this way, the second guide opening 6017 is formed so as to extend along the outer shape of the boss portion 6013 in a plan view in the vicinity of the boss portion 6013. The rear end of the second lead opening 6017 is connected to the left end of the first lead opening 6016. The front end portion of the second guide opening 6017 is formed forward in the front-rear direction with respect to the center P of the boss portion 6013.

The shutter 6002 shown in FIGS. 50 to 52 is a member (a member that switches between an open state and a closed state) that opens and closes the large winning opening 540 by power from the large winning opening solenoid 6003 described later. The configuration of the shutter 6002 is substantially the same as that of the shutter 610 of the special electric accessory 600 according to the first embodiment (see FIGS. 46 and 47 (c) and the like). The shutter 6002 includes an elongated plate portion 6021, a connecting plate portion 6022, and a connecting shaft 6023.

The elongated plate portion 6021 is a member that forms the first guide path 531 (see FIG. 46 and the like). The elongated plate portion 6021 is formed in an elongated substantially flat plate shape. The elongated plate portion 6021 is formed so that the longitudinal direction is directed to the left-right direction in a plan view and the elongated plate portion 6021 is directed downward to the left in a front view (the upper side surface faces the upper left side).

The connecting plate portion 6022 is a member that connects the elongated plate portion 6021 and the connecting shaft 6023 described later. The connecting plate portion 6022 is formed in a substantially rectangular flat plate shape in a plan view. The connecting plate portion 6022 is formed so as to extend rearward from the central portion in the left-right direction of the elongated plate portion 6021.

The connecting shaft 6023 is connected to the link arm 6004 described later. The connecting shaft 6023 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with the longitudinal direction directed in the vertical direction. The connecting shaft 6023 is formed so as to project upward. The connecting shaft 6023 is formed in the vicinity of the rear end portion of the connecting plate portion 6022.

In the shutter 6002 having such a configuration, the elongated plate portion 6021 is inserted into the slit 511 (see FIG. 46, etc.) from the rear, and the connecting plate portion 6022 is placed on the bottom surface of the accommodating portion 6001. It is housed in 6001. The shutter 6002 is configured to be slidable in the front-rear direction with respect to the accommodating portion 6001.

The large winning opening solenoid 6003 shown in FIGS. 51, 52, and 54 is a member for driving the shutter 6002. The grand prize opening solenoid 6003 includes a solenoid accommodating unit 6031, a power generating unit 6032, a plunger 6033, a power transmitting unit 6034, and a spring 6035.

The solenoid accommodating unit 6031 is a member accommodating various members constituting the large winning opening solenoid 6003. The solenoid accommodating portion 6031 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper side. The solenoid accommodating portion 6031 is arranged so that the longitudinal direction is directed to the left-right direction. The solenoid accommodating portion 6031 is attached to the accommodating portion 6001 from below.

The power generation unit 6032 is a member that generates power for the large winning opening solenoid 6003. The power generating unit 6032 is composed of a coil, a fixed iron core, and the like (not shown). The power generation unit 6032 can suck the plunger 6033, which will be described later, in response to energization from a predetermined power source. The power generating unit 6032 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape. The power generating unit 6032 is housed inside (left part) of the solenoid accommodating unit 6031 with the longitudinal direction (axial direction) facing left and right.

The plunger 6033 is a member (movable iron core) formed in a substantially rod shape. The plunger 6033 is arranged so that the longitudinal direction (axial direction) is directed to the left-right direction. The plunger 6033 is arranged so as to extend to the right from the power generating unit 6032. The plunger 6033 is configured to be reciprocally movable in the left-right direction with respect to the power generating unit 6032.

The power transmission unit 6034 is a member that transmits the power generated by the large winning opening solenoid 6003 to another member (specifically, the link arm 6004). The power transmission unit 6034 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The power transmission unit 6034 is housed inside (right portion) of the solenoid accommodating portion 6031 and is attached to the right end portion of the plunger 6033. The power transmission unit 6034 includes a connection opening 6036 and a connection protrusion 6037.

The connecting opening 6036 is connected to the link arm 6004 described later. The connecting opening 6036 is formed on the right side of the power transmission unit 6034 in a plan view. The connecting opening 6036 is formed so as to penetrate the power transmitting portion 6034 in the vertical direction.

The connecting protrusion 6037 is connected to the regulation member 6005 described later. The connecting protrusion 6037 is formed by a pair of plate-shaped portions formed so as to protrude upward. The pair of plate-shaped portions are formed so as to be parallel to each other on the left and right sides. With such a configuration, the connecting protrusion 6037 has a gap extending in the front-rear direction between the pair of plate-shaped portions. The connecting protrusion 6037 is formed at the left rear end of the power transmission portion 6034. In the following, the connecting protrusion 6037 refers to the gap.

The spring 6035 is a so-called compression coil spring. The spring 6035 is arranged between the power generation unit 6032 and the power transmission unit 6034 in a state in which the plunger 6033 is inserted and is always compressed. In this way, the spring 6035 always gives a rightward urging force to the plunger 6033 (power transmission unit 6034).

In the large winning opening solenoid 6003 having such a configuration, when the power generating unit 6032 is not energized, the plunger 6033 moves to the right by the urging force of the spring 6035. On the other hand, when the power generating unit 6032 is energized, the plunger 6033 moves to the left against the urging force of the spring 6035 by the suction force of the power generating unit 6032. In this way, in the large winning opening solenoid 6003, the plunger 6033 can be reciprocated in the left-right direction with respect to the power generation unit 6032 by turning on and off the power generation unit 6032 to generate power.

In the present embodiment, when the plunger 6033 is moving to the right (that is, when the power generating unit 6032 is not energized), the shutter 6002 slides forward to move the game ball. It becomes difficult to win a prize in the large winning opening 540 (closed state). On the other hand, when the plunger 6033 is moving to the left (that is, when the power generating unit 6032 is energized), the shutter 6002 slides backward to the large winning opening 540 of the game ball. It becomes a state where it is easy to win a prize (open state).

The link arm 6004 shown in FIGS. 50 to 52 and 55 connects the large winning opening solenoid 6003 and the shutter 6002 in an interlocking manner (interlocking connection), and transmits the power from the large winning opening solenoid 6003 to the shutter 6002. It is a member. The link arm 6004 is formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view by a portion extending in the left-right direction (first link extension portion 6041) and a portion extending in the front-rear direction (second link extension portion 6042). Will be done. The link arm 6004 includes a central tubular portion 6043, a connecting opening 6044, a connecting shaft 6045, and a regulating protrusion 6046.

The central tubular portion 6043 is inserted through the support shaft 6012 of the accommodating portion 6001. The central tubular portion 6043 is formed at substantially the center of the link arm 6004 (the connecting portion between the first link extending portion 6041 and the second link extending portion 6042) in a plan view. The central tubular portion 6043 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with the longitudinal direction directed in the vertical direction. When the support shaft 6012 is inserted through the central cylinder portion 6043, the link arm 6004 is rotatably supported clockwise or counterclockwise with respect to the central cylinder portion 6043 in a plan view.

The connecting opening 6044 is inserted through the connecting shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002. The connecting opening 6044 is formed at the left (tip) end of the first link extending portion 6041. The connecting opening 6044 is formed so as to penetrate the first link extending portion 6041 in the vertical direction. The connecting opening 6044 is formed in an elongated hole shape extending linearly from the tip end side to the base end portion side (central tubular portion 6043 side). The length of the connecting opening 6044 in the lateral direction in the plan view is formed so as to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the connecting shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002.

The connecting shaft 6045 is connected to the connecting opening 6036 of the large winning opening solenoid 6003. The connecting shaft 6045 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with the longitudinal direction directed in the vertical direction. The connecting shaft 6045 is formed so as to project downward. The connecting shaft 6045 is formed at the front (front) end of the second link extending portion 6042. The outer diameter of the connecting shaft 6045 is formed so as to be smaller than the inner diameter (length in the left-right direction) of the connecting opening 6036 of the large winning opening solenoid 6003.

The regulation protrusion 6046 comes into contact with the regulation block 6054 of the regulation member 6005, which will be described later, in a predetermined case. The regulation protrusion 6046 is formed in a plate shape so as to protrude downward. The regulation protrusion 6046 is formed in the vicinity of the base end portion of the first link extension portion 6041 and is formed on the front left side of the central cylinder portion 6043 in a plan view. The rear side surface of the regulation protrusion 6046 is formed so as to be a flat surface facing rearward.

The restricting member 6005 shown in FIGS. 50 to 52 and 56 is a member for restricting the unintentional opening of the shutter 6002 when the shutter 6002 is in the closed state. The regulation member 6005 includes a central cylinder portion 6053, a regulation block portion 6054, a connecting shaft 6055, and an induction shaft 6056.

The central tubular portion 6053 is inserted through the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001. The central tubular portion 6053 is formed substantially in the center of the regulating member 6005 in a plan view. The central tubular portion 6053 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with the longitudinal direction directed in the vertical direction. Further, the central tubular portion 6053 is formed in a long hole shape extending in the left-right direction in a plan view.

Further, a plate-shaped portion (first regulation extension portion 6051) extending so as to spread in a plan view is formed on the right rear side of the central cylinder portion 6053. Further, on the left side of the central tubular portion 6053, a plate-shaped portion (second regulation extension portion 6052) extending so as to expand in a plan view is formed. In this way, the central tubular portion 6053, the first regulated extension portion 6051, and the second regulated extension portion 6052 are formed in a substantially L-shape in the positional relationship with each other in a plan view. When the boss portion 6013 is inserted through the central tubular portion 6053, the regulating member 6005 is pivotally supported clockwise or counterclockwise around the central tubular portion 6053 in a plan view.

The regulation block portion 6054 is in contact with the regulation protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 in a predetermined case. The regulation block portion 6054 is a substantially rectangular parallelepiped (block-shaped) portion that protrudes upward. The regulation block portion 6054 is formed substantially in the center of the first regulation extension portion 6051 (that is, to the right rear of the central cylinder portion 6053) in a plan view. The front side surface of the regulation block portion 6054 is formed so as to be a flat surface facing forward.

The connecting shaft 6055 is connected to the large winning opening solenoid 6003. The connecting shaft 6055 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with the longitudinal direction directed in the vertical direction. The connecting shaft 6055 is formed so as to project downward. The connecting shaft 6055 is formed substantially in the center of the first regulation extension portion 6051 (that is, to the right rear of the central cylinder portion 6053) in a plan view. In this way, the axis of the connecting shaft 6055 is formed so as to substantially overlap the axis of the regulation block portion 6054 in the vertical direction. The outer diameter of the connecting shaft 6055 is formed so as to be smaller than the width of the connecting protrusion 6037 (that is, the gap of the connecting protrusion 6037) of the power transmission unit 6034.

The guide shaft 6056 is inserted through the guide opening 6014 of the accommodating portion 6001. The guide shaft 6056 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with the longitudinal direction directed in the vertical direction. The guide shaft 6056 is formed so as to project downward. The connecting shaft 6055 is formed substantially in the center of the second regulation extension portion 6052 (that is, to the left of the central cylinder portion 6053) in a plan view. The outer diameter of the guide shaft 6056 is formed so as to be substantially the same as the length in the lateral direction of the guide opening 6014 (first guide opening 6016 and second guide opening 6017) in a plan view.

In the following, the assembly configuration of the accommodating portion 6001, the shutter 6002, the winning opening solenoid 6003, the link arm 6004, and the regulating member 6005 in the special electric accessory 6000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52 and 57 to 61. do.

In the drawings after FIG. 60, the accommodating portion 6001 is shown by a broken line, but the support shaft 6012, the boss portion 6013, and the guide opening 6014 are shown by solid lines for convenience of explanation. Further, in the drawings after FIG. 60, the link arm 6004 is shown by a broken line, but the regulation protrusion 6046 is shown by a solid line for convenience of explanation. Further, in the drawings after FIG. 61, for convenience of explanation, the illustration of the configuration of each member is simplified.

First, the outline of the assembly configuration of various members (shutter 6002, large winning opening solenoid 6003, link arm 6004, and regulation member 6005) with respect to the accommodating portion 6001 will be described.

The shutter 6002 is placed on the bottom surface of the accommodating portion 6001. In this way, the shutter 6002 is arranged so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction with respect to the accommodating portion 6001.

Further, the large winning opening solenoid 6003 is attached to the accommodating portion 6001 from below. In this way, the upper side and the lower side of the accommodating portion 6001 (power transmission portion 6034 of the large winning opening solenoid 6003) are communicated with each other through the communication opening 6011.

Further, the support shaft 6012 of the accommodating portion 6001 is inserted into the central tubular portion 6043 of the link arm 6004 so as to be relatively rotatable from below. In this way, the link arm 6004 is rotatably supported by the accommodating portion 6001 clockwise or counterclockwise in a plan view around the support shaft 6012 of the accommodating portion 6001.

Further, the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001 is inserted into the central tubular portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 so as to be relatively rotatable from below. In this way, the regulating member 6005 is rotatably supported with respect to the accommodating portion 6001 clockwise or counterclockwise with respect to the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001 in a plan view.

Next, the details of the assembly configuration of various members will be described.

As described above, in a state where the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the accommodating portion 6001, the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 moves downward of the accommodating portion 6001 via the communication opening 6011 of the accommodating portion 6001. Is projected. The connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 is inserted from above into the connecting opening 6036 of the large winning opening solenoid 6003 below the accommodating portion 6001. In this way, the link arm 6004 and the large winning opening solenoid 6003 are interlockably connected via the connecting shaft 6045 and the connecting opening 6036.

As shown in FIG. 61A, the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 is arranged so as to come into contact with the left edge portion of the connecting opening 6036 of the large winning opening solenoid 6003. That is, the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 is arranged with a gap in the left-right direction in a plan view between the connecting shaft 6045 and the right edge portion of the connecting opening 6036 of the large winning opening solenoid 6003.

Further, in a state where the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the accommodating portion 6001, the connecting shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 is inserted into the connecting opening 6044 of the link arm 6004 from below. In this way, the link arm 6004 and the shutter 6002 are interlockably connected via the connection opening 6044 and the connection shaft 6023.

Further, in a state where the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the accommodating portion 6001, the regulation protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 comes into contact with the regulation block portion 6054 of the regulation member 6005.

As shown in FIG. 61A, the rear side surface of the regulation protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the front side surface of the regulation block portion 6054 of the regulation member 6005 are planes parallel to each other. There is surface contact (not contact).

Further, in a state where the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the accommodating portion 6001, as shown in FIGS. It is arranged so as to abut the left edge of the portion 6053.

Further, in a state where the regulating member 6005 is supported by the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001, the connecting shaft 6055 of the restricting member 6005 projects downward of the accommodating portion 6001 through the communication opening 6011 of the accommodating portion 6001. Will be done. The connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 is inserted from above into the connecting protrusion 6037 (that is, the gap of the connecting protrusion 6037) of the large winning opening solenoid 6003 below the accommodating portion 6001. In this way, the link arm 6004 and the regulation member 6005 are interlockably connected via the connecting shaft 6055 and the connecting protrusion 6037.

As shown in FIG. 61B, the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 is arranged in front of the connecting protrusion 6037 (that is, the gap of the connecting protrusion 6037) of the large winning opening solenoid 6003.

Further, in a state where the regulating member 6005 is supported by the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001, the guide shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 is inserted into the guiding opening 6014 of the accommodating portion 6001 from above.

As shown in FIG. 61 (b), the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is the first guide opening of the first guide opening 6016 and the second guide opening 6017 of the guide opening 6014 of the accommodating portion 6001. It is arranged so as to be located within the portion 6016 (more specifically, to abut the right end of the first lead opening 6016).

As described above, in the state where the left edge portion of the central tubular portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is in contact with the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001, the guiding shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is in contact with the first guiding opening 6016. It will be in contact with the right end of.

In the following, with reference to FIGS. 61 and 65, when the shutter 6002 is in the closed state, the shutter 6002 is unintentionally opened (more specifically) by the induction opening 6014 (locking means) of the regulating member 6005 and the accommodating portion 6001. Explains in detail the regulation of the unintended rotation of the link arm 6004 and the unintended movement of the shutter 6002).

In the present embodiment, the unintentional opening of the shutter 6002 is not an opening according to the power generated by the large winning opening solenoid 6003, but an external force directly applied to the shutter 6002 (for example, a game ball to the shutter 6002). It refers to the opening in response to a collision or a fraudulent act on the shutter 6002 performed by a fraudster.

In the following description, the rotation direction of each member is based on a plan view unless otherwise specified. Further, in the following description, a state in which the unintentional opening of the shutter 6002 is restricted by the guide opening 6014 (locking means) of the regulating member 6005 and the accommodating portion 6001 is referred to as a “locked state”.

In the special electric accessory 6000 assembled as described above, when an external force (a force for sliding the shutter 6002 backward) is directly applied to the shutter 6002, the shutter 6002 is moved through the connecting opening 6044 and the connecting shaft 6023. , A force that rotates clockwise is transmitted from the shutter 6002 to the link arm 6004.

As shown in FIG. 61A, the regulation protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 is rearward (that is, the moving direction when the link arm rotates clockwise) with the regulation block portion 6054 of the regulation member 6005. Be abutted. Therefore, when a force that rotates clockwise is transmitted from the shutter 6002 to the link arm 6004, the link arm 6004 counterclockwise to the regulation member 6005 via the regulation protrusion 6046 and the regulation block 6054. A rotating force is transmitted.

Here, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is located within the first guide opening 6016 (more specifically, with the right end of the first guide opening 6016). Arranged (to abut). That is, an edge portion (hereinafter, front side edge portion) of the first guide opening 6016 is arranged in front of the guide shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 (movement direction when the regulation member 6005 rotates counterclockwise). NS. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 65A, even when a force that rotates counterclockwise is transmitted from the link arm 6004 to the regulation member 6005, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 is the first. The regulatory member 6005 cannot rotate because it interferes with the front edge of the induction opening 6016.

As described above, since the regulation member 6005 cannot rotate, the link arm 6004 that transmits the force to the regulation member 6005 cannot rotate either. Further, since the link arm 6004 cannot rotate, the shutter 6002 that transmits the force to the link arm 6004 cannot also move. That is, even when an external force is directly applied to the shutter 6002, the shutter 6002 does not move backward against the external force and can maintain the closed state.

As described above, when the induction shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 is located in the first induction opening 6016, the intention of the shutter 6002 by the induction opening 6014 (locking means) of the regulation member 6005 and the accommodating portion 6001. Unopening (more specifically, unintentional rotation of the link arm 6004 and unintentional movement of the shutter 6002) is restricted (locked state).

In the locked state, when a force that rotates counterclockwise is transmitted from the link arm 6004 to the regulation member 6005, the rear side surface of the regulation protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the regulation block portion 6054 The front side surfaces are pressed against each other with a relatively strong force. However, since the rear side surface of the regulation protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the front side surface of the regulation block portion 6054 of the regulation member 6005 are in surface contact with each other instead of point contact as described above, the durability of each is improved. Can be made to.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 65, a configuration in which the shutter 6002 is opened according to the power generated by the large winning opening solenoid 6003 when the shutter 6002 is in the closed state will be described in detail.

As will be described later, when the shutter 6002 is opened in response to the power generated by the large winning opening solenoid 6003, the regulating member 6005 and the accommodating portion 6001 are different from the case where an external force is directly applied to the shutter 6002. The locked state by the induction opening 6014 (locking means) of the above is released.

When the induction shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is located in the first induction opening 6016 (when the shutter 6002 is in the closed state), when the shutter 6002 is opened, the power generation unit 6032 of the large winning opening solenoid 6003 is energized. Is done. When the power generation unit 6032 is energized, as shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the plunger 6033 starts to move to the left, and power is generated by the large winning opening solenoid 6003. When the movement of the plunger 6033 to the left is started, the power transmission unit 6034 (connecting opening 6036 and connecting protrusion 6037) fixed to the right end of the plunger 6033 also moves to the left in the same manner.

When the connecting protrusion 6037 of the power transmission unit 6034 moves to the left, the power from the large winning opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the regulating member 6005 via the connecting protrusion 6037 and the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005. .. Specifically, the connecting protrusion 6037 of the power transmission unit 6034 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 to the left. In this way, when the power from the large winning opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted, the regulating member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the accommodating portion 6001.

Specifically, the central cylinder portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001, and the right edge portion of the central cylinder portion 6053 comes into contact with the boss portion 6013. Further, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the first guide opening 6016 of the accommodating portion 6001, and the left end portion of the first guide opening 6016 (the rear end of the second guide opening 6017). Part).

In the following, the movement of the power transmission unit 6034 until the right edge portion of the central cylinder portion 6053 of the regulation member 6005 is brought into contact with the boss portion 6013 (the guide shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 is accommodated in the first induction opening portion of the accommodating portion 6001). The movement until it comes into contact with the left end portion of the 6016) is referred to as "the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034". Further, the movement of the power transmission unit 6034 after the right edge portion of the central cylinder portion 6053 of the regulation member 6005 is brought into contact with the boss portion 6013 (the guide shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 is brought into contact with the first induction opening 6016 of the accommodating portion 6001). (Movement after contacting the left end portion of the power transmission unit 6034) is referred to as "second movement of the power transmission unit 6034".

Further, when the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission unit 6034 moves to the left due to the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, the connection opening 6036 moves to the left with respect to the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004. Then, the right edge of the connecting opening 6036 comes into contact with the connecting shaft 6045. In the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission unit 6034 does not press the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 at all during the movement. That is, in the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, the power from the grand prize opening solenoid 6003 is not transmitted to the link arm 6004.

In the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, the timing at which the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 comes into contact with the left end of the first guide opening 6016 (the rear end of the second guide opening 6017) and the regulation. The timing at which the right edge of the central tubular portion 6053 of the member 6005 abuts on the boss portion 6013 and the timing at which the right edge of the connecting opening 6036 of the power transmission portion 6034 abuts on the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 are all. It is set to be almost the same.

Further, in the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 is located in the first guide opening 6016, and the front of the guide shaft 6056 (the regulation member 6005 rotates counterclockwise). In the moving direction), the front edge portion of the first induction opening 6016 is arranged. That is, in the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, even when a force that rotates counterclockwise is transmitted from the link arm 6004 to the regulation member 6005, the induction shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 Since it interferes with the front side edge portion of the first guide opening 6016, the locked state by the guide opening 6014 (locking means) of the regulating member 6005 and the accommodating portion 6001 is continued.

Further, as described above, in the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, the power from the large winning opening solenoid 6003 is not transmitted to the link arm 6004. That is, the power from the grand prize opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted from the power transmission unit 6034 to the regulation member 6005, but is not transmitted to other members (for example, the link arm 6004). In this way, although the regulating member 6005 moves to the left, the link arm 6004 and the shutter 6002 do not rotate (move) in any direction, and maintain the posture when the shutter 6002 is in the closed state. Become.

In such a state, as shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, when the power transmission unit 6034 moves further to the left (when the power transmission unit 6034 makes the second movement), the connecting protrusion of the power transmission unit 6034 Power from the large winning opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the regulating member 6005 via the connecting shaft 6055 of the 6037 and the regulating member 6005. Specifically, the connecting protrusion 6037 of the power transmission unit 6034 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 to the left.

Here, when the power transmission unit 6034 makes the second movement, the right edge portion of the central cylinder portion 6053 of the regulation member 6005 is in contact with the boss portion 6013. That is, the central tubular portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 cannot move to the left with respect to the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001. Therefore, when the connecting protrusion 6037 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 to the left, the regulating member 6005 tries to rotate counterclockwise around the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001.

Further, when the power transmission unit 6034 makes the second movement, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 hits the left end portion (rear end portion of the second guide opening 6017) of the first guide opening 6016 of the accommodating portion 6001. Being in contact. The second guide opening 6017 is formed so as to overlap a part of a virtual circle centered on the center P of the boss portion 6013. That is, an opening is formed in front of the guide shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 (movement direction when the regulation member 6005 rotates counterclockwise) along a trajectory in which the guide shaft 6056 moves (). There is nothing to interfere with when the induction shaft 6056 moves).

In this way, when the connecting protrusion 6037 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 to the left and the regulating member 6005 tries to rotate counterclockwise around the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001, FIG. 65 As shown in (b), the guide shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 is guided by the second guide opening 6017 of the accommodating portion 6001, and the second guide opening 6017 moves forward. When the regulating member 6005 tries to rotate counterclockwise around the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001, the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 moves rearward relative to the power transmission portion 6034. I will do it.

In the regulation member 6005, the position of the center of rotation is different in the left-right direction depending on whether the power transmission unit 6034 makes the first movement or the power transmission unit 6034 makes the second movement as described above. ing. Specifically, when the power transmission unit 6034 makes the first movement, the position of the rotation center of the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001 which is in contact with the left edge portion of the central cylinder portion 6053 of the regulation member 6005. And. When the power transmission unit 6034 makes the second movement, the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001 that is in contact with the right edge portion of the central cylinder portion 6053 of the regulation member 6005 is set as the position of the rotation center.

In this way, the regulating member 6005 is moved to the front side of the first induction opening 6016 in front of the guide shaft 6056 (moving direction when the regulating member 6005 rotates counterclockwise) by changing the position of the rotation center. It is switching whether there is an edge or the second lead opening 6017 is extended.

In this way, when the power transmission unit 6034 makes the second movement, the locked state of the induction opening 6014 (locking means) of the regulation member 6005 and the accommodation unit 6001 is released, and the induction shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 is accommodated. The second induction opening 6017 of the portion 6001 can be moved forward. That is, when the connecting protrusion 6037 of the power transmission unit 6034 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 to the left, the regulating member 6005 rotates counterclockwise around the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001. do.

Further, when the power transmission unit 6034 makes the second movement, the right edge portion of the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission unit 6034 is in contact with the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004. That is, the power from the grand prize opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the link arm 6004 via the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission unit 6034 and the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004. Specifically, the connecting opening 6036 of the power transmission unit 6034 presses the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 to the left. In this way, when the connecting opening 6036 of the power transmission unit 6034 presses the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 to the left, the link arm 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise.

When the power transmission unit 6034 is performing the first movement (when it is in the locked state), when the link arm 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise, that is, with the regulation protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004. When a force that rotates counterclockwise is transmitted from the link arm 6004 to the regulation member 6005 via the regulation block portion 6054 of the regulation member 6005, the induction shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 opens the first induction opening. The regulatory member 6005 could not rotate because it interfered with the front edge of the portion 6016.

However, when the power transmission unit 6034 makes the second movement, the induction shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 can move the second induction opening 6017 of the accommodating unit 6001 forward as described above, so that the regulation member The regulation block portion 6054 of 6005 will also move backward. When the regulation block portion 6054 of the regulation member 6005 moves rearward, it moves in a direction away from the regulation protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004.

Therefore, when the power transmission unit 6034 makes the second movement and the link arm 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise, the regulation protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the regulation block 6054 of the regulation member 6005 Does not interfere with. That is, the link arm 6004 can rotate counterclockwise.

Further, when the link arm 6004 rotates counterclockwise, the power from the large winning opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the shutter 6002 via the connecting opening 6044 of the link arm 6004 and the connecting shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002. Specifically, the connecting opening 6044 of the link arm 6004 presses the connecting shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 rearward. In this way, when the connecting opening 6044 of the link arm 6004 presses the connecting shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 backward, the shutter 6002 starts sliding backward.

As shown in FIG. 64, the second movement of the power transmission unit 6034 ends when the guide shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 reaches the front end portion of the second guide opening 6017 of the accommodating unit 6001. In this way, when the guide shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 reaches the front end portion of the second guide opening 6017 of the accommodating portion 6001, the shutter 6002 is opened.

As described above, the configuration in which the shutter 6002 is released from the closed state has been described, but when the shutter 6002 is closed from the open state, the shutter 6002 is opened after the energization of the large winning opening solenoid 6003 is stopped. Various members (shutter 6002, large winning opening solenoid 6003, link arm 6004, and regulation member 6005) operate in the reverse order of the operation.

Here, conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a technique of providing a displaceable displacement member at a position where a game ball easily passes and a position where a game ball is difficult to pass, for example, with respect to a passing region. Is known. For example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-307103.

In the technique described in JP-A-2008-307103, a door member of a winning device is provided as the displacement member. Further, a solenoid is adopted as a drive source for displacing the door member (moving it back and forth between the opening position and the closing position).

Further, in the technique described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-307103, the locking portion provided in the transmission means of the solenoid and the engaging projection portion provided in the door member come into contact with each other to close the door member. It is possible to regulate (lock) the door member from being opened at the position.

However, since the locking part and the engaging protrusion part are required to have a certain degree of accuracy in their positional relationship with each other, if the solenoid is deteriorated over time or foreign matter is mixed in the drive path of the solenoid, they are completely compatible with each other. Will not contact. In this way, if the lock portion and the engaging protrusion are not completely in contact with each other, the door member may be loosened or the door member may be slightly opened at the closing position (unintentional displacement is performed). There was a possibility) and it was inconvenient.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and when the displacement member is displaced to a position where it is difficult for the gaming ball to pass, the unintended displacement of the displacement member is more reliably regulated. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can be used.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a game board 17 having a game area 20 in which the game ball rolls, and a second starting port 440 provided in the game area 20 through which the game ball can pass. Displacement members (shutter 6002 and link arm 6004) that can be displaced to (passing area) and a position where the game ball can easily pass and a position where the game ball cannot easily pass with respect to the second starting port 440 (passing area). ), A game machine including a large winning opening solenoid 6003 (driving means) for driving the displacement member, and a main control circuit 100 (driving control means) capable of controlling the large winning opening solenoid 6003 (driving means). This is a state in which the displacement member is displacement-controlled to a position where it is difficult for the game ball to pass, and the main control circuit 100 (drive control means) is at a position where the displacement member can easily pass through the game ball. The displacement member is provided with locking means (regulator member 6005 and induction opening 6014 of the accommodating portion 6001) that can lock the displacement member at a position where it is difficult for the game ball to pass through when the displacement is not controlled. The mouth solenoid 6003 (driving means) is a power transmission capable of transmitting the power generated by the power generating unit 6032 to the displacement member by coming into contact with the power generating unit 6032 that generates power and at least a part of the displacement member. The locking means defines a restricting member 6005 (regulating portion) that regulates the displacement of the displacement member and a displacement path of the restricting portion by contacting at least a part of the displacement member, including the portion 6034. The displacement path includes the guide opening 6014 (displacement guide), and the first guide opening 6016 (first displacement section) and the first guide opening 6016 (first displacement section) are The displacement member includes a different second induction opening 6017 (second displacement section), and the displacement member is in a position where the game ball can easily pass and the game ball passes in a state where at least a part of the displacement member is in contact with the power transmission unit 6034. Displacement is controlled to a position where it is difficult, and the restricting member 6005 (displacement unit) can be displaced along the induction opening 6014 (displacement induction unit) with the displacement of the power transmission unit 6034, and the lock can be controlled. When the regulating member 6005 (regulating portion) is located in the first induction opening 6016 (first displacement section), the means maintains the locked state of the displacement member, and the regulating member 6005 (regulating portion) moves. When it is located in the second induction opening 6017 (second displacement section), the locked state of the displacement member is released.

With such a configuration, the locking means (regulator 6005 and guide opening 6014 of the accommodating portion 6001) is available only when, for example, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulator 6005 is located at the right end of the first guide opening 6016. Instead, the displacement members (shutter 6002 and link arm 6004) can be kept locked while the guide shaft 6056 is located within the first guide opening 6016. That is, even when the positional relationship between the regulation member 6005 and the induction opening 6014 of the accommodating portion 6001 is slightly deviated (for example, even if the power transmission portion 6034 is not arranged at a normal position), the locked state Can be maintained. Therefore, when the displacement member (shutter 6002 and link arm 6004) is displaced to a position where it is difficult for the game ball to pass through, the unintended displacement of the displacement member (shutter 6002 and link arm 6004) is more reliably regulated. can do.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the displacement of the regulation member 6005 (regulation unit) includes movement and rotation, and the locking means is such that the regulation member 6005 (regulation unit) is the first. When located in the one induction opening 6016 (first displacement section), the regulation member 6005 (regulation unit) is locked by restricting the rotation of the regulation member 6005 (regulation unit) while being movable. When the state is maintained and the regulating member 6005 (regulating section) is located in the second induction opening 6017 (second displacement section), the position of the rotation center of the regulating member 6005 (regulating section) is regulated. By making the member 6005 (regulatory portion) different from the case where it is located in the first induction opening 6016 (first displacement section), the restricting member 6005 (regulatory portion) can be rotated and the locked state is released. Is what you do.

With such a configuration, the regulating member 6005 (regulating unit), which is one member, can switch between maintaining and releasing the locked state by combining two operations (movement and rotation). In this way, the number of parts can be reduced as compared with the case where, for example, the members that perform two operations (movement and rotation) are provided respectively. In particular, in the special electric accessory as in the present embodiment, the space for arranging the parts is limited, so that it is beneficial to have such a configuration.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the displacement members include a shutter 6002 (game ball guiding portion) for guiding the game ball and a link arm 6004 (link portion) connected to the game ball guiding portion. The power transmission unit 6034 is in contact with the link arm 6004 (link unit).

With such a configuration, the power transmission unit 6034 is in contact with the link arm 6004 (link unit) instead of the shutter 6002 (game ball guide unit), so that the power transmission unit 6034 does not come into direct contact with the shutter 6002 (game ball guide unit). The shutter 6002 (game ball guiding unit) can be locked.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, the special electric accessory 6000 has been described as an example of the object to be locked, but the object to be locked is not limited to this, and is an ordinary electric accessory or the like. You may.

When the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034 is completed, the regulation block unit 6054 of the regulation member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the link arm 6004. In this way, when the regulation block portion 6054 of the regulation member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the link arm 6004, the regulation protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the regulation block portion 6054 of the regulation member 6005 are brought into contact with each other. It is possible to cancel the state. That is, the regulation protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the regulation block 6054 of the regulation member 6005 can be arranged so as not to overlap in the front-rear direction.

According to such a configuration, when the power transmission unit 6034 makes the second movement and the link arm 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise, the regulation protrusion 6046 and the regulation member 6005 of the link arm 6004 Interference with the regulation block portion 6054 (regulation of rotation of the link arm 6004) can be more reliably prevented.

Further, even when the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034 is completed, the regulation protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the regulation block 6054 of the regulation member 6005 are maintained in contact with each other, and the link arm is maintained. When the 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise, the regulation protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 presses the regulation block 6054 of the regulation member 6005 to assist the rotation of the regulation member 6005. ..

Further, the configuration of the guide opening 6014 (first guide opening 6016 and second guide opening 6017) is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. For example, in the induction opening 6014 (displacement induction unit), when the power transmission unit 6034 is performing the first movement (when it is in the locked state), the link arm 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise. In addition, it is sufficient that the guide shaft 6056 is formed so as to interfere with the movement of the guide shaft 6056 in front of the guide shaft 6056 (movement direction when the regulation member 6005 rotates counterclockwise). From the viewpoint of smoothly promoting the movement of the guide shaft 6056, the configuration according to the present embodiment formed along the movement path of the guide shaft 6056 is desirable.

[Structure of ordinary electric accessory unit 400]
The configuration of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. FIG. 66 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 viewed from diagonally above the rear left (left in the front view).

The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is attached and fixed to the lower left of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the game area 20. The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 includes a general winning opening 53, 54, 55, a second starting opening 440, a second starting opening switch 441 for detecting the winning of a game ball into the second starting opening 440, and an out opening 450. A housing member 443 that receives the game ball that has won the second start port 440 and the game ball that has been received by the out port 450 and discharges the game ball to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the front surface of the second start port 440 and the out port 450. The front cover 445 provided in the machine and the ordinary electric accessory 460 are provided. The second starting port 440 and the out port 450 are formed in a plate-shaped opening forming member 420. The opening forming member 420 is formed with a hole 442 through which the rotation shaft 4622 of the blade member 4620, which will be described later, penetrates.

The second starting port 440 and the out port 450 are arranged adjacent to each other, the second starting port 440 is arranged on the right side in the front view, and the out port 450 is arranged on the left side in the front view.

On the back surface of the front cover 445, a wall 4452 that separates the second starting port 440 and the out port 450 is formed. The wall 4452 prevents the game ball (the game ball that wins the second starting port 440) that has passed through the upper part of the blade member 4620 when the blade member 4620 is opened from being accepted by the out port 450, and also prevents the game ball from being accepted by the out port 450. It has a function of preventing the game ball from winning the second starting port 440 when the blade member 4620 is not opened.

The second start port switch 441 is arranged on the back side of the second start port 440 so that the game ball winning the second start port 440 can be detected.

The accommodating member 443 is provided with an opening 4434 and an opening 4436 at a portion corresponding to each of the second starting port 440 and the out opening 450, and the second starting port 440 is won and detected by the second starting port switch 441. The game ball is housed in the opening 4434, and the game ball received in the out opening 450 is housed in the opening 4436. The game balls housed in the openings 4434 and 4436 are collected by a game ball circulation facility provided in an island facility (not shown). Further, the accommodating member 443 has a hole 4432 through which the rotation shaft 4622 of the blade member 4620, which will be described later, penetrates.

[Composition of ordinary electric accessory 460]
The configuration of the ordinary electric accessory 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70. FIG. 68 is an example of a diagram showing an ordinary electric accessory 460, a second start port switch 441, and an accommodating member 443. FIG. 69 is a rear view of the ordinary electric accessory 460. FIG. 70 is an example of a rear view of the ordinary electric accessory 460 as viewed from diagonally above to the right.

The ordinary electric accessory 460 includes a base cover 4610, a blade member 4620, a start port solenoid 4630, and a power transmission mechanism 4640 that transmits power from the start port solenoid 4630 to the blade member 4620.

The base cover 4610 accommodates the start port solenoid 4630 and the power transmission mechanism 4640 with the accommodating member 443, and is attached to the back surface side of the opening forming member 420. The back side of the base cover 4610 is attached and fixed to the transparent panel 172 described above. A guide groove 4612 long in the left-right direction is formed on the front side of the base cover 4610. Further, on the front side of the base cover 4610, a bearing (not shown) that rotatably supports the pin 4648, which will be described later, is formed.

The blade member 4620 is provided with a rotating shaft 4622 below the paper surface. The rotating shaft 4622 penetrates the hole 442 formed in the opening forming member 420 and the hole 4432 formed in the accommodating member 443, and is rotatably supported by the bearing 46444 of the blade connecting member 4642 described later. The rotary shaft 4622 is notched at a portion pivotally supported by the bearing 46444 of the blade connecting member 4642, and has a non-circular cross-sectional shape in the axial direction. Further, when the power from the starting port solenoid 4630 is transmitted to the rotating shaft 4622 as a rotational force by the power transmission mechanism 4640, the blade member 4620 rotates about the rotating shaft 4622 as the rotation center. In the present embodiment, the blade member 4620 is in the closed state when it is upright, and is in the open state when it is rotated to the right with the rotation shaft 4622 as the rotation center from the closed state.

The start port solenoid 4630 includes a plunger 4632 that expands and contracts in the left-right direction in the front view, and has a flange 4634 at the tip of the plunger 4632 (the tip on the right side in the front view). The start port solenoid 4630 is normally (non-excited) in a state in which the plunger 4632 is extended to the right in the front view, and when excited, the plunger 4632 moves to the left in the front view (contraction direction).

The power transmission mechanism 4640 converts such power into rotational force and transmits it to the rotating shaft 4622 of the blade member 4620 as the plunger 4632 of the starting port solenoid 4630 expands and contracts in the left-right direction. The power transmission mechanism 4640 is connected to the blade connecting member 4642 connected to the rotating shaft 4622 of the blade member 4620 and the flange 4634 at the tip of the plunger 4632 of the starting port solenoid 4630, and the flange connecting member 4646 and the blade connecting member 4642. A link member 4644 provided between the and the flange connecting member 4646 is provided.

The blade connecting member 4642 has a bearing 46444 that pivotally supports the rotating shaft 4622 of the blade member 4620. The bearing 46444 of the blade connecting member 4642 corresponds to the shape of the rotating shaft 4622 that supports the shaft. Therefore, the blade connecting member 4642 rotates with the rotating shaft 4622 around the rotating shaft 4622 as the rotation center. Further, the blade connecting member 4642 has a support shaft 46426 protruding toward the back surface side. The support shaft 46426 can rotate around a rotating shaft 4622 that is pivotally supported by the bearing 46424.

The link member 4644 is a member having a curved shape when viewed from the front, and an elongated hole 46442 is formed at an end portion below the front view. A support shaft 46426 of the blade connecting member 4642 is slidably connected to the elongated hole 46442. At the end of the link member 4644 above the front view, a support shaft 46446 protruding toward the back surface is formed. Below the support shaft 46446, an engagement shaft 46448 projecting to the back surface side is formed. A bearing 46444 that rotatably supports the pin 4648 is formed in the central portion of the link member 4644 (the portion where the angle of the dogleg changes). The link member 4644 is rotatable around a pin 4648 pivotally supported by the bearing 46444. When the link member 4644 rotates around the pin 4648 pivotally supported by the bearing 46444, the support shaft 46446 and the engaging shaft 46448 also rotate around the pin 4648 pivotally supported by the bearing 46444.

The flange connecting member 4646 has a flange holding portion 46462, a connecting hole 46464, and an engaging groove 46466. The flange holding portion 46462 sandwiches the flange 4634 at the tip of the plunger 4632 of the starting port solenoid 4630, and the flange connecting member 4646 moves in the expansion / contraction direction of the plunger 4632 as the plunger 4632 expands / contracts. A support shaft 46446 of the link member 4644 is connected to the connecting hole 46464 so as to be able to move in the connecting hole 46464. The engagement shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 is engaged with the engagement groove 46466. Here, the shape of the cross section of the engaging shaft 46448 across the longitudinal direction is a drop shape having a tip portion. Then, the link member 4644 engages with the engagement groove 46466 at the tip end portion. Further, the flange connecting member 4646 is formed with a guide piece 46468 that is long in the left-right direction on the back surface side (base cover 4610 side). The guide piece 46468 is guided by a guide groove 4612 formed in the base cover 4610.

[Operation explanation of ordinary electric accessory 460]
Next, the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 72. FIG. 71 shows an aspect of the ordinary electric accessory 460 (shown by a dashed line) when the blade member 4620 is in the closed state, and a normal state when the blade member 4620 is in the transition state from the closed state to the open state. This is an example of a rear view showing an aspect (shown by a solid line) of the electric accessory 460. FIG. 72 shows an aspect of the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in the transition state (shown by the alternate long and short dash line) and an aspect of the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in the open state (solid line). It is a rear view which shows (illustrated by).

When the start port solenoid 4630 is excited, the plunger 4632 moves in the contraction direction (leftward in front view (rightward in FIGS. 71 and 72)). When the plunger 4632 moves in the contraction direction, the flange 4634 (see FIGS. 66 and 67) moves in the contraction direction. When the flange 4634 moves in the contraction direction, the flange connecting member 4646 that sandwiches the flange 4634 by the flange sandwiching portion 46462 moves in the contraction direction. When the flange connecting member 4646 moves in the contraction direction, the engaging shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 engaged with the engaging groove 46466 of the flange connecting member 4646 is disengaged. When the engagement shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 engaged in the engagement groove 46466 of the flange connecting member 4646 is disengaged, the link member 4644 faces the front with the pin 4648 pivotally supported by the pin insertion hole 46444 as the center of rotation. It rotates counterclockwise (clockwise in FIGS. 71 and 72) visually. At this time, the link member 4644 can move downward in the connecting hole 46464 of the flange connecting member 4646. When the link member 4644 rotates counterclockwise with the pin 4648 pivotally supported by the pin insertion hole 46444 as the center of rotation, the support shaft 46426 slidably connected in the elongated hole 46442 of the blade connecting member 4642 The blade connecting member 4642 orbits clockwise around the rotation shaft 4622, and the blade member 4620 operates toward the open state.

The operation of the blade member 4620 from the open state to the closed state moves in the direction in which the plunger 4632 extends due to the start port solenoid 4630 being de-energized, and moves in the opposite direction to the operation from the closed state to the open state. Is done by. The portion of the engaging groove 46466 that comes into contact with the engaging shaft 46448 so that the engaging shaft 46448 can be smoothly engaged with the engaging groove 46466 when the blade member 4620 operates from the open state to the closed state. Is tilted diagonally downward to the right (diagonally downward to the left in FIGS. 71 and 72) when viewed from the front.

[Functional description of ordinary electric accessory 460]
Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the function of the ordinary electric accessory 460 will be described. FIG. 73 is a rear view of the blade member 4620 and the power transmission mechanism 4640 for explaining the function of the flange connecting member 4646, and is a view for explaining that (A) the opening of the blade member 4620 is prevented. , (B) is a diagram for explaining that the blade member 4620 is allowed to be opened. In addition, in FIGS. 73A and 73B, the start port solenoid 4630 is not shown.

When the blade member 4620 is closed (when the plunger 4632 of the start port solenoid 4630 (both see, for example, FIG. 71) is non-excited), the engagement shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 engages the engagement groove 46466. Therefore, the link member 4644 cannot rotate (rotate around the pin 4648 pivotally supported by the pin insertion hole 46444) (see FIG. 73 (a)). Therefore, unless the plunger 4632 moves in the contraction direction (unless the start port solenoid 4630 is excited except for special circumstances such as failure), the blade member 4620 cannot be opened even if it is attempted to be opened. Therefore, even if an external force is applied to illegally open the blade member 4620, this can be prevented.

On the other hand, when the start port solenoid 4630 is excited, the plunger 4632 moves in the contraction direction as described above, the engagement between the engagement shaft 46448 and the engagement groove 46466 is released, and the blade member 4620 is opened (FIG. FIG. 73 (b)).

In this way, the link member 4644 constituting the engaging shaft 46448, the flange connecting member 4646 forming the engaging groove 46466, and the starting port solenoid 4630 prevent the blade member 4620 from being illegally opened. It functions as a means to prevent unauthorized opening.

[Structure of upper front accessory 1000]
The configuration of the upper front accessory 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77. FIG. 74 is an example of a front view of the upper front accessory 1000 in a normal mode (a mode when it is in the origin position). FIG. 75 is an example of a rear view of the upper front accessory 1000 in the normal mode. FIG. 76 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper front accessory 1000 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 77 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper front accessory 1000 viewed from diagonally above the rear left (left in front view).

The upper front accessory 1000 can be actuated with respect to the base plate 1010 to which various members constituting the upper front accessory 1000 are attached, the decorative plate 1030 attached and fixed to the front side of the base plate 1010, and the base plate 1010. A movable decorative body 1040 configured, a drive motor 1050 as a drive source for operating the movable decorative body 1040, and a plurality of gears 1060 capable of transmitting the power of the drive motor 1050 to the movable decorative body 1040. A force transmitting member 1020 that transmits power from the drive motor 1050 to the movable decorative body 1040 via the plurality of gears 1060, and a coil spring 1070 as an example of an elastic member that biases the movable decorative body 1040 toward the origin position. , A photosensor 1080 (see FIG. 77) that detects the position of the movable decorative body 1040. The gear 1060 and the force transmission member 1020 function as a force transmission mechanism for transmitting the power of the drive motor 1050 to the movable decorative body 1040.

The base plate 1010 is a plate-shaped member that is attached and fixed to the upper part of the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 described above so as to be located on the front side of the upper back accessory 1100. On the front surface side of the base plate 1010, a first support shaft 1011, a second support shaft 1012, a third support shaft 1013, and a fourth support shaft 1014 are formed which are connected to various members of the force transmission member 1020. Further, in the base plate 1010, when the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position, the notch portion 1016 formed at the portion where the bearing 10226 of the first transmission member 1022, which will be described later, is located, and the movable decorative body 1040 are at the origin position. A notch 1017 formed at a position corresponding to a coil spring support shaft 1042 (lower end portion of the coil spring 1070) formed on the back surface side of the movable decorative body 1040 is formed. In this specification, the notch portion 1016 and the notch portion 1017 are referred to as a back side first notch portion 1016 and a back side second notch portion 1017, respectively. Further, the base plate 1010 has a bearing 1054 that pivotally supports a hollow boss 10662 formed at the center of the first gear 1062 described later, and a hole 1015 corresponding to the movable range of the boss 10672 of the fourth gear 1067 described later. A hole 1018 corresponding to the movable range of the position detection piece 10682 of the position detection gear 1068, which will be described later, is formed.

Although not shown, the decorative plate 1030 is decorated on the front side. The decorative plate 1030 is formed at a portion (a position on the front side corresponding to the first notch on the back side 1016) where the bearing 10226 of the first transmission member 1022, which will be described later, is located when the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position. The cutout portion 1036 is formed, and the cutout portion 1038 formed at a portion where the lower end portion of the coil spring 1070 is located (the position on the front side corresponding to the second notch portion 1017 on the back surface side) is formed. In this specification, the notch 1036 and the notch 1038 are referred to as a front side first notch 1036 and a front side second notch 1038, respectively.

The movable decorative body 1040 includes a coil spring support shaft 1042 connected to the lower end of the coil spring 1070, a first transmission member side support shaft 1044 pivotally supported by a bearing 10226 of the first transmission member 1022 described later, and a first transmission member side support shaft 1044 described later. A second transmission member side support shaft 1046 that is pivotally supported by the bearing 10264 of the second transmission member 1026 is formed.

The drive motor 1050 is mounted and fixed to the base plate 1010 via the motor mounting member 1054. Further, the drive motor 1050 is a motor with a speed reducer, and the rotation speed of the drive motor 1050 is reduced to output power from the motor output shaft 1052.

Gear 1060 includes a first gear 1062, a second gear 1064, a third gear 1066, a fourth gear 1067, and a position detection gear 1068. Of these gears, the first gear 1062, the second gear 1064, the third gear 1066, and the fourth gear 1067 have a function of transmitting the power output from the motor output shaft 1052 to the force transmission member 1020, but the positions The detection gear 1068 does not have such a function.

A hollow shaft 10622 is formed at the center of the first gear 1062. The motor output shaft 1052 is press-fitted into the hollow shaft 10622. As a result, when the drive motor 1050 rotates, the first gear 1062 rotates with the center of the first gear 1062 (motor output shaft 1052) as the center of rotation.

In the fourth gear 1067, a boss 10672 is formed at a portion on the front surface side radially separated from the center 10674 by a predetermined distance. The position detection gear 1068 is formed with a position detection piece 10682 at a portion on the front surface side radially separated from the center 1068 by a predetermined distance. The position detection gear 1068 has substantially the same diameter as the fourth gear 1067. Therefore, the position detection gear 1068 rotates in the opposite direction by the same rotation angle in synchronization with the rotation of the fourth gear 1067. In this way, the position of the movable decorative body 1040 can be detected. In the present embodiment, the position detection of the movable decorative body 1040 detects whether or not it is at the origin position.

The force transmission member 1020 includes a first transmission member 1022 in which the power from the drive motor 1050 is transmitted via the gear 1060, a rack 1024 in which the power transmitted to the first transmission member 1022 is transmitted, and a first transmission member. It includes a second transmission member 1026 in which power from 1022 is transmitted via the rack 1024.

The first transmission member 1022 is a fan-shaped plate-shaped member, and a bearing 10222 is formed at the center in the radial direction. The bearing 10222 pivotally supports the first support shaft 1011 formed on the base plate 1010. The first transmission member 1022 is arranged from the outer side to the inner side in the radial direction (that is, the center of the first transmission member 1022 (bearing 10222)) along the side 1022a on the left side in the front view of the two radial sides 1022a and 1022b. An elongated hole 10224 is formed in the direction toward the direction. A boss 10672 of the fourth gear 1067 penetrating the hole 1015 is movably connected to the slot 10224 in the slot 10224. Of the two radial sides 1022a and 1022b of the first transmission member 1022, a bearing 10226 is formed at the radial outer end along the right side 1022b in the front view. The bearing 10226 pivotally supports a support shaft 1044 formed on the movable decorative body 1040. The side 1022b of the first transmission member 1022 becomes substantially horizontal when the movable decorative body 1040 is in the origin position. Further, the first transmission member 1022 includes a gear 10228 that is coaxial with the first support shaft 1011 (bearing 10222) and rotates in synchronization with the rotation of the first transmission member 1022.

The second transmission member 1026 is a rod-shaped member that becomes substantially horizontal when the movable decorative body 1040 is in the origin position, and a bearing 10262 is formed at the end on the left side in the front view and at the right end in the front view. Bearing 10264 is formed. The bearing 10262 pivotally supports the fourth support shaft 1014 of the base plate 1010. The bearing 10264 pivotally supports the support shaft 1046 of the movable decorative body 1040. Further, the second transmission member 1026 includes a gear 10266 coaxial with the fourth support shaft 1014 (bearing 10262). The gear 10266 has substantially the same diameter as the gear 10228 provided on the first transmission member 1022.

A rack 1024 that transmits power from the first transmission member 1022 to the second transmission member 1026 is provided between the first transmission member 1022 and the second transmission member 1026. The rack 1024 is a rod-shaped member provided substantially horizontally, and a gear 10244 is formed on the right side of the front view (first transmission member 1022 side), and a gear 10248 is formed on the left side of the front view (second transmission member 1026 side). Is formed. The gear 10244 meshes with the gear 10228 and converts the power in the rotational direction of the gear 10228 into a substantially horizontal direction. The gear 10248 further converts the power converted in the substantially horizontal direction by the gear 10244 in the rotational direction and transmits the power to the second transmission member 1026. The rack 1024 has a substantially horizontal elongated hole 10242 formed on the right side (gear 10244 side) of the front view, and a substantially horizontal elongated hole 10246 formed on the left side of the front view (gear 10248 side). The second support shaft 1012 formed on the base plate 1010 is connected to the elongated hole 10242, and the third support shaft 1013 formed on the base plate 1010 is connected to the elongated hole 10246.

The coil spring 1070 urges the movable decorative body 1040 toward the origin position. The upper end of the coil spring 1070 is attached and fixed to the back surface side of the base plate 1010, and the lower end is attached and fixed to the coil spring support shaft 1042 formed on the back surface of the movable decorative body 1040. When the movable decorative body 1040 is in the origin position, the lower end portion of the coil spring 1070 is located in the front side second notch portion 1038 and the back side second notch portion 1017.

The photosensor 1080 is provided so as to be located in the photosensor arrangement region 1019 formed on the base plate 1010. The photo sensor 1080 detects the position of the movable decorative body 1040 by detecting the position detection piece 10682 provided on the position detection gear 1068. In the present embodiment, the photo sensor 1080 is provided so that the position detection piece 10682 can be detected when the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position.

[Explanation of operation of upper front accessory 1000]
Next, the operation of the upper front accessory 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 80. FIG. 78 is a front view showing an example of the upper front accessory 1000 at the origin position. FIG. 79 is a front view showing an example of the upper front accessory 1000 in which the movable decorative body 1040 is moving downward. FIG. 80 is a front view showing an example of the upper front accessory 1000 when the movable decorative body 1040 moves downward to the operating limit position. In addition, in FIGS. 78 to 80, the constituent members and the like of the force transmission member 1020 are shown by broken lines so that the movement of each member can be understood.

When the movable decorative body 1040 is located at the origin position, the drive motor 1050 rotates and the motor output shaft 1052 rotates counterclockwise in front view. As a result, the first gear 1062 rotates counterclockwise in front view. do. When the first gear 1062 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the second gear 1064 that meshes with the teeth of the first gear 1062 rotates clockwise in front view. When the second gear 1064 rotates clockwise in front view, the third gear 1066 that meshes with the teeth of the second gear 1064 rotates counterclockwise in front view. When the third gear 1066 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the fourth gear 1067 that meshes with the third gear 1066 rotates clockwise in front view with the center 10674 of the fourth gear 1067 as the center of rotation. When the fourth gear 1067 rotates clockwise with the center 10674 as the center of rotation in the front view, the boss 10672 also rotates around the center 10674 in the circumferential direction and moves clockwise along the inside of the hole 1015. Since the boss 10672 is movably connected in the slotted hole 10224, when the boss 10672 rotates clockwise in front view with the center 10674 as the center of rotation, the first transmission member 1022 (that is, the gear 10228) becomes the first support shaft. It rotates clockwise with 1011 (bearing 10222) as the center of rotation in front view. When the first transmission member 1022 rotates clockwise with the first support shaft 1011 as the center of rotation, the support shaft 1044 pivotally supported by the bearing 10226 rotates clockwise with the first support shaft 1011 as the center of rotation. Move to.

Further, when the gear 10228 rotates clockwise with the first support shaft 1011 as the center of rotation in the front view, the power of the gear 10228 is transmitted to the gear 10244, and the rack 1024 moves substantially horizontally to the right in the front view. Here, the second support shaft 1012 connected to the slotted hole 10242 and the third support shaft 1013 connected to the slotted hole 10246 function as guides for moving the rack 1024 in a substantially horizontal direction. When the rack 1024 moves substantially horizontally to the right in the front view, this power is transmitted to the gear 10266, and the gear 10266 rotates clockwise in the front view with the fourth support shaft 1014 (bearing 10262) as the center of rotation. When the gear 10266 rotates clockwise with the fourth support shaft 1014 as the center of rotation in the front view, the second transmission member 1026 rotates clockwise with the fourth support shaft 1014 (bearing 10262) as the center of rotation. When the second transmission member 1026 rotates clockwise with the fourth support shaft 1014 as the center of rotation, the support shaft 1046 pivotally supported by the bearing 10264 rotates clockwise with the fourth support shaft 1014 as the center of rotation. Move to.

Here, the gear 10228 and the gear 10266 have the same diameter, the distance from the first support shaft 1011 (bearing 10222) to the support shaft 1044 (bearing 10226), and the distance from the fourth support shaft 1014 (bearing 10262) to the support shaft. The distance to 1046 (bearing 10264) is the same. Therefore, when the motor output shaft 1052 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the support shaft 1044 and the support shaft 1046 are synchronized with each other, and the clock is viewed in front view with the first support shaft 1011 and the fourth support shaft 1014 as the rotation centers, respectively. Works around. As a result, the movable decorative body 1040 operates downward (that is, toward the front surface of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) while drawing an arc clockwise in the front view while maintaining a substantially horizontal state.

When the third gear 1066 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the position detection gear 1068 that meshes with the third gear 1066 also rotates clockwise with the center 1068 of the position detection gear 1068 as the center of rotation. Rotate. The position detection gear 1068 does not mesh with the fourth gear 1067, but the fourth gear 1067 and the position detection gear 1068 have the same diameter and both mesh with the third gear 1066. Therefore, the rotation angle of the fourth gear 1067 and the rotation angle of the position detection gear 1068 are the same, and the position of the position detection piece 10682 formed on the position detection gear 1068 is detected by the photosensor 1080 to obtain the fourth gear. The rotation angle of the gear 1067 and thus the position of the movable decorative body 1040 can be detected.

When the drive motor 1050 rotates and the motor output shaft 1052 rotates clockwise in front view, the movable decorative body 1040 arcs counterclockwise in front view while maintaining a substantially horizontal state by reversing the above-mentioned movement. It works upward while drawing.

In this way, the movable decorative body 1040 can be operated between the origin position and the operation limit position. Here, the movement of the movable decorative body 1040 from the origin position toward the front surface of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (movable body effect) is when the game ball wins the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440. It is performed based on the result of the hit judgment performed in. On the other hand, the movement from the front surface of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 toward the origin position is performed when the movable body effect based on the result of the hit determination this time is completed, and is based on the result of the hit determination from the next time onward. It will be prepared for the movable body production to be performed.

[Structure of upper back accessory 1100]
The configuration of the upper back accessory 1100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 87. FIG. 81 is an example of a front view of the upper back accessory 1100 in a normal mode (a mode when it is in the origin position). FIG. 82 is an example of a rear view of the upper back accessory 1100 in the normal aspect. FIG. 83 is an example of a perspective view of the upper back accessory 1100 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 84 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper back accessory 1100 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 85 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper back accessory 1100 viewed from diagonally above the rear left (left in front view). 86 is an example of a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in FIG. 82 in FIG. 86, and an enlarged view of part X shown in FIG. 87 is an example of a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB shown in FIG. 82 in FIG. 87, and an enlarged view of a portion Y shown in FIG.

The line AA shown in FIG. 82 is a vertical line passing through the center of the bearing 11724 (described later) formed in the extended portion 11741 (described later) of the upper left arm 1172, and is shown in FIG. 82. The BB line is a line that vertically crosses the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172.

The upper back accessory 1100 is made of a substantially flat plate metal and has a substantially frame shape without a lower side. A left drive mechanism having a base member 1180 on which various members are mounted, a left motor 1151 and the like. The 1150, the right drive mechanism 1160 having the right motor 1161 and the like, the decorative cover 1130 that covers the left motor 1151 and the like from the front so as not to be visible to the player, and the right motor 1161 and the like from the front so as not to be visible to the player. A movable decorative body 1110 that can be moved up and down by a decorative cover 1140 to be covered, a left side drive mechanism 1150, and a right side drive mechanism 1160, and a pair of left and right covered decorative bodies 1120 that are axially supported and movable by the movable decorative body 1110. The pantograph mechanism 1170 and the pantograph mechanism 1170, one end of which is connected to the base member 1180 and the other end of which is connected to the covering decorative body 1120 and operates (contracts in a substantially diamond shape) as the movable decorative body 1110 moves up and down. A member that regulates operation and is attached to a substantially central portion of the base member 1180, and a static decorative body 1196 that is a member decorated on the front surface and is fixedly attached to the base member 1180. Be prepared.

The base member 1180 includes a central plate portion 1182 extending in the left-right direction, a left vertical plate portion 1184 extending downward from the left end portion of the central plate portion 1182, and a right vertical plate portion extending downward from the right end portion of the central plate portion 1182. It has 1186 and.

A static decorative body 1196 is attached to the front surface of the central plate portion 1182 as a decorative body that is decorated on the front surface and does not operate. A horizontally long rectangular central plate 1188 is provided at the upper end of the substantially center of the central plate portion 1182 so as to face upward. The front surface of the central plate 1188 has a pair of left support shafts 11882 and right support shafts 11884 that project forward.

On the front surface of the central plate 1188, a regulation member 1190 that regulates the operation of the pantograph mechanism 1170 beyond a certain level is attached below the left support shaft 11882 and the right support shaft 11884. The regulating member 1190 is a trapezoidal plate member and has a left contact surface 1192 inclined toward the lower left and a right contact surface 1194 inclined toward the lower right.

The left vertical plate portion 1184 is configured so that the left motor mounting member 1152 to which the left motor 1151 is mounted can be mounted. When the left motor mounting member 1152 is attached to the left vertical plate portion 1184, a hole 11842 is formed at a portion corresponding to the output shaft of the left motor 1151. Further, a left driven gear mounting shaft 11844 and a left transmission arm mounting shaft 11884 are formed on the front surface of the left vertical plate portion 1184. A substantially C-shaped hole 11846 is formed around the left driven gear mounting shaft 11844 when viewed from the front. The hole 11846 is formed corresponding to a locus in which the support shaft 11562 formed in the driven gear 1156 moves when the driven gear 1156, which will be described later, rotates.

The right vertical plate portion 1186 is configured so that the right motor mounting member 1162 to which the right motor 1161 is mounted can be mounted. When the right motor mounting member 1162 is attached to the right vertical plate portion 1186, a hole 11862 is formed at a portion corresponding to the output shaft of the right motor 1161. Further, a right driven gear mounting shaft 11864 and a right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 are formed on the front surface of the right vertical plate portion 1186. A substantially C-shaped hole 11866 is formed around the right driven gear mounting shaft 11864 when viewed from the front. This hole 11866 is formed corresponding to the locus in which the support shaft 11662 formed in the driven gear 1166 moves when the driven gear 1166, which will be described later, rotates.

The left drive mechanism 1150 includes a left motor 1151, a left motor mounting member 1152 to which the left motor 1151 is mounted, a drive gear 1157, a driven gear 1156, a left arm member 1155, and a left transmission arm 1154. Of these, the left arm member 1155, the driven gear 1156, and the drive gear 1157 function as the left drive transmission member that transmits the power from the left side motor 1151 to the left transmission arm 1154. The installation area of the left drive transmission member in the vertical direction (operating direction of the movable decorative body 1110) is provided on the left outer side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the front view, and is provided in the vertical direction of the movable decorative body 1110. It is smaller than the operating range. The hollow shaft 11544 formed at one end (right side) of the left transmission drive arm 1154 is pivotally supported by the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11884 in the installation area of the left transmission drive member.

The left side motor 1151 is a motor capable of forward rotation and reverse rotation. The left side motor 1151 is attached to the left side motor mounting member 1152. In the left motor mounting member 1152 to which the left motor 1151 is mounted, the output shaft of the left motor 1151 is coaxial with the drive gear 1157 and penetrates the hole 1184 formed in the left vertical plate portion 1184. Attached to. Therefore, when the left side motor 1151 rotates, the drive gear 1157 rotates coaxially with the output shaft of the left side motor 1151.

The driven gear 1156 meshes with the drive gear 1157. When the drive gear 1157 rotates, the driven gear 1156 rotates in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation. The driven gear 1156 is a gear having a diameter larger than that of the drive gear 1157. As a result, the rotational force of the left motor 1151 transmitted from the drive gear 1157 is amplified. Further, the driven gear 1156 has a bearing 11564 in the center and a support shaft 11562 separated from the center by a predetermined distance on the front surface. The driven gear 1156 is rotatably supported by a bearing 11564 on the left driven gear mounting shaft 11844 so that the driven gear 1156 can rotate around the left driven gear mounting shaft 11844.

The left arm member 1155 is a member having a substantially anti-C shape (substantially C shape when viewed from the rear) when viewed from the front, and has a left arm bearing 11552 at one end (the end on the upper side of the paper) and the other end. The left arm bearing shaft 11554 is provided on the portion (the end on the lower side of the paper surface). The left arm bearing 11552 is rotatably supported by a support shaft 11562 of the driven gear 1156.

The left transmission arm 1154 is a member that transmits the rotational force of the left motor 1151 to the movable decorative body 1110 via the drive gear 1157, the driven gear 1156, and the left arm member 1155. The left transmission arm 1154 has a hollow shaft 11544 protruding forward at one (left) end and an elongated hole 11542 at the other (center) end. A boss 1112 (a boss formed on the rear surface of the movable decorative body 1110), which will be described later, is slidably connected to the elongated hole 11542 to support the movable decorative body 1110. Further, the left transmission arm 1154 has a left arm bearing 11548 that is rotatably supported by the left arm support shaft 11554 of the left arm member 1155. The hollow shaft 11544 rotates on the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 in the installation area of the left drive transmission member so that the left transmission arm 1154 can rotate (circularly move) around the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848. It is possible to support the axis. Further, a coil spring 1153 is extrapolated to the hollow shaft 11544 as an example of an elastic member that urges the left transmission arm 1154 counterclockwise (counterclockwise rotation direction).

The right drive mechanism 1160 includes a right motor 1161, a right motor mounting member 1162 to which the right motor 1161 is mounted, a drive gear 1167, a driven gear 1166, a right arm member 1165, and a right transmission arm 1164. Of these, the right arm member 1165, the driven gear 1166, and the drive gear 1167 function as the right drive transmission member that transmits the power from the right motor 1161 to the right transmission arm 1164. The installation area of the right drive transmission member in the vertical direction (operating direction of the movable decorative body 1110) is provided on the right outer side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the front view, and is provided in the vertical direction of the movable decorative body 1110. It is smaller than the operating range. The hollow shaft 11644 formed at one end (right side) of the right transmission drive arm 1164 is pivotally supported by the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 within the installation area of the right transmission drive member.

The right motor 1161 is a motor capable of forward rotation and reverse rotation. The right motor 1161 is attached to the right motor mounting member 1162. The right motor mounting member 1162 to which the right motor 1161 is mounted is located in the right vertical plate 1186 so that the output shaft of the right motor 1161 is coaxial with the drive gear 1167 and penetrates the hole 1186 formed in the right vertical plate 1186. It is attached. Therefore, when the right motor 1161 rotates, the drive gear 1167 rotates coaxially with the output shaft of the right motor 1161.

The driven gear 1166 meshes with the drive gear 1167. When the drive gear 1167 rotates, the driven gear 1166 rotates in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation. The driven gear 1166 is a gear having a diameter larger than that of the drive gear 1167. As a result, the rotational force of the right motor 1161 transmitted from the drive gear 1167 is amplified. Further, the driven gear 1166 has a bearing 11664 in the center and a support shaft 11662 separated from the center by a predetermined distance on the front surface. The driven gear 1166 is rotatably supported by a bearing 11664 on the right driven gear mounting shaft 11864 so that the driven gear 1166 can rotate around the right driven gear mounting shaft 11864.

The right arm member 1165 is a member having a substantially C-shape in front view (substantially C-shaped when viewed from the rear), has a right arm bearing 11652 at one end (the end on the upper side of the paper), and the other end. The right arm support shaft 11654 is provided on the portion (the end on the lower side of the paper surface). The right arm bearing 11652 is rotatably supported by a support shaft 11662 of the driven gear 1166.

The right transmission arm 1164 is a member that transmits the rotational force of the right motor 1161 to the movable decorative body 1110 via the drive gear 1167, the driven gear 1166, and the right arm member 1165. The right transmission arm 1164 has a hollow shaft 11644 that projects forward at one (right) end and an elongated hole 11642 at the other (center) end. A boss 1114 (a boss formed on the rear surface of the movable decorative body 1110), which will be described later, is slidably connected to the elongated hole 11642 to support the movable decorative body 1110. Further, the right transmission arm 1164 has a right arm bearing 11648 that is rotatably supported by the right arm support shaft 11654 of the right arm member 1165. The hollow shaft 11644 rotates on the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 within the installation area of the right drive transmission member so that the right transmission arm 1164 can rotate (circular motion) around the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868. It is possible to support the axis. Further, a coil spring 1163 is extrapolated to the hollow shaft 11644 as an example of an elastic member that urges the right transmission arm 1164 clockwise (in the clockwise rotation direction).

In this way, the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 support the movable decorative body 1110 from both the left and right sides, and the power from the left motor 1154 and the right motor 1161 is supplied to the left drive transmission member and the right drive transmission member described above. It is transmitted through.

The pantograph mechanism 1170 includes an upper left arm 1172, a lower left arm 1174, an upper right arm 1176, and a lower right arm 1178. The pantograph mechanism 1170 constitutes a substantially diamond-shaped side by four arms, an upper left arm 1172, a lower left arm 1174, an upper right arm 1176, and a lower right arm 1178, and deforms the shape of the substantially diamond (upper left arm 1172). The operation of changing the angle formed by the lower left arm 1174 and the lower left arm 1176 (the angle formed by the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178) is performed. The upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 are made of a colorless and transparent resin. The lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are made of black resin.

As the above-mentioned "substantially diamond shape", of the four arms of the upper left arm 1172, the lower left arm 1174, the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178, for example, two pairs of arms facing each other are parallel (for example, the upper left). The lower right arm 1172 and the lower right arm 1178 are parallel, the lower left arm 1174 and the upper right arm 1176 are parallel), and in addition to the case where the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 have the same length, parallel four sides It is also assumed to be a shape or a square. Also, of the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178, for example, two pairs of arms facing each other have the same length (for example, the upper left arm 1172 and the lower right arm 1178 have the same length, and the lower left arm 1174 and the upper right part have the same length. It does not have to be the same length as the arm 1176), and moreover, for example, one pair of arms facing each other has the same length and the other pair of arms. The length of the may be different. That is, the lengths of the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, and 1178 are not limited to a specific length, and various variations can be adopted. Further, considering that each arm, that is, the accessory (movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120) operates, the arms facing each other do not always have to be parallel, and the accessory (movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120). The arms facing each other may change from a non-parallel state to a parallel state, or may change from a parallel state to a non-parallel state in accordance with the drive of the above. Further, regarding the above-mentioned "opposite arms are parallel", it may be difficult to obtain perfect parallelism in consideration of the structure when the accessory (movable decorative body 1110 and covering decorative body 1120) is driven. Since it is assumed, if the tilting directions of the opposing arms are oriented in the same direction, it is considered to be parallel (substantially parallel). Further, even when each of the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, and 1178 has a different length, the accessory (movable decorative body 1110 and covering decorative body 1120) can be moved (for example, the operating limit position from the origin position). The lengths of the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, and 1178 can be changed in various ways, considering that they can be moved to.

The upper left arm 1172 has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, is in the shape of a horizontally long flat plate along a virtual surface substantially orthogonal to the front-rear direction, has a bearing 11722 at the end on the center side, and has a left end. It has a bearing 11724 in the portion. The bearing 11722 is rotatably supported by the left support shaft 11882.

The lower left arm 1174 has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and is in the shape of a horizontally long flat plate along a virtual surface substantially orthogonal to the front-rear direction. An extension portion 11741 extending upward (upper left arm 1172 side) is formed. The thickness of the extended portion 11741 in the front-rear direction is thinner than the thickness of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction. The extension portion 11741 is formed with a support shaft 11742 extending in the front-rear direction at a position above the upper end 11734 of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174. A hollow shaft 11744 is formed at the central end of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction.

The upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are connected to each other by rotatably supporting the bearing 11724 on the support shaft 11742. The upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are connected to each other at the origin position (the position where both the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are in a horizontal state, for example, the embodiment shown in FIG. 82). Except for the bearings 11724 and the support shafts 11742), they are arranged side by side substantially parallel to each other without overlapping in the front-rear direction. At this time, the longitudinal portions (the portions excluding the bearing 11724 and the support shaft 11742) of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are arranged on substantially the same plane when viewed from the side surface. This makes it possible to reduce the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction. Further, the hollow shaft 11744 penetrates the elongated hole 11104 of the movable decorative body 1110 and is pivotally supported by the guide shaft 11224. The vertical direction at the origin position is the width direction of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174.

The upper right arm 1176 has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, is in the shape of a horizontally long flat plate along a virtual surface substantially orthogonal to the front-rear direction, has a bearing 11762 at the end on the center side, and has a right end. It has a bearing 11764 in the portion. The bearing 11762 is rotatably supported by the right support shaft 11884.

The lower right arm 1178 has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and is in the shape of a horizontally long flat plate along a virtual surface substantially orthogonal to the front-rear direction. An extension portion 11781 extending upward (on the right lower arm 1178 side) is formed. The thickness of the extended portion 11781 in the front-rear direction is thinner than the thickness of the longitudinal portion of the upper right arm 1176 in the front-rear direction. The extension portion 11781 is formed with a support shaft 11782 extending in the front-rear direction at a position above the upper end 11783 of the longitudinal portion of the lower right arm 1178. A hollow shaft 11784 is formed at the central end of the lower right arm 1178 in the front-rear direction.

The upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 are connected to each other by rotatably supporting the bearing 1176 on the support shaft 11782. The upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 are connected to each other (bearing) at the origin position (the position where both the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 are in a horizontal state, for example, the embodiment shown in FIG. 82). Except for 11764 and the support shaft 11782), they are arranged side by side substantially parallel to each other without overlapping in the front-rear direction. At this time, the longitudinal portions (the portions excluding the bearing 1176 and the support shaft 11782) of the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 are arranged on substantially the same plane when viewed from the side surface. This makes it possible to reduce the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction is within the thickness range of the left side motor 1151 and the right side motor 1161. Further, the hollow shaft 11784 is pivotally supported by the guide shaft 11244 through the elongated hole 11108 of the movable decorative body 1110. The vertical direction at the origin position is the width direction of the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178.

In the above description, it has been described that the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are arranged on substantially the same plane when the longitudinal portions of the respective arms 1172 and 1174 are viewed from the side surface. A detailed positional relationship between the 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 in the front-rear direction will be described.

The frontmost position of the left upper arm 1172 in the front-rear direction (thickness direction) of the longitudinal portion is F1, and the rearmost surface position of the longitudinal portion in the front-rear direction is B1 (see FIGS. 86 and 87). Further, in the lower left arm 1174, the frontmost position of the longitudinal portion in the front-rear direction (thickness direction) is F2, and the rearmost surface position in the front-rear direction is B2 (see FIGS. 86 and 87). Here, the frontmost position F1 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 is located behind the frontmost position F2 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174, and the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172. The rearmost surface position B1 in the front-rear direction is located behind the rearmost surface position B2 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174. However, the rearmost surface position B2 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 is rearward of the foremost front position F1 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and the last in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172. It is located in front of the surface position B1 (between the frontmost position F1 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and the rearmost surface position B1 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172). That is, when the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are viewed in a cross section that vertically crosses the longitudinal portion of each arm 1172, 1174, the thick portion of each arm 1172, 1174 is in the vertical direction (the width direction of each arm). ) (The positional relationship is such that the longitudinal portions of the arms 1172 and 1174 are arranged on substantially the same plane when viewed from the side surface).

In the present embodiment, the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 are arranged on substantially the same plane when viewed from the side surface, but more specifically, than the lower left arm 1174. The upper left arm 1172 is configured to be located slightly rearward. However, instead of this, the upper left arm 1172 may be configured to be slightly located on the front side of the lower left arm 1174. That is, in the present embodiment, the foremost front position F1 of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction is located rearward of the foremost front position F2 of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the front-rear direction, and the upper left arm The rearmost surface position B1 of the longitudinal portion of the 1172 in the front-rear direction is located behind the rearmost surface position B2 of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the front-rear direction, and the rearmost surface of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the front-rear direction. Although the position B2 is configured to be located behind the frontmost position F1 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and in front of the rearmost surface position B1 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172. Instead, the frontmost position of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the anteroposterior direction is located posterior to the anterior front position of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the anteroposterior direction, and the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174. The rearmost surface position of the upper left arm 1176 in the front-rear direction is located behind the rearmost surface position of the longitudinal portion of the upper right arm 1176 in the front-rear direction, and the rearmost surface position of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction is the lower left arm 1174. Behind the frontmost position in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 and in front of the rearmost surface position of the longitudinal portion of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 (the rearmost surface position of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction is the lower left arm. It may be configured to be located between the frontmost position of the longitudinal portion of 1174 in the front-rear direction and the rearmost surface of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the front-rear direction.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rearmost surface position B2 of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the front-rear direction is rearward of the frontmost position F1 of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction and the longitudinal length of the upper left arm 1172. Positioned in front of the rearmost surface position B1 in the front-rear direction of the portion (between the foremost front position F1 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and the rearmost surface position B1 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172). is doing. However, instead of this, the total thickness of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (from the position of the frontmost arm to the position of the rearmost arm among the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174). As long as the thickness) can be reduced, the rearmost surface position of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the front-rear direction and the rearmost surface position of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction may be substantially flush with each other. The frontmost position of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the front-rear direction and the frontmost position of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction may be substantially flush with each other. Further, the rearmost surface position of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the front-rear direction and the rearmost surface position of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction are substantially flush with each other, and the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 The frontmost position in the front-rear direction and the frontmost position in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 are substantially flush with each other (that is, the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are substantially on the same plane). You may.

Since the positional relationship between the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 in the front-rear direction is the same as the positional relationship between the lower left arm 1174 and the upper right arm 1176 in the front-rear direction, the description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 (the longitudinal portion of the upper right arm 1176 and the longitudinal portion of the lower right arm 1178) are in the vertical direction (width direction of each arm). The total thickness of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the lower right arm 1178) without reducing the thickness of each arm 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178. The thickness of the longitudinal portion of the upper right arm 1176 from the frontmost position to the rearmost surface position in the front-rear direction) can be reduced, and the area occupied by the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction can be reduced. When a pachinko machine is installed in a pachinko hall, the length in the front-rear direction is restricted. It is possible to arrange objects, and it is possible to perform a dynamic movable effect using a plurality of accessories that overlap in the front-rear direction.

Further, in the contracted state of the pantograph mechanism 1170, the extended portion 11741 is extended upward to a position exceeding the upper end 11734 of the lower left arm 1174, so that the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are at the origin position. It becomes almost horizontal. Similarly, since the extension portion 11781 extends upward to a position exceeding the upper end 11783 of the lower right arm 1178, the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 are in a substantially horizontal state at the origin position. Since the extension portion 11741 (extension portion 11781) is formed, the movable range of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (upper right arm 1176 and lower right arm 1178) can be further increased. Become. Moreover, since each of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176, and 1178 can be made thicker, the strength of each of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176, and 1178 can be increased and the arms can be stabilized during operation. Furthermore, by making it possible to increase the strength of each arm 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178, it is possible to increase the size of the movable accessory that operates with the operation of each of these arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178. This makes it possible to perform more dynamic movable effects.

In this way, by setting the positional relationship between the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (the positional relationship between the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178) as described above, a plurality of accessories overlapping in the front-rear direction can be obtained. It is possible to execute the dynamic movable effect used and the dynamic movable effect by increasing the size of the movable accessory, and it is possible to further enhance the game entertainment by the movable effect.

The movable decorative body 1110 is decorated on the front surface, and openings 1101, 1105 are formed at positions substantially symmetrical to the left and right. Lenses 1103 and 1107 are fitted in these openings 1101 and 1105, respectively. The movable decorative body 1110 can slide up and down together with the covering decorative body 1120 by the left side drive mechanism 1150 and the right side drive mechanism 1160. The movable decorative body 1110 has a hole 11102, an elongated hole 11104, a hole 11106 and an elongated hole 11108, and a boss 1112 and a boss 1114. The holes 11102 and 11106 are holes provided at positions that are substantially symmetrical with each other. The elongated hole 11104 and the hole 11106 are provided at positions that are substantially symmetrical with each other, and are vertically elongated elongated holes. The boss 1112 and the boss 1114 are provided at positions that are substantially symmetrical with each other on the back surface side of the movable decorative body 1110. Further, the movable decorative body 1110 has an LED substrate 1116 in which a large number of LEDs are arranged behind the lenses 1103 and 1107, and is configured to be capable of emitting light according to the progress of the game. When the LED arranged on the LED substrate 1116 emits light, the LED is emitted and displayed through the lenses 1103 and 1107.

The covering decoration body 1120 has a covering decoration body 1122 arranged on the left side of the movable decoration body 1110 and a covering decoration body 1124 arranged on the right side of the movable decoration body 1110. The covering decoration 1122 has a support shaft 11222 and a guide shaft 11224. The covering decoration body 1124 has a support shaft 11242 and a guide shaft 11244.

In the covering decoration body 1122, the support shaft 11222 is rotatably supported by the hole 11102 of the movable decoration body 1112, and the guide shaft 11224 is slidably inserted into the elongated hole 11104 of the movable decoration body 1112. Further, the covering decoration 1122 is connected to the pantograph mechanism 1170 (specifically, it is rotatably supported by a bearing 11744 at the central end of the lower left arm 1174). As a result, the covering decorative body 1122 covers the front surface (lens 1103) of the movable decorative body 1110 and is movably arranged with respect to the movable decorative body 1110 with the support shaft 11222 as the center of rotation.

In the covering decoration body 1124, the support shaft 11242 is rotatably supported by the hole 11106 of the movable decoration body 1110, and the guide shaft 11244 is slidably inserted into the elongated hole 11108 of the movable decoration body 1110. Further, the covering decoration body 1124 is connected to the pantograph mechanism 1170 (specifically, it is rotatably supported by a bearing 11784 at the central end of the lower right arm 1178). As a result, the covering decorative body 1124 covers the front surface (lens 1107) of the movable decorative body 1110 and is movably arranged with respect to the movable decorative body 1110 with the support shaft 11242 as the center of rotation.

The covering decoration body 1122 and the covering decoration body 1124 are arranged so as to be substantially symmetrical with each other.

[Explanation of operation of upper back accessory 1100]
Next, the operation of the upper back accessory 1100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 92. FIG. 88 is a view showing an example of the upper back accessory 1100 before the start of operation, that is, in the normal mode (a mode when it is in the origin position), where (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an example of the mode after the upper back accessory 1100 starts operating and before the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 reach the limit position. Is a front view and (B) is a rear view. 90A and 90B are views showing an example of the mode when the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 reach the limit position, where FIG. 90A is a front view and FIG. 90B is a rear view. .. In FIG. 91, after the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 are operated to the operating limit positions, the left motor 1151 and the right motor 1161 are further rotated, and the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are movable decorations. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode when the body 1110 operates toward the lower side of a paper (when the covering decorative body 1120 starts operating with respect to a movable decorative body 1110), (A) is a front view, (B). ) Is the rear view. 92 is a view showing an example of a mode in which the covering decorative body 1120 is moved to the operating limit with respect to the movable decorative body 1110, in which (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view.

As shown in FIG. 88, when the upper back accessory 1100 is in the origin position, the pantograph mechanism 1170 is in a closed state (the longitudinal portions of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176, and 1178 are all in a substantially horizontal state). be. Here, regarding the members (lower left arm 1174 and lower right arm 1178) that can be hidden by the movable decorative body 1110 when the movable decorative body 1110 is operated downward on the paper surface, the back surface of the movable decorative body 1110 is used. The members (upper left arm 1172 and upper right arm 1176) that are difficult to hide with the movable decorative body 1110 are made of colorless and transparent members so as to be positioned on the side and hidden as much as possible. As a result, there is little possibility that the images displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 are obstructed by the arms 1172, 1174, 1176, and 1178, and it is difficult for the player to notice them.

Then, as the movable decorative body 1110 operates downward on the paper surface, the longitudinal portions of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176 change their postures in the vertical direction, and the upper arms 1172, 1176 and the lower arms 1174, 1178 The angle formed by is increasing. When the movable decorative body 1110 is operated downward on the paper surface, the longitudinal portions of the left lower arm 1174 and the right lower arm 1178 are directed in the vertical direction, but until the movable decorative body 1110 exceeds a certain operating range. The lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 remain located on the back side of the movable ornament 1110.

When the left motor 1151 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the drive gear 1157 also rotates counterclockwise. When the drive gear 1157 rotates counterclockwise, the driven gear 1156 rotates clockwise. The support shaft 11562 is located above the paper surface when it is in the origin position (when the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 are in the origin position), and when the driven gear 1156 rotates clockwise, the bearing 11564 (left). It orbits clockwise around the driven gear mounting shaft 11844). When the support shaft 11562 orbits clockwise around the bearing 11564 (left driven gear mounting shaft 11844), the left arm member 1155 is pushed down toward the lower left. When the left arm member 1155 is pushed down toward the lower left, a clockwise pressing force centered on the hollow shaft 11544 (left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848) acts on the left transmission arm 1154. When a clockwise pressing force centered on the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 acts on the left transmission arm 1154, the left transmission arm 1154 rotates clockwise with the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 as a fulcrum. When the left transmission arm 1154 rotates clockwise, the boss 1112 slidably connected to the slot 11542 moves in the slot 11542 while moving the movable ornament 1110 downward.

When the right motor 1161 rotates clockwise in front view, the drive gear 1167 also rotates clockwise. When the drive gear 1167 rotates clockwise, the driven gear 1166 rotates counterclockwise. The support shaft 11662 is located above the paper surface when it is in the origin position (when the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 are in the origin position), and when the driven gear 1166 rotates counterclockwise, the bearing 11664 ( It orbits counterclockwise around the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868). When the support shaft 11662 orbits counterclockwise around the bearing 11664 (right driven gear mounting shaft 11864), the right arm member 1165 is pushed down toward the lower right. When the right arm member 1165 is pushed down toward the lower right, a counterclockwise pressing force centered on the hollow shaft 11644 (right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868) acts on the right transmission arm 1164. When a counterclockwise pressing force centered on the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 acts on the right transmission arm 1164, the right transmission arm 1164 rotates counterclockwise with the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 as a fulcrum. .. When the right transmission arm 1164 rotates counterclockwise, the boss 1114 slidably connected to the slot 11642 moves in the slot 11642 while moving the movable ornament 1110 downward.

When the movable decoration 1110 moves downward, the covering decorative bodies 1122 and 1124 also move downward along with the movement of the movable decorative body 1110. This is because the guide shafts 11224 and 11244 of the covering decorative bodies 1122 and 1124 are slidably inserted into the elongated holes 11104 and 11108 of the movable decorative body 1110, so that gravity is obtained when the movable decorative body 1110 moves downward. This is because the covering ornaments 1122 and 1124 also move downward by the action.

When the left side motor 1151 rotates counterclockwise in front view and the right side motor 1161 rotates clockwise in front view in synchronization with this, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 maintain a substantially horizontal state on the paper surface. It works downward.

When the left motor 1151 rotates counterclockwise in front view and the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 move toward the lower side of the paper surface, the lower center side hollow shaft 1744 connected to the covering decorative body 1122 moves below the paper surface. Pushed down towards. As a result, the lower left arm 1174 rotates clockwise with the support shaft 11742 as the fulcrum, and the upper left arm 1172 rotates counterclockwise with the bearing 11722 (center left support shaft 1182) as the fulcrum. When the right motor 1161 rotates clockwise in front view and the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 move toward the lower side of the paper surface, the hollow shaft 11784 connected to the covering decorative body 1124 pushes down toward the lower side of the paper surface. Be done. As a result, the lower right arm 1178 rotates counterclockwise with the support shaft 11782 as the fulcrum, and the upper right arm 1176 rotates clockwise with the bearing 11762 (center right support shaft 11884) as the fulcrum. In this way, the pantograph mechanism 1170 operates.

By the way, when the upper left arm 1172 rotates counterclockwise with the bearing 11722 (center left support shaft 1182) as a fulcrum, it eventually comes into contact with the left contact surface 1192 of the regulating member 1190. Further, when the upper right arm 1176 is rotated clockwise with the bearing 11762 (center right support shaft 11884) as a fulcrum, the upper right arm 1176 eventually comes into contact with the right contact surface 1194 of the regulation member 1190. The position of the upper left arm 1172 when it comes into contact with the left contact surface 1192 is the operating limit position toward the lower side of the paper surface, and the position of the upper right arm 1176 when it comes into contact with the right contact surface 1194 is the position of the paper surface. It is the operating limit position facing downward.

When the left upper arm 1172 moves to the operating limit position and then the left motor 1151 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the movable decorative body 1110 moves further downward on the paper surface, and the hollow shaft 11744 has the elongated hole 11104. Move from the lower end position to the upper end position. Along with this, the covering decoration 1122 rotates clockwise with the support shaft 11222 as a fulcrum. Further, when the upper right arm 1176 moves to the operating limit position and then the right motor 1161 rotates clockwise in front view, the movable decorative body 1110 moves further downward on the paper surface, and the hollow shaft 11784 has a long hole 11108. Move from the lower end position to the upper end position. Along with this, the covering decoration body 1124 rotates counterclockwise with the support shaft 11242 as a fulcrum. In this way, the covering decoration body 1122 and the covering decoration body 1124 operate together with the movable decoration body 1110 toward the lower side of the paper surface from the origin position, and the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right part arm 1176 operate toward the lower side of the paper surface. When the movable decorative body 1110 operates to the limit position and further moves toward the lower side of the paper surface, the covering decorative body 1120 operates relative to the movable decorative body 1110. When the covering decorative body 1120 operates relative to the movable decorative body 1110, the lenses 1103 and 1107 fitted in the openings 1101 and 1105 are exposed and can be visually recognized by the player. The amount of exposure of the lenses 1103 and 1107 increases as the relative working range of the covering decorative body 1120 with respect to the movable decorative body 1110 increases.

In this way, the upper back accessory 1100 can move in the vertical direction between the origin position (see FIG. 88) and the descending end position (see FIG. 90). Specifically, the movable decorative body 1110 is movable between the origin position and the descending end position, and the covering decorative body 1120 is between the origin position and the operating limit positions of the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176. Can be moved. The operating limit position is such that after the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 have moved to the descending end position, the covering decorative body 1120 reaches the limit with respect to the movable decorative body 1110 in a state where the movable decorative body 1110 is in the descending end position. It is the activated position. That is, the vertical position of the movable decorative body 1110 is the same at the descending end position and the operating limit position. When the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 are at the origin position, they stand by at a position that does not interfere with the visibility of the image displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. On the other hand, when the upper back accessory 1100 (specifically, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120) is in the descending end position, the liquid crystal display device 16 includes the case where the covering decorative body 1120 is in the operating limit position. Located in front of the display area. That is, when the upper back accessory 1100 at the origin position moves toward the descending end position, the upper back accessory 1100 (movable decorative body 1110 and covering decorative body 1120) moves from the origin position to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Will advance forward. The advance of the upper back accessory 1100 from the origin position toward the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is the progress of the game (for example, the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 762 or the second starting port 752. ) Is executed according to the result of the hit judgment).

When the upper back accessory 1100 advances toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the upper right arm 1176 and the upper left arm 1172 are exposed at positions visible to the player, but the upper right arm 1176 and the upper right arm 1176 and the upper left arm 1172 are exposed. Since the upper left arm 1172 is made of a transparent resin, it does not interfere with the visibility of the effect image displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Moreover, since the upper back accessory 1100 (specifically, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120) moves up and down by the pantograph mechanism, the fulcrum between the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178, and the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left The fulcrums with the portion arm 1174 are all on the side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and not only do not hinder the player's visibility (the player tends to gaze at the central portion), but also the left drive mechanism. The 1150 and the right side drive mechanism 1160 can be compactly provided in a range smaller than the vertical movable range of the upper back accessory 1100. The lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are made of black resin, but even if the upper back accessory 1100 advances toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1174 and the lower right arm Since the arm 1178 moves so as to be hidden behind the movable decorative body 1110, it is difficult for the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 to come into the player's view. Further, by reducing the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction, the upper back accessory 1100 can be thinned as a whole (in the present embodiment, the thickness is about the width of the left side motor 1151 and the right side motor 1161). ing).

Further, at the beginning of the operation of the movable decorative body 1110, both the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 start operating from the origin position, and the covering decorative body 1120 (covering decorative body 1120) with respect to the movable decorative body 1110 from the middle. 1122 and the covering ornament 1124) will be relatively operational. That is, since the covering decoration body 1120 is not operating with respect to the movable decoration body 1110 at the beginning of the operation of the movable decoration body 1110, the covering decoration body 1120 is operated from the beginning of the operation of the movable decoration body 1110. It is difficult to predict the final shape, and the movable decorative body 1110 will operate beyond the player's expectation from the middle, and it will be possible to enhance the interest.

In the present embodiment, the covering decoration body 1120 (covering decoration body 1122 and covering decoration body 1124) is not operating with respect to the movable decoration body 1110 at the beginning of the operation of the movable decoration body 1110, and is movable from the middle. The covering decorative body 1120 is configured to start operating relative to the decorative body 1110, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the covering decorative body 1120 operates regardless of the position of the movable decorative body 1110. It may be.

By the way, after the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 come into contact with the left contact surface 1192 and the right contact surface 1194 (after reaching the operating limit position), the left motor 1151 and the right motor 1161 further rotate. Even if this is done, the postures of the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 (the directions in which the longitudinal portions of the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 each face) do not change. On the other hand, with respect to the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178, the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1176 have come into contact with the left contact surface 1192 and the right contact surface 1194, respectively. The longitudinal portions of each of the arms 1178 change their posture in the vertical direction. If the longitudinal portions of the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 change their postures in the vertical direction, the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 will eventually be exposed from the back side of the movable decorative body 1110. ..

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the cover decorative body 1120 (covered decorative body 1122) is used with respect to the movable decorative body 1110 before the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are exposed from the back side of the movable decorative body 1110. And the covering decoration body 1124) is made to operate relatively. That is, when the movable decorative body 1110 operates downward on the paper surface, the longitudinal portions of the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 change their postures in the vertical direction, so that the lower left arm 1174 from the back side of the movable decorative body 1110. And the lower right arm 1178 will appear in a position that can be visually recognized from the front, and at that timing, the covering decorative body 1120 is operated relatively upward with respect to the movable decorative body 1110, and the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm are operated. The arm 1178 is located on the back side of the covering decoration body 1120. When the covering decoration body 1120 operates relative to the movable decoration body 1110, the accessory area (the area where the movable decoration body 1110 and the covering decoration body 1120 are combined) that can be visually recognized from the front becomes large. By doing so, even if the longitudinal portions of the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 change their postures in the vertical direction, the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 can be moved in a natural shape without any discomfort for the player. It prevents it from being exposed.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, after the upper back accessory 1100 at the origin position starts operating toward the descending end position, the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 are respectively left contact surfaces. When it comes into contact with the 1192 and the right contact surface 1194, the movable decorative body 1110 continues to operate toward the descending end position, and the coated decorative body 1120 (covered decorative body 1122 and the coated decorative body 1122 and the coated decorative body 1122) with respect to the movable decorative body 1110. The body 1124) operates upward. Here, the operation of the covering decoration body 1122 with respect to the movable decoration body 1100 is performed by one operation control such as simply rotating the left side motor 1151 counterclockwise in a front view. Similarly, the operation of the covering decoration body 1124 with respect to the movable decoration body 1100 is performed by one operation control such as simply rotating the right side motor 1161 clockwise in a front view. That is, for both the covering decoration body 1122 and the covering decoration body 1124, the corresponding motors (the left side motor 1151 for the covering decoration body 1122 and the right side motor 1161 for the covering decoration body 1124) are simply rotated in a specific direction. With one simple motion control, it is possible to operate the movable decorative body 1100 independently of the operation of the movable decorative body 1100 while continuing the operation of the movable decorative body 1100. Moreover, since each of the covering decoration body 1122 and the covering decoration body 1124 only rotates one motor, the movable decoration body 1100 can be operated while continuing the operation of the movable decoration body 1100 with a simple configuration and space saving. It is possible to operate independently of the operation of. In particular, in recent years, it has become mainstream to increase the size of movable accessories and arrange a plurality of movable accessories, so the contribution to space saving is a great effect.

By the way, conventionally, when the accessory is operated substantially linearly in the vertical direction, drive mechanisms are provided on both sides of the accessory, and the drive mechanism is used to perform linear motion in the vertical direction. When the drive mechanisms are provided on both sides of the accessory, it is necessary to provide the drive mechanism at least over the operating range of the accessory in the vertical direction, and the installation of the drive mechanism requires a large area. Space can be saved if the accessory can be operated by the circular motion, but in this case, the accessory is also operated by the circular motion. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the left transmission arm 1154 rotates clockwise with the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 as a fulcrum, and the boss 1112 slidably connected to the elongated hole 11542 moves in the elongated hole 11542. While moving the movable decorative body 1110 downward. Further, in synchronization with this, the right transmission arm 1164 rotates counterclockwise with the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 as a fulcrum, and the boss 1114 slidably connected to the elongated hole 11642 moves in the elongated hole 11642. While moving the movable decorative body 1110 downward. That is, according to the present embodiment, each of the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 is made to perform an arc motion with one end as a fulcrum, while the posture of the movable decorative body 1110 is held substantially horizontally. The movable decorative body 1110 can be moved substantially linearly in the vertical direction over an operating range larger than the installation area of the drive mechanism. Moreover, since the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 perform an arc motion, the installation area of the drive mechanism (left drive mechanism 1150, right drive mechanism 1160) for driving the movable decorative body 1110 in the vertical direction is set to the movable decorative body 1110. It can be made smaller than the operating range of, which can greatly contribute to space saving.

Further, in the present embodiment, the front surface of the movable decorative body 1110, the covering decorative body 1120, the decorative cover 1130, the decorative cover 1140, the left transmission arm 1154, the right transmission arm 1164, and the static decorative body 1196 is decorated with the same system. Is given. The same type of decoration means, for example, a decoration that evokes the same idea, and if a decoration that can be recognized as having the same color, pattern, or shape in appearance is given, the same idea can be recalled. In the present embodiment, the front surfaces of the above members 1110, 1120, 1130, 1140, 1154, 1164, 1196 have the same color and the same accessory (upper back accessory 1100). It is decorated so that it can be recognized as being there. Moreover, since the upper back accessory 1100 has a character shape related to the concept of the gaming machine, the same members 1110, 1120, 1130, 1140, 1154, 1164, 1196 are decorated in the same system on the front surface. A character shape is formed.

In conventional gaming machines such as pachinko machines, in particular, a support member that supports a movable member (corresponding to the movable decorative body 1110 of the present embodiment) and a drive member that drives the movable member (left transmission of the present embodiment). (Equivalent to the arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164), there was a possibility that the movable accessory could be visually recognized when it advanced to the front side of the liquid crystal display device. In this respect, in the present embodiment, unlike such a conventional gaming machine, the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are intentionally made visible in the front view, and then other members (movable decorative body 1110). , The covering decoration body 1120, the decoration cover 1130, 1140, and the static decoration body 1196) are made to be recognized by the player as a member constituting the same accessory (upper back accessory 1100). Moreover, the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are assimilated with the other members regardless of the position between the origin position and the operation limit position due to the operation of the movable decorative body 1110 (for example). , (A) of each of FIGS. 88 to 92). More specifically, the left transmission arm 1154 is decorated to have continuity between the movable decorative body 1110 and the decorative cover 1130, and the right transmission arm 1164 is provided with the movable decorative body 1110 and the decorative cover. It is decorated to have continuity with 1140. Moreover, the left transmission arm 1154, the right transmission arm 1164, and the front surfaces of the other members are decorated in the same system to form one character shape. In this way, the transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are connected to the movable decorative body 1110 to support the movable decorative body 1110 while making the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 visible in front view. It is difficult for the player to grasp that the member is a member. Furthermore, while the movable decorative body 1110 is shaped like an eye, the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are shaped so that the outer corners of the eyes are imaged from the left and right ends of the movable decorative body 1110. .. Therefore, it is more difficult for the player to understand that the transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are members for driving the movable decorative body 1110.

[Structure of lower accessory 1200]
The configuration of the lower accessory 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 98. FIG. 93 is an example of a front view of the lower accessory 1200 in a normal mode (a mode when it is in the origin position). FIG. 94 is an example of a rear view of the lower accessory 1200 in the normal aspect. FIG. 95 is an example of a perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 96 is an example of a rear perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 as viewed from diagonally above left. FIG. 97 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 98 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 viewed from diagonally above the rear left (left in front view).

The lower accessory 1200 includes a lower accessory fixing base 1220 to which various members constituting the lower accessory 1200 are attached, and a lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 configured to be operable with respect to the lower accessory fixing base 1220. The left guide 1260 member and the right guide 1270 member that guide the vertical movement of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 on both the left and right sides, and the auxiliary that exerts an upward urging force on the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 that moves up and down. The power of the lower accessory drive motor 1230 as a drive source for operating the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 with respect to the arm 1280 and the lower accessory fixed base 1220, and the lower accessory drive motor 1230 is moved by the lower accessory. It includes a gear 1240 that transmits to the decorative body 1210 and a transparent resin rear cover 1250 that is located behind the gear 1240. Although the rear cover 1250 is made of transparent resin, various members such as the gear 1240 are not shown in FIGS. 94 and 96 so that the shape of the rear cover 1250 can be easily grasped. The lower accessory fixing base 1220 and the lower accessory drive motor 1230 function as an operating mechanism for moving the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 up and down.

The lower accessory fixing base 1220 is a horizontally long rectangular plate-shaped member. The lower accessory fixing base 1220 is attached and fixed to the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 described above. A lower accessory drive motor 1230 is attached to substantially the center of the lower portion on the front side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220. On the left side of the front surface of the lower accessory fixing base 1220, a support shaft 12202 that pivotally supports the auxiliary arm 1280 is formed so as to face forward. A pair of left and right support shafts 12203 and 12205 are formed on the back side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 toward the rear. The lower accessory fixing base 1220 has a pair of semicircular holes 12204, 12206 that are substantially symmetrical with respect to the lower accessory drive motor 1230 and bulge outward above the lower accessory drive motor 1230. It is formed. The hole 12204 is formed so as to draw an arc centered on the support shaft 12203. The hole 12206 is formed so as to draw an arc centered on the support shaft 12205. A photo sensor 12208 for detecting the position of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is arranged on the front side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 and on the right side of the lower accessory drive motor 1230. In the present embodiment, the photo sensor 12208 detects whether or not the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is at the origin position.

The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is a decorative member that is long in the lateral direction. It is attached to the front side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 so as to be able to operate in the vertical direction with respect to the lower accessory fixing base 1220. The lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 includes a lower accessory movable base 12102 made of transparent resin that can be operated in the vertical direction with respect to the lower accessory fixing base 1220, and a lower accessory fixing base 1220 that is decorated on the front surface. A lower accessory decorative cover 12104 that moves up and down together with a lower accessory movable base 12102 is provided. The lower accessory decorative cover 12104 is configured to allow light from the rear to pass forward.

A pair of elongated holes 12106 and 12108 are formed on both the left and right sides of the lower accessory movable base 12102. The elongated holes 12106 and 12108 are elongated holes that are long in the lateral direction. A boss 12110 that engages with the auxiliary arm 1280 is formed on the lower accessory movable base 12102 so as to face forward on the right side of the elongated hole 12106.

Further, the lower accessory movable base 12102 is mounted on the front side with an LED substrate on which an LED (not shown) as a light emitting source is arranged. When the LED arranged on the LED substrate emits light, it emits light forward through the lower accessory decorative cover 12104. As a result, for example, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect according to the vertical movement of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210.

The left guide member 1260 is a vertically long plate-shaped member, and is attached to the left side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 in the attachment portions 12604 and 12606. The left guide member 1260 is attached to the left side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 so as to sandwich the lower accessory movable base 12102 with the lower accessory fixing base 1220. Then, the groove formed between the left guide member 1260 and the lower accessory fixing base 1220 functions as a guide groove when the lower accessory movable base 12102 moves up and down with respect to the lower accessory fixing base 1220. ..

The right guide member 1270 is a vertically long plate-shaped member, and is attached to the right side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 in the attachment portions 12704 and 12706. The right guide member 1270 is attached to the right side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 so as to sandwich the lower accessory movable base 12102 with the lower accessory fixing base 1220. Then, the groove formed between the right guide member 1270 and the lower accessory fixing base 1220 functions as a guide groove when the lower accessory movable base 12102 moves up and down with respect to the lower accessory fixing base 1220. ..

The auxiliary arm 1280 is a rod-shaped member provided on the front left side of the lower accessory decorative cover 12104. The auxiliary arm 1280 has a bearing 12804 at the left end end that is pivotally supported by a support shaft 12202 of the lower accessory fixing base 1220. The auxiliary arm 1280 has an elongated hole 12802 formed at the right end thereof to engage with the boss 12110 formed on the lower accessory movable base 12102.

An auxiliary coil spring 1290 is provided as an example of an elastic member between the support shaft 12202 formed on the lower accessory fixing base 1220 and the bearing 12804 formed on the auxiliary arm 1280. The auxiliary coil spring 1290 urges the auxiliary arm 1280 counterclockwise (counterclockwise) with the bearing 12804 (support shaft 12202) as the center of rotation. The urging force of the auxiliary coil spring 1290 in the counterclockwise direction assists the movement of the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 with respect to the lower accessory fixing base 1220.

The lower accessory drive motor 1230 is a stepping motor, and its rotation is controlled by a pulse signal from the accessory control circuit 207.

The gear 1240 is provided behind the lower accessory fixing base 1220. The gear 1240 includes a drive gear 12402 provided coaxially with the lower accessory drive motor 1230, a left driven gear 12404, and a right driven gear 12406.

The left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 have the same diameter, and left and right so that the height direction position of the rotation center of the left driven gear 12404 and the height direction position of the rotation center of the right driven gear 12406 are the same. They are arranged side by side. Further, the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 rotate in the opposite directions in synchronization with each other.

The left driven gear 12404 has a bearing 12404a in the center. The bearing 12404a rotatably supports the support shaft 12203. The teeth of the left driven gear 12404 mesh with the teeth of the drive gear 12402. The right driven gear 12406 has a bearing 12406a in the center. The bearing 12406a rotatably supports the support shaft 12205. The teeth of the right driven gear 12406 mesh with the teeth of the left driven gear 12404 and do not mesh with the teeth of the drive gear 12402. That is, the rotational force of the lower accessory drive motor 1230 is transmitted to the left driven gear 12404 through the drive gear 12402, and the rotational force transmitted to the left driven gear 12404 is further transmitted to the right driven gear 12406. In this way, the rotations of the drive gear 12402 and the right driven gear 12406 rotate in synchronization.

The left driven gear 12404 has a boss 12405 formed on the front surface at a portion radially separated from the center of the left driven gear 12404 by a predetermined distance. Similarly, with respect to the right driven gear 12406, a boss 12407 is formed on the front surface at a portion radially separated from the center of the right driven gear 12406 by a predetermined distance. The distance from the center of the left driven gear 12404 to the boss 12405 is the same as the distance from the center of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407.

In addition, "the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 have the same diameter", "the center height direction position of the left driven gear 12404 is the same as the center height direction position of the right driven gear 12406", and "the left driven gear 12406". The distance from the center of the gear 12404 to the boss 12405 and the distance from the center of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407 are the same. " When transmitting the power of the lower accessory drive motor 1230 to the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210, the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 is stabilized (balanced in the left-right direction) while maintaining the same posture in appearance. It suffices as long as it is within a range in which a colleague can be transmitted substantially evenly to the left and right of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 so that it can move up and down.

The boss 12405 penetrates the hole 12204 formed in the lower accessory fixing base 1220 and is slidably connected to the elongated hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. Here, the hole 12204 is formed corresponding to a locus in which the boss 12405 orbits around the support shaft 12203 when the left driven gear 12404 rotates clockwise.

The boss 12407 penetrates the hole 12206 formed in the lower accessory fixing base 1220 and is slidably connected to the elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. Here, the hole 12206 is formed corresponding to a locus in which the boss 12407 orbits around the support shaft 12205 when the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise.

In the normal state, the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 are respectively located at the lowermost lowermost positions (positions shown in FIG. 99).

The holes 12204 and 12206 also have a function of defining the movement ranges of the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 (that is, the rotation ranges of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406), respectively.

When the uppermost position of the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 when the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 are rotated is set to the uppermost position, the holes 12204 and 12206 are both at least the lowermost position and the uppermost position. The bosses 12405 and 12407 need to be formed so that they can move between them. In the present embodiment, the hole 12404 is formed from the lowermost position (see FIG. 99) to a position that exceeds the uppermost position clockwise. Further, the hole 12206 is formed from the lowermost position (see FIG. 99) to a position exceeding the uppermost position counterclockwise.

Here, of the two positions where the vertical direction line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 and the hole 12204 intersect, the upper side is the uppermost position of the boss 12405, and the lower part is the lowermost position of the boss 12405. Of the two positions where the vertical direction line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406 and the hole 12206 intersect, the upper position is the uppermost position of the boss 12407, and the lower position is the lowermost position of the boss 12407 (in any case). Also see FIG. 101). However, in FIG. 101, both the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 have moved to a position slightly exceeding the uppermost position.

The "position slightly beyond the uppermost position" of the boss 12405 is the right side of the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (right side of FIG. 101 (A), FIG. 101). (Left side of (B)), which is a position where the substantially uppermost position can be maintained. The "position beyond the uppermost position" of the boss 12407 is the left side of the front view (left side of FIG. 101 (A), FIG. 101 (B)) of the vertical direction line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406. ) To the right). However, it is preferable that the degree of the "exceeding position" is so small that it is difficult to recognize that the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 has been lowered when the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 has moved upward. This is because if the bosses 12405 and 12407 greatly exceed the uppermost end position, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is lowered to a position lower than the uppermost end position.

[Explanation of operation of lower accessory 1200]
Next, the operation of the lower accessory 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. FIG. 99 is a view showing an example of the lower accessory 1200 before the start of operation, that is, in the normal mode (a mode when it is in the origin position), where (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. 100A and 100B are views showing an example of a lower accessory 1200 when operated to an intermediate position, where FIG. 100A is a front view and FIG. 100B is a rear view. FIG. 101 is a view showing an example of the lower accessory 1200 when it is operated to the operating limit, (A) is a front view, and (B) is a rear view. In addition, in FIG. 101, these are illustrated so that the mode of the boss 12407 and the elongated hole 12108 can be grasped.

The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is movable in the vertical direction between the origin position (see FIG. 99) and the operating limit position (see FIG. 101). When the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is at the origin position, it is hidden behind the center unit 74, which makes it difficult for the player to see it. On the other hand, when the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is in the operating limit position, it is located in front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. That is, when the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 at the origin position moves toward the operation limit position, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 faces forward from the rear of the center unit 74 toward the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Will advance. The advance of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 from the rear of the center unit 74 toward the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is the progress of the game (for example, the game to the first start port 762 or the second start port 752). It is executed according to the result of the hit judgment executed on the condition that the ball wins (passes).

When the lower accessory drive motor 1230 rotates counterclockwise, the left driven gear 12404 rotates clockwise and the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise. When the left driven gear 12404 rotates clockwise, the boss 12405, which is located at the lowest position in the normal state, rotates clockwise while drawing an arc whose radius is the linear distance RL from the center 12404a of the left driven gear 12404 to the boss 12405. Rotate and move to. When the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise, the boss 12407, which is located at the lowest position in the normal state, reverses while drawing an arc whose radius is the linear distance RR from the center 12406a of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407. Rotate and move clockwise. That is, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 rises toward the operating limit position.

While the lower accessory movable ornament 1210 operates from the origin position (see FIG. 99) to the intermediate position (see FIG. 100), the boss 12405 moves leftward (see FIG. 100) in the elongated hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. While moving to the right in FIGS. 99 (B) and 100 (B), the lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed upward. The boss 12407 moves the lower accessory movable base 12102 upward while moving in the elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102 to the right (to the left in FIGS. 99 (B) and 100 (B)). Push up. At this time, the holes 12204 and 12206 function as guide grooves for guiding the operation of the boss 12405 and the boss 12407, respectively, and as described above, the operating ranges of the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 (left driven gear 12404 and right driven gear). It also has a function to specify the rotation range of 12406).

Further, while the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 operates from the intermediate position (see FIG. 100) to the operation limit position (see FIG. 101), the boss 12405 passes through the elongated hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. While moving to the right (to the left in FIGS. 100 (B) and 101 (B)), the lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed upward, and the boss 12407 is an elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. The lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed upward while moving in the left direction (right direction in FIGS. 100 (B) and 101 (B)). Since the auxiliary coil spring 1290 applies a counterclockwise urging force with the bearing 12804 as a fulcrum to the auxiliary arm 1280, the auxiliary coil spring 1290 exerts a force to push up the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 upward. Supported.

When the lower accessory drive motor 1230 rotates clockwise, the left driven gear 12404 rotates counterclockwise and the right driven gear 12406 rotates clockwise. When the left driven gear 12404 rotates counterclockwise, the boss 12405 rotates counterclockwise while drawing an arc having a linear distance RL from the center 12404a of the left driven gear 12404 to the boss 12405 as a radius. When the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise, the boss 12407 rotates clockwise while drawing an arc having a linear distance RR from the center 12406a of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407 as a radius. That is, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 descends toward the origin position.

While the lower accessory movable ornament 1210 operates from the operating limit position (see FIG. 101) to the intermediate position (see FIG. 100), the boss 12405 moves leftward in the elongated hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. The lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed downward while moving (to the right in FIGS. 100 (B) and 101 (B)), and the boss 12407 passes through the elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. While moving to the right (to the left in FIGS. 100 (B) and 101 (B)), the lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed down. Further, while the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 operates from the intermediate position (see FIG. 100) to the origin position (see FIG. 99), the boss 12405 is right in the elongated hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. While moving in the direction (to the left in FIGS. 99 (B) and 100 (B)), the lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed downward, and the boss 12407 is inside the elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. Pushes the lower accessory movable base 12102 downward while moving to the left (to the right in FIGS. 99 (B) and 100 (B)).

As described above, the height position of the rotation center of the left driven gear 12404 and the height direction position of the rotation center of the right driven gear 12406 are the same, and the diameter of the left driven gear 12404 and the diameter of the right driven gear 12406 are the same. The diameter is the same. Further, the linear distance RL from the center 12404a of the left driven gear 12404 to the boss 12405 and the linear distance RR from the center 12406a of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407 are the same distance (length). Therefore, when the lower accessory drive motor 1230 rotates, the height direction position of the boss 12405 and the height direction position of the right driven gear 12406 are the same. Here, since the LED substrate is mounted on the lower accessory movable base 12102, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 to be lifted has a considerable weight. Moreover, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is an accessory that is long in the left-right direction. When raising such an accessory, there is a possibility that power is transmitted biased to either the left or right side. However, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, even if the object to be lifted is a little heavy or a long accessory in the left-right direction, only the rotational force (power) of one lower accessory drive motor 1230 is sufficient. The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is stable (balanced in the left-right direction) while maintaining the posture when it is in the origin position (see FIG. 99) without the power being transmitted unevenly to either the left or right side. It is possible to operate in the vertical direction.

By the way, when operating the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 from the origin position to the operation limit position, the accessory control circuit 207 is necessary for operating the lower accessory drive motor 1230 from the origin position to the operation limit position. The pulse signal is output so that the rotation speed exceeds the normal rotation speed (rotation beyond the operating limit position). The lower accessory movable decoration body 1210, which started operation by the rotation of the lower accessory drive motor 1230, physically collides with the boss 12405 at the end of the hole 12204 and the boss 12407 at the end of the hole 12206. It will be stopped. In this way, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 can be quickly operated from the origin position to the operation limit position.

Here, the hole 12204 is formed up to the center side of the vertical direction line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (on the right side of the paper surface of the vertical direction line LL in FIG. 101 (A)). Similarly, the hole 12206 is formed up to the center side of the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406 (on the left side of the paper surface of the vertical line LR in FIG. 101 (A)). Therefore, when the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 moves to the operating limit position, the boss 12405 moves to a position slightly exceeding the uppermost end position and the boss 12407 moves to a position slightly exceeding the uppermost end position. That is, the boss 12405 is located on the center side of the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (on the right side of the paper surface of the vertical line LL in FIG. 101 (A)), and is the center of the right driven gear 12406. The boss 12407 is located on the center side of the line of the vertical ship LR passing through the OR (on the left side of the paper surface of the vertical line LL in FIG. 101 (A)).

When the boss 12405 moves to a position slightly above the uppermost position and the boss 12407 moves to a position slightly above the uppermost position, a downward force (for example, gravity) with respect to the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210. However, the holes 12204 and 12206 regulate the rotation of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406. Therefore, the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 cannot rotate in any direction, and the rotation of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 is locked at this position.

In this way, when the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 moves to the operating limit position, the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 does not descend due to gravity, and of course, external vibration or the like with respect to the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210. Even if a large force is applied, it does not descend and is held at the operating limit position unless the lower accessory drive motor 1230 rotates in the direction toward the origin position (clockwise). As a result, the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 is locked in a series of operations for moving the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 upward with a simple configuration without newly providing a member as a lock mechanism. The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 can be maintained above.

If the boss 12405 is not on the left side of the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (if the boss 12407 is not on the right side of the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406) , The movement of the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 downward is locked. Therefore, even when the boss 12405 is on the line of the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (when the boss 12407 is on the line of the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406), it is also downward. The movement of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 toward is locked. When the boss 12405 is on the line of the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (when the boss 12407 is on the line of the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406), the lower accessory movable decoration The gravity of the body 1210 acts in the vertical direction, and the component force of the applied gravity acts in the direction of rotation of the left driven gear 12404 (right driven gear 12406). This is because the driven gear 12406 does not act in the horizontal right direction when viewed from the front.

In the present embodiment, when the boss 12405 moves to a position slightly exceeding the uppermost position and the boss 12407 moves to a position slightly exceeding the uppermost position, the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 The rotation is restricted because it is desired to hold the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102) at the uppermost position, and the target accessory to be raised (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102). The moving range of the bosses 12405 and 12407 can be appropriately changed according to the position where the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 of the present embodiment is desired to be held. For example, the rotation range of the left driven gear 12404 is set to a position rotated 90 degrees further to the right side in front view (right side in FIG. 101 (A) and left side in FIG. 101 (B)) than on the vertical direction line LL. When the rotation range of the right driven gear 12406 is further rotated 90 degrees to the left side of the front view (the left side of FIG. 101 (A) and the right side of FIG. 101 (B)) from the vertical direction line LR, it is the most. The lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 can be held at an intermediate position between the upper end position and the lowermost position.

Further, in the present embodiment, the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 are rotated to orbit the boss 12405 and the boss 12407, and the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102). ) Is moved up and down, but the mode in which the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is moved up and down is not limited to this, and a force acting member that exerts a force on the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 (in the present embodiment). The bosses (corresponding to 12405 and 12407 in the form) may move up and down in an arc to move the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 up and down. Therefore, instead of using gears (corresponding to the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 of the present embodiment) for the movement of the force acting member, for example, the above-mentioned portion is radially separated from the center by a predetermined distance. A rotating member or the like on which a force acting member is formed may be used.

Further, the above-mentioned force acting member (corresponding to the bosses 12405 and 12407 of the present embodiment) can be moved by drawing a perfect circular arc by using a gear, but is not necessarily moved by drawing a perfect circular arc. It is not necessary, and it may be moved by drawing an elliptical arc. That is, when the moving direction of the force acting member becomes the horizontal direction, the symmetrical accessory in the moving direction (horizontal direction) of the force acting member (lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 of the present embodiment (more specifically, lower accessory movable). The component force of the load (corresponding to the base 12102) becomes 0, and the force acting member does not move due to the load of the target accessory (corresponding to the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 of the present embodiment). Therefore, unless the drive source of the force acting member (corresponding to the lower accessory drive motor 1230 of the present embodiment) is driven in the direction in which the target accessory is lowered, a simple configuration is performed without newly providing a member as a lock mechanism. Then, the target accessory can be locked upward in a series of operations for moving the target accessory upward.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 (movement of the boss 12405 and the boss 12407) is not stopped by stopping the drive of the lower accessory drive motor 1230, but is a hole. It is physically stopped by 12204 and 12206. For example, if the target accessory (corresponding to the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 of the present embodiment) is stopped upward by controlling the motor (corresponding to the lower accessory drive motor 1230 of the present embodiment), the target accessory (corresponding to the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 of the present embodiment) is stopped. There is no choice but to decelerate the rotation of the motor near the upper position to be desired, and there is a possibility that the ascending speed of the target accessory in the vicinity of the upper position will decrease. In this regard, as in the present embodiment, by physically restricting the movement of the force acting member (corresponding to the bosses 12405 and 12407 of the present embodiment), the target accessory is used unless the rotation of the motor is decelerated. , High-speed movement can be realized with a simple configuration without stalling near the upper position where you want to stop. Moreover, since the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 are arranged side by side as a pair, even if the symmetrical accessory has a horizontally long shape that is long in the left-right direction, the target combination is maintained in the left-right direction. You can move things up and down.

Further, in the present embodiment, the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 rotate in the opposite directions in synchronization with each other. That is, the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 move in the opposite directions in synchronization with each other. As a result, even if an external force (for example, vibration) is applied to the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102) in either the left or right direction, the lower accessory drive motor As long as the 1230 is not driven, the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102) can be locked near the uppermost end position. This is because the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 does not descend unless the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 move in opposite directions.

[Corner accessory 1300]
As described above, the corner accessory 1300 includes an upper corner accessory 1320 and a lower corner accessory 1350. Here, the upper corner accessory 1320 will be described first, then the lower corner accessory 1350 will be described, and then the mode when the corner accessory 1300 is operated to the operating limit position will be described.

[Structure of upper corner accessory 1320]
The configuration of the upper corner accessory 1320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 105. FIG. 102 is an example of a front view of the upper corner accessory 1320. FIG. 103 is an example of a rear view of the upper corner accessory 1320. FIG. 104 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper corner accessory 1320 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 105 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper corner accessory 1320 viewed from diagonally above the rear left (left in front view).

The upper corner accessory 1320 includes a fixed plate 1322 to which various members constituting the upper corner accessory 1320 are attached, a first movable body 1330 and a second movable body 1340 configured to be operable with respect to the fixed plate 1322. A motor 1332 as a drive source for operating the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340, and a power transmission mechanism 1333 as a mechanism for transmitting the power of the motor 1332 to the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340. And a photo sensor 1345 for confirming the origin positions of the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340.

The fixing plate 1322 is a horizontally long plate-shaped member which is the back side of the upper front accessory 1000 and the front side of the upper back accessory 1100 and is attached and fixed to the upper part of the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 described above. Support shafts 13222, 13224, 13226 are formed on the front surface side of the fixing plate 1322. A hole 13225 is formed between the support shaft 13222 and the support shaft 13224 in the left-right direction and above the support shafts 13222 and 13224. A hole 13229 is formed around the support shaft 13226 in substantially the upper half of the circumference of the support shaft 13226.

The first movable body 1330 includes a decorative portion 13302 as a display body decorated with characters and the like, and an arm portion 13304 integrally formed with the decorative portion 13302. A bearing 13306 that rotatably supports the support shaft 13222 is formed at the base end portion of the arm portion 13304. A support shaft 13308 is formed on the upper right side of the bearing 13306 when viewed from the front. The first movable body 1330 can rotate around the bearing 13306 (support shaft 13222). Further, on the back surface of the first movable body 1330, a long linear slope 13307 is formed along the moving direction of the first movable body 1330. The slope 13307 has a mountain-shaped shape that rises from both sides in the longitudinal direction toward the center.

The second movable body 1340 includes a decorative portion 13402 as a display body decorated with characters and the like, and an arm portion 13404 integrally formed with the decorative portion 13402. A bearing 13406 that rotatably supports the support shaft 13228 is formed at the base end portion of the arm portion 13404. A support shaft 13408 is formed on the upper left side of the bearing 13406 in the front view. The second movable body 1340 is rotatable around the bearing 13406 (support shaft 13228). Further, on the back surface of the second movable body 1340, a long linear slope 13407 is formed along the moving direction of the second movable body 1340. The slope 13407 has a mountain-shaped shape that rises from both sides in the longitudinal direction toward the center.

The motor 1332 is mounted and fixed to the fixing plate 1322 via the motor mounting member 1331. Further, the power of the motor 1332 is output from the motor output shaft 13322.

The power transmission mechanism 1333 includes a first gear 1334, a second gear 1335, a third gear 1336, a first transmission arm 1337, and a second transmission arm 1338. The first gear 1334 and the second gear 1335 are meshed with each other, and the second gear 1335 and the third gear 1336 are meshed with each other. Power from the motor 1332 is transmitted to the first movable body 1330 via the gears 1334 and 1335, respectively. Power from the motor 1332 is transmitted to the second movable body 1340 via the gears 1334 to 1336.

A hollow shaft 13342 is formed in the center of the first gear 1334. The hollow shaft 13342 is pivotally supported by the motor output shaft 13322 so that it can rotate coaxially with the motor output shaft 13322. The hollow shaft 13342 pivotally supported by the motor output shaft 13322 is located in the hole 13225.

A hollow shaft 13352 is formed in the center of the second gear 1335. The hollow shaft 13352 is rotatably supported by a support shaft 13224. Further, on the front surface side of the second gear 1335, a boss 13354 is formed at a portion radially outward from the center by a predetermined distance.

A hollow shaft 13362 is formed in the center of the third gear 1336. The hollow shaft 13362 is rotatably supported by a support shaft 13226. Further, on the front surface side of the third gear 1336, a boss 13364 is formed at a portion radially outward from the center by a predetermined distance. On the back surface side of the third gear 1336, a boss 13366 is formed at a portion radially outward from the center by a predetermined distance. The boss 13366 moves in the hole 13229 when the third gear 1336 rotates. The boss 13364 and the boss 13366 are formed on the surfaces opposite to each other substantially diagonally with respect to the center of the third gear 1336. A detection piece 13368 that can be detected by the photo sensor 1345 is formed on the front surface of the third gear 1336.

The first transmission arm 1337 has a C-shaped curved portion 13370 and a rod-shaped portion 13371. A bearing 13372 is formed at the end on the rod-shaped portion 13371 side. The bearing 13372 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 13308. A bearing 13374 is formed at the end on the curved portion 13370 side. The bearing 13374 is rotatably supported by the boss 13354.

The second transmission arm 1338 has a C-shaped curved portion 13380 and a rod-shaped portion 13381. A bearing 13382 is formed at the end on the rod-shaped portion 13381 side. The bearing 13382 is rotatably supported by a support shaft 13408. A bearing 13384 is formed at the end on the curved portion 13380 side. The bearing 13384 is rotatably pivotally supported by the boss 13364.

The photosensor 1345 detects the positions of the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340, and in the present embodiment, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are the origin positions (see FIG. 106 described later). ), It is attached so that the detection piece 13368 can be detected.

[Explanation of operation of upper corner accessory 1320]
Next, the operation of the upper corner accessory 1320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 109. FIG. 106 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are in the origin position. FIG. 107 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 start operating from the origin position. FIG. 108 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are further operated from the position shown in FIG. 107. FIG. 109 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are operated to the operating limit position.

When the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are in the origin position, the first movable body 1330 is located at the upper left corner of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the second movable body 1340 is located at the upper right corner of the liquid crystal display device 16. Is located in. At the origin position, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are arranged behind the upper front accessory 1000 (see, for example, FIG. 36), so that they are difficult to see in front view.

When the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are at the origin position (see FIG. 106), the motor 1332 rotates and the motor output shaft 13322 is counterclockwise in front view (clockwise in FIGS. 106 to 109). When rotated to, the first gear 1334 rotates counterclockwise in front view. When the first gear 1334 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise in front view. When the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise in front view, the third gear 1336 rotates counterclockwise in front view.

When the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise with the support shaft 13324 (hollow shaft 13352) as the center of rotation, the boss 13354 (see FIG. 104) rotates clockwise with the hollow shaft 13352 (support shaft 13224) as the center. Orbit to. When the boss 13354 orbits clockwise around the hollow shaft 13352 in front view, the bearing 13374 pivotally supported by the boss 13354 also orbits clockwise around the support shaft 13224 in front view. As a result, the bearing 13372 of the first transmission arm 1337 moves to the left (to the right in FIGS. 106 to 109) in the front view. Since the bearing 13372 of the first transmission arm 1337 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 13308 of the first movable body 1330, when the bearing 13372 moves to the left in the front view, the support shaft 13308 is moved to the fixed plate 1322. It rotates counterclockwise in front view with the formed support shaft 13222 (bearing 13306) as the center of rotation. That is, the first movable body 1330 rotates counterclockwise with the support shaft 13222 as the center of rotation, and as a result, the first movable body 1330 rotates from the origin position to the lower right (display area of the liquid crystal display device 16). Move toward (in front of).

Further, when the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise with the support shaft 13324 (hollow shaft 13352) as the center of rotation, the third gear 1336 rotates counterclockwise with the hollow shaft 13362 (support shaft 13326) as the center of rotation. Rotate around. When the third gear 1336 rotates counterclockwise in front view with the support shaft 13326 as the center of rotation, the boss 13364 (see FIG. 104) orbits counterclockwise in front view around the hollow shaft 13362. When the boss 13364 orbits counterclockwise in the front view around the hollow shaft 13362, the bearing 13382 of the second transmission arm 1338 moves in the right direction (left direction in FIGS. 106 to 109) in the front view. Since the bearing 13382 of the second transmission arm 1338 is rotatably externally attached to the support shaft 13408 of the second movable body 1340, when the bearing 13382 moves to the right in the front view, the support shaft 13408 is moved to the fixing plate 1322. It rotates clockwise in front view with the formed support shaft 13228 (bearing 13406) as the center of rotation. That is, the second movable body 1340 moves from the origin position toward the lower left (front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) with the support shaft 13228 as the center of rotation.

In this way, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 can be operated in synchronization by the rotation of one motor 1332.

Further, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 move in a direction in which the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are close to each other from the origin position which is difficult to see in the front view. That is, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 appear to move so as to be sandwiched from the outside to the inside of the field of view in the front view.

When the motor 1332 rotates and the motor output shaft 13322 rotates clockwise in front view, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 operate in the direction of returning to the origin position due to the movement opposite to the above-mentioned movement. do.

By the way, when the first movable body 1330 moved to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 returns to the origin position, the first movable body 1330 and the fixed plate 1322 interfere with each other, and the first movable body 1330 smoothly returns to the origin position. There is a risk that it cannot be restored. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the slope 13307 formed on the back surface of the first movable body 1330 slides on the flat surface portion of the fixed plate 1322, so that the first movable body 1330 can be smoothly returned to the origin position. ing. Similarly, with respect to the second movable body 1340, the slope 13407 formed on the back surface of the second movable body 1340 slides on the flat surface portion of the fixed plate 1322, so that the second movable body 1340 is smoothly moved to the origin position. It is possible to make a good return.

[Structure of lower corner accessory 1350]
The configuration of the lower corner accessory 1350 will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 113. FIG. 110 is an example of a front view of the lower corner accessory 1350. FIG. 111 is an example of a rear view of the lower corner accessory 1350. FIG. 112 is an exploded perspective view of the lower corner accessory 1350 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 113 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower corner accessory 1350 viewed from diagonally above the back left.

The lower corner accessory 1350 includes a fixed plate 1352 to which various members constituting the lower corner accessory 1350 are attached, a third movable body 1355 and a fourth movable body 1357 configured to be operable with respect to the fixed plate 1352. A motor 1354 as a drive source for operating the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357, and a power transmission mechanism 1360 as a mechanism for transmitting the power of the motor 1354 to the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357. And a photosensor 1375 for confirming the positions of the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357.

The fixing plate 1352 is a horizontally long plate-shaped member which is the back side of the middle panel 1500 and the front side of the lower accessory 1200 and is fixedly attached to the lower part of the rear box 1800. Support shafts 13522, 13523, 13524, 13525, 13526, 13527, 13528, 13259 are formed on the front surface side of the fixing plate 1352. A hole 13530 is formed around the support shaft 13527 in a substantially lower half around the support shaft 13527.

The third movable body 1355 includes a decorative portion 13552 as a display body decorated with characters and the like, and an arm portion 13554 integrally formed with the decorative portion 13552. An arm cover 13559 is provided on the back surface of the arm portion 13554. A hole 135592 is formed at the central end of the arm cover 13559. A bearing 13556 that pivotally supports the support shaft 13524 is formed at the base end portion of the arm portion 13554. A support shaft 13558 is formed at the lower right of the front view of the bearing 13556. The third movable body 1355 is rotatable about a support shaft 13524 on which the bearing 13556 is pivotally supported. A coil spring 1395 is provided between the bearing 13556 of the arm portion 13554 and the hole 135592 of the arm cover 13559. The coil spring 1395 is urged clockwise with the support shaft 13524 as the center of rotation. As a result, a clockwise urging force with the support shaft 13524 as the center of rotation acts on the third movable body 1355. Further, on the back surface of the third movable body 1355, a long linear slope 13557 is formed along the moving direction of the third movable body 1355. The slope 13557 has a mountain-shaped shape that rises from both sides in the longitudinal direction toward the center.

The fourth movable body 1357 includes a decorative portion 1357 as a display body decorated with characters and the like, and an arm portion 13574 integrally formed with the decorative portion 1357. An arm cover 13579 is provided on the back surface of the arm portion 13574. A hole 135792 is formed at the central end of the arm cover 13579. A bearing 13576 that pivotally supports the support shaft 13259 is formed at the base end portion of the arm portion 13574. A support shaft 13578 is formed on the lower left side of the bearing 13576 when viewed from the front. The fourth movable body 1357 is rotatable about a support shaft 13259 on which the bearing 13576 is pivotally supported. Further, a coil spring 1396 is provided between the bearing 13576 of the arm portion 13574 and the hole 135792 of the arm cover 13579. The coil spring 1396 is urged counterclockwise with the support shaft 13259 as the center of rotation. As a result, a counterclockwise urging force with the support shaft 13259 as the center of rotation acts on the fourth movable body 1357. Further, on the back surface of the fourth movable body 1357, a long linear slope 13377 is formed along the moving direction of the fourth movable body 1357. The slope 13757 has a mountain-shaped shape that rises from both sides in the longitudinal direction toward the center.

The motor 1354 is mounted and fixed to the fixing plate 1352 via the motor mounting member 1356. The power of the motor 1354 is output from the motor output shaft 1354.

The power transmission mechanism 1360 includes a first gear 1361, a second gear 1362, a third gear 1363, a fourth gear 1364, a fifth gear 1365, a sixth gear 1366, a seventh gear 1376, and each gear. A third transmission arm 1370 that transmits power from all or part of 1361, 1362, 1363, 1364, 1365, 1366, 1637 to the third movable body 1355, and each gear 1361, 1362, 1363, 1364, 1365, 1366. , 1372 includes a fourth transmission arm 1372 that transmits power from all or part of 1367 to the fourth movable body 1357.

A hollow shaft 13612 is formed in the center of the first gear 1361. The motor output shaft 13542 is press-fitted into the hollow shaft 13642 so that it can rotate coaxially with the motor output shaft 13542.

The power from the motor 1354 is transmitted in the order of the first gear 1361, the second gear 1362, the third gear 1363, the fourth gear 1364, the fifth gear 1365, the sixth gear 1366, and the seventh gear 1367. In the sixth gear 1366, a hollow shaft 13662 is formed in the center, and a boss 13664 is formed in a portion radially outward from the center by a predetermined distance. Further, in the sixth gear 1366, a detection piece 13666 that can be detected by the photo sensor 1375 is formed on the front surface at a portion that is radially outwardly separated from the center by a predetermined distance. Further, in the seventh gear 1367, a hollow shaft 13672 that rotatably supports the support shaft 13528 is formed at the center, and a boss 13674 is formed at a portion radially outward from the center by a predetermined distance.

The third transmission arm 1370 has a C-shaped curved portion 13702 and a rod-shaped portion 13704. A bearing 13706 is formed at the end on the rod-shaped portion 13704 side. The bearing 13706 rotatably supports the support shaft 13558 of the third movable body 1355. A bearing 13708 is formed at the end on the curved portion 13702 side. The bearing 13708 rotatably supports the boss 13664 of the sixth gear 1366.

The fourth transmission arm 1372 has a C-shaped curved portion 13722 and a rod-shaped portion 13724. A bearing 13726 is formed at the end on the rod-shaped portion 13724 side. The bearing 13726 rotatably supports the support shaft 13578. A bearing 13728 is formed at the end on the curved portion 13722 side. The bearing 13728 rotatably supports the boss 13674.

The photo sensor 1375 detects the positions of the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357. In the present embodiment, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are at the origin position (see FIG. 114 described later). ), It is attached so that the detection piece 13666 can be detected.

[Explanation of operation of lower corner accessory 1350]
Next, the operation of the lower corner accessory 1350 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 116. FIG. 114 is an example of a rear view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are in the origin position. FIG. 115 is an example of a rear view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 start operating from the origin position. FIG. 116 is an example of a rear view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to the operating limit position.

When the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are in the origin position, the third movable body 1355 is located in the lower left corner of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the fourth movable body 1357 is the liquid crystal display device 16. It is located in the lower right corner of the display area. At the origin position, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are arranged behind the first middle panel 1520 and the second middle panel 1550, so that they are difficult to see in front view.

When the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are at the origin position (see FIG. 114), the motor 1354 rotates and the motor output shaft 13542 is clockwise in front view (counterclockwise in FIGS. 114 to 116). When rotated to, the 1st gear 1361 rotates clockwise in front view. When the first gear 1361 rotates clockwise in front view, the second gear 1362 rotates counterclockwise in front view. When the second gear 1362 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the third gear 1363 rotates clockwise in front view. When the third gear 1363 rotates clockwise in front view, the fourth gear 1364 rotates counterclockwise in front view. When the 4th gear 1364 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the 5th gear 1365 rotates clockwise in front view. When the fifth gear 1365 rotates clockwise in front view, the sixth gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise in front view. When the sixth gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the seventh gear 1367 rotates clockwise in front view.

When the sixth gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise (clockwise in FIGS. 114 to 116) with the support shaft 13527 (hollow shaft 13662) as the center of rotation, the boss 13664 (see FIG. 112) centers on the hollow shaft 13662. As a front view, it goes around counterclockwise. When the boss 13664 orbits counterclockwise in the front view around the hollow shaft 13662, the bearing 13706 of the third transmission arm 1370 moves in the left direction (right direction in FIGS. 114 to 116) in the front view. Since the bearing 13706 of the third transmission arm 1370 rotatably supports the third movable body 1355 support shaft 13558, when the bearing 13706 moves to the left in the front view, the support shaft 13558 is formed on the fixed plate 1352. It rotates clockwise in front view with the supported support shaft 13524 (bearing 13556) as the center of rotation. That is, the third movable body 1355 rotates clockwise with the support shaft 13524 as the center of rotation, and as a result, the third movable body 1355 moves upward from the origin position.

Further, when the 6th gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise in front view with the support shaft 13527 (hollow shaft 13662) as the center of rotation, the 7th gear 1367 watches in front view with the support shaft 13528 (hollow shaft 13672) as the center of rotation. Rotate around. When the seventh gear 1367 rotates clockwise with the support shaft 13528 as the center of rotation in front view, the boss 13674 (see FIG. 112) orbits clockwise with the hollow shaft 13672 as the center in front view. When the boss 13672 orbits clockwise around the hollow shaft 13672 in the front view, the bearing 13726 of the fourth transmission arm 1372 moves in the right direction (left direction in FIGS. 114 to 116) in the front view. Since the bearing 13726 of the fourth transmission arm 1372 rotatably supports the support shaft 13578 of the fourth movable body 1357, when the bearing 13726 moves to the right in the front view, the support shaft 13578 is moved to the fixed plate 1352. It rotates counterclockwise in front view with the formed support shaft 13259 (bearing 13576) as the center of rotation. That is, the fourth movable body 1357 moves upward from the origin position with the support shaft 13259 as the center of rotation.

In this way, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 can be operated in synchronization by the rotation of one motor 1354.

Further, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 move in a direction in which the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are close to each other from the origin position which is difficult to see from the front view. That is, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 appear to move so as to be sandwiched from the outside to the inside of the field of view in the front view.

When the motor 1354 rotates and the motor output shaft 1354 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 return to the origin position due to the movement opposite to the above-mentioned movement. Operate.

By the way, when the third movable body 1355 moved to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 returns to the origin position, the third movable body 1355 and the fixed plate 1352 interfere with each other, and the third movable body 1355 smoothly returns to the origin position. There is a risk that it cannot be restored. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the slope 13557 formed on the back surface of the third movable body 1355 slides on the flat surface portion of the fixed plate 1352, so that the third movable body 1355 can be smoothly returned to the origin position. ing. Similarly, with respect to the fourth movable body 1357, the slope 13377 formed on the back surface of the fourth movable body 1357 slides on the flat surface portion of the fixed plate 1352, so that the fourth movable body 13570 is smoothly moved to the origin position. It is possible to make a good return.

[Aspect when the corner accessory 1300 operates to the operating limit position]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 117 to 119, a mode when the corner accessory 1300 is operated to the operating limit position will be described. FIG. 117 is a back unit showing an mode when all of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 of the corner accessory 1300 are operated to the operation limit position. It is an example of the front view of 176. FIG. 118 shows when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 of the corner accessory 1300 operate to the operating limit position, and the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 stand by at the origin position. It is an example of the front view of the back unit 176 which shows the aspect of. FIG. 119 shows the corner accessory 1300 when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to the operation limit position, and the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are waiting at the origin position. It is an example of the front view of the back unit 176 which shows the aspect of. However, in FIGS. 117 to 119, for convenience of explanation, the illustration of the upper front accessory 1000, the lower accessory 1200, the middle panel 1500, and the attacker ball gutter 1600 is omitted.

Although not shown, each of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 has one character (for example, kanji, hiragana, katakana, alphabet). ) Is attached.

As shown in FIG. 117, when the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 operate to the operating limit position, the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 3) In the front, one design (for example, a compound word) is formed by the letters attached to each movable body 1330, 1340, 1355, 1357.

Further, as shown in FIG. 118, when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 operate to the operating limit position, and the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are waiting at the origin position, In front of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 3), one design (for example, a compound word) is formed by the characters attached to the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340.

Further, as shown in FIG. 119, when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to the operation limit position and the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are waiting at the origin position, In front of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 3), one design (for example, a compound word) is formed by the characters attached to the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357.

In this way, for example, the drive of the motor 1332 (for example, see FIG. 104) and the motor 1354 (for example, see FIG. 113) by the accessory control circuit 207 (both see FIG. 7) of the sub CPU 201 is subjected to the jackpot determination process. By controlling according to the result of, one design (hereinafter, "first design") is used for all the characters of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357. One design (hereinafter referred to as "second design") is formed by forming a design (referred to as) or having a part (two) characters of the upper corner accessory 1320 (first movable body 1330 and second movable body 1340). Or a part (two) characters of the lower corner accessory 1350 (third movable body 1355 and fourth movable body 1357) to form one design (hereinafter referred to as "third design"). It becomes possible to do. As a result, it is possible to change the visual impression given to the player by the movable effect by the operation of the accessory with only a limited number of the accessory.

Further, the design formed by two or more of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 is information related to the progress of the game (for example, a big hit). It is also possible to make the player recognize it as execution suggestion information of a specific reach with high expectation. For example, when a specific reach effect that makes a player expect a big hit is executed as a result of a big hit determination by starting a prize at the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440, the specific case is specified. In front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, two or more movable bodies (first movable body 1330, second movable body 1340, third movable body 1355, and fourth movable body) are expressed. It may be represented by a design (for example, a compound word) that can be recognized when any two or more movable bodies of the movable bodies 1357 are arranged close to each other.

In the present embodiment, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 move in the direction in which the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are close to each other from the origin position which is difficult to see in the front view. That is, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 appear to move so as to be sandwiched from the upper outer side to the lower inner side of the field of view in the front view.

Further, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 move from the origin position, which is difficult to see from the front view, in the direction in which the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are close to each other. That is, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 appear to move so as to be sandwiched from the upper outer side to the lower inner side of the field of view in the front view.

Here, letters are given to the front surfaces of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357, respectively, but the movable bodies 1330, 1340, 1355, respectively. Each single character on each of the 1357s does not make sense, and information about the progress of the game is not shown to the player.

Further, the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are all arranged at positions that are difficult to see at the origin position, and are arranged at positions that are difficult to see at the origin position, and are located at the upper left and front of the front view, respectively. It is located at a location distant from the upper right of the view, the lower left of the front view, and the lower right of the front view. Therefore, two or more of the 1 movable body 1330, the 2nd movable body 1340, the 3rd movable body 1355, and the 4th movable body 1357 are directed from the outside to the inside of the player's view in the front view. In the process of the operation, it is difficult for the player to immediately recognize the design (for example, a compound word) formed by the characters attached to the two or more movable bodies to be operated, and the liquid crystal display. It is only recognizable when it is stopped in close proximity in front of the display area of the device 16.

In this way, two or more of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 move from the outside to the inside of the field of view in the front view. By doing so, the player's gaze can be moved from the back (the effect image shown in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) to the front (the character of the movable body that has advanced to the front of the liquid crystal display device 16). As a result, conventionally, for example, information related to the progress of the game has been shown to the player by, for example, an effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device, but according to the present embodiment, the information is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. Two or more of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 that advance to the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 without relying on the effect image to be produced. It is possible to show the player information related to the progress of the game only with the movable body. As a result, not only the rhythm of the production can be changed, but also the production that has an impact on the player can be performed, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, when the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 operate to the operating limit position, the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 3). In the front, it is preferable that one design is formed by the letters attached to all the movable bodies 1330, 1340, 1355 and 1357, but it is not always limited to this, and it is attached to two or more partial movable bodies. It does not matter if one design is formed only by letters. For example, of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357, one design is made only by the characters attached to the first movable body 1330 and the third movable body 1355. It corresponds to the case where the second movable body 1340 and the fourth movable body 1357 (characters may not be attached) are formed and exist as mere separate movable bodies without forming a design.

Further, in the present embodiment, one character is attached to each of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357, but the present invention is not limited to this. Two or more letters may be attached to all or some of the movable bodies.

Further, in the present embodiment, characters are attached to each of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display. In front of the display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 3), one design may be formed or something having a meaningful shape (for example, one reminiscent of a specific idea) may be formed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are located in front of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 3). , There is a gap between the movable body and the other movable body, but the present invention is not limited to this, and all or a part of the movable bodies may be united to form one design.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation of one motor 1332 (see, for example, FIG. 104) causes the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 to operate in synchronization with each other, and the rotation of one motor 1354 causes a third operation. The movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are configured to operate in synchronization with each other, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body are not limited to this. Each of the bodies 1357 may be configured to operate independently.

[Structure of side accessory 1400]
The configuration of the side accessory 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 to 123. FIG. 120 is an example of a front view of the side accessory 1400 in a normal mode (a mode when it is in the origin position). FIG. 121 is an example of a rear view of the side accessory 1400 in the normal aspect. FIG. 122 is an example of a front view of an exploded perspective view of the side accessory 1400 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 123 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the side accessory 1400 viewed from diagonally above the rear left (left in front view). Although various members such as the link member 1420 are shown through the mounting plate 1410 so as to be easily visible in FIG. 121, they are actually opaque members.

The side accessory 1400 is for operating the mounting plate 1410 to which various members constituting the side accessory 1400 are attached, the movable decorative body 1450 configured to be operable with respect to the mounting plate 1410, and the movable decorative body 1450. Positions of the side accessory motor 1440 as a drive source, the movable piece 1430 and the L-shaped link member 1420 as a mechanism for transmitting the power of the side accessory motor 1440 to the movable decorative body 1450, and the movable decorative body 1450. It is equipped with a photo sensor 1464 for confirming.

The mounting plate 1410 is a vertically long plate-shaped member that is mounted and fixed to the right side of the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 described above. A link support shaft 1412 that pivotally supports the link member 1420 is formed on the upper portion of the mounting plate 1410 on the front surface side. At the lower part of the mounting plate 1410, a movable decorative body support shaft 1414 that pivotally supports the movable decorative body 1450 is formed.

The movable decorative body 1450 is a single movable body that can be operated together with a vertically long patterned main body portion 1452 with a decoration on the front surface and a main body portion 1452, and can also be operated independently with respect to the main body portion 1452. It is equipped with 1454. The main body portion 1452 of the movable decorative body 1450 has a movable decorative bearing 1458 that pivotally supports the support shaft 1414 for the movable decorative body under the main body portion 1452. The movable decorative body 1450 is pivotally supported by the movable decorative body support shaft 1414 in the movable decorative body 1458, and is configured to be rotatable around the movable decorative body support shaft 1414 (movable decorative bearing 1458) as a rotation center. The movable decorative body 1450 has an origin confirmation movable piece 1456 at a lower end portion. Further, the movable decorative body 1450 has a movable decorative boss 1455 that projects rearward on the right side of the front view.

The side accessory motor 1440 is mounted and fixed to the mounting plate 1410 via the motor mounting member 1444. Further, the side accessory motor 1440 is a motor with a speed reducer, and the rotation speed of the side accessory motor 1440 is reduced to output power from the motor output shaft 1442.

The movable piece 1430 has a gear bearing 1432 connected to the side accessory motor 1440 by axially supporting the motor output shaft 1442, and a link member boss 1434 connected to the link member 1420. When the side accessory motor 1440 rotates, the movable piece 1430 rotates with the gear bearing 1432 (motor output shaft 1442) as the center of rotation.

The link member 1420 includes a link bearing 1422 that pivotally supports the link support shaft 1412 of the mounting plate 1410, a first link 1421 that is long in the lateral direction, and a second link 1425 that is substantially perpendicular to the first link 1421 and is long in the downward direction. And have. The link member 1420 can rotate about the link support shaft 1412 pivotally supported by the link bearing 1422 as a rotation center. The first link 1421 is formed with an elongated hole 1424 for a movable piece to which a link member boss 1434 of the movable piece 1430 is slidably connected. The link member boss 1434 is slidable along the elongated hole direction of the movable piece elongated hole 1424 when the link member 1420 rotates about the link bearing 1422 as the center of rotation. The second link 1425 is formed with an elongated hole 1426 for the movable decorative body to which the movable decorative boss 1455 of the movable decorative body 1450 is slidably connected. The movable decorative boss 1455 is slidable along the long hole direction of the long hole 1426 for the movable decorative body when the link member 1420 rotates about the link bearing 1422 as the center of rotation.

The photosensor 1464 is mounted and fixed to the lower part of the mounting plate 1410 via the photosensor mounting member 1460. The photo sensor 1464 detects the position of the movable decorative body 1450. As described above, in the present embodiment, the origin confirmation movable piece 1456 is provided at the lower end of the movable decoration body 1450, and the photosensor 1464 has the origin confirmation movable piece 1456 when the movable decoration body 1450 is in the origin position. One piece 1456 can be detected. That is, the photo sensor 1464 detects whether or not the movable decorative body 1450 is at the origin position.

[Explanation of operation of side accessory 1400]
Next, the operation of the side accessory 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 120, 121, and 124 to 128. FIG. 124 is a front view showing an example of the side accessory 1400 in which the movable decorative body 1450 is moving toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 125 is a rear view showing an example of the side accessory 1400 in which the movable decorative body 1450 is moving toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 126 is a front view showing an example of the side accessory 1400 when the movable decorative body 1450 is most advanced toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 127 is a rear view showing an example of the side accessory 1400 when the movable decorative body 1450 is most advanced toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 128 shows an example of the side accessory 1400 when the side accessory motor 1440 is further rotated in the same direction from the state in which the movable decorative body 1450 is most advanced toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. It is a rear view. Hereinafter, in this specification, the position when the movable decorative body 1450 is most advanced toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is referred to as the “most advanced position”.

The degree of inclination of the link member 1420 when the movable decorative body 1450 is at the origin position is approximately 1 o'clock (see FIG. 121) when viewed from the rear, and the link member 1420 when the movable decorative body 1450 is at the most advanced position. The degree of inclination is approximately 4:30 in the rear view (see FIG. 127). In the present embodiment, the reduction ratio of the side accessory motor 1440 is such that the motor output shaft 1442 moves from about 1 o'clock to about 4:30 when the side accessory motor 1440 makes one rotation (movable decorative body 1450). Moves from the origin position to the most advanced position), but the reduction ratio is not limited to this.

At the most advanced position shown in FIG. 127, the movable decorative boss 1455 has not moved to the end of the movable decorative body slot 1426. This is because the rotation direction centered on the movable decorative body support shaft 1414 (movable decorative body 1450) and the long direction of the movable decorative body elongated hole 1426 are different from each other. This is because the movement of the movable decorative boss 1455 is restricted by the side surface (longitudinal surface) of the movable decorative boss.

When the movable decorative body 1450 is at the origin position (the position where the degree of inclination of the link member 1420 is approximately 1 o'clock in the rear view), the side accessory motor 1440 rotates and the motor output shaft 1442 rotates counterclockwise in the front view. (Counterclockwise in FIGS. 120, 124 and 126, clockwise in FIGS. 121, 125, 127 and 128), the movable piece 1430 is centered on the motor output shaft 1442 (gear bearing 1432). It rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. When the movable piece 1430 rotates counterclockwise with the gear bearing 1432 as the center of rotation, the link member boss 1434 slides in the movable piece slot 1424, and the link bearing 1422 (with respect to the link member 1420) A force that rotates clockwise (clockwise in FIG. 124 and counterclockwise in FIG. 125) acts in front view with the link bearing shaft 1412) as the center of rotation. Then, when the link member 1420 rotates clockwise with the link bearing 1422 as the center of rotation in a front view, a force for pushing the movable decorative body 1450 toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 via the movable decorative boss 1455 is applied. It works. When the degree of inclination of the link member 1420 is approximately 4:30 in the rear view (see FIG. 127) and the rotation of the side accessory motor 1440 is stopped, the movable decorative body 1450 is stopped at the most advanced position.

From the state where the degree of inclination of the link member 1420 is approximately 4:30 in the rear view (see FIG. 127), the side accessory motor 1440 further rotates, and the motor output shaft 1442 is counterclockwise in the front view (FIGS. 120 and 124). And when rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 126 and clockwise in FIGS. 121, 125, 127 and 128), the movable piece 1430 is counterclockwise in front view with the motor output shaft 1442 (gear bearing 1432) as the center of rotation. Rotate to. When the movable piece 1430 rotates counterclockwise with the gear bearing 1432 as the center of rotation, the link member boss 1434 slides in the movable piece slot 1424, and the link bearing 1422 (with respect to the link member 1420) A force that rotates clockwise (clockwise in FIG. 124 and counterclockwise in FIG. 125) acts in front view with the link bearing shaft 1412) as the center of rotation. Then, when the link member 1420 rotates clockwise with the link bearing 1422 as the center of rotation in a front view, a force for returning the movable decorative body 1450 to the origin position acts on the movable decorative body 1450 via the movable decorative boss 1455. do. When the degree of inclination of the link member 1420 is approximately 1 o'clock (see FIG. 121) in the rear view and the rotation of the side accessory motor 1440 is stopped, the movable decorative body 1450 is stopped at the origin position.

In this way, the movable decorative body can be formed by simply rotating the side accessory motor 1440 in the same direction (counterclockwise in front view in the present embodiment) without rotating the side accessory motor 1440 in the forward or reverse direction. The 1450 can be reciprocated between the origin position and the most advanced position. When the link member 1420 moves from approximately 1 o'clock in the rear view (see FIG. 121) to approximately 4:30 in the rear view (see FIG. 127), the movable decorative body 1450 moves from the origin position to the most advanced position. On the other hand, when the link member 1420 moves from about 4:30 in the rear view to about 1 o'clock in the back view, the movable decorative body 1450 moves from the most advanced position to the origin position. That is, the movement of the movable decorative body 1450 from the origin position to the most advanced position can be realized only by moving the link member 1420 from about 1 o'clock in the rear view to about 4:30 in the rear view, but from the most advanced position to the origin. The movement of the movable decorative body 1450 to the position requires that the link member 1420 move from about 4:30 to 1 o'clock in the rear view.

Therefore, not only when the rotation speed of the side accessory motor 1440 (motor output shaft 1442) is constant, but also from the origin position to the most advanced position unless the rotation speed of the side accessory motor 1440 fluctuates significantly. The movement of the movable decorative body 1450 is performed relatively quickly, and the movement of the movable decorative body 1450 from the most advanced position to the origin position is performed relatively slowly. Here, the movement of the movable decorative body 1450 from the origin position to the most advanced position (movable body effect) is a hit determination performed when the game ball wins a prize at the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440. Although performed on the basis of the results, such movement of the movable ornament 1450 is required to be performed quickly. On the other hand, the movement of the movable decorative body 1450 from the most advanced position to the origin position does not require a quicker movement than the movement from the origin position to the most advanced position. Therefore, the movable decorative body 1450 can be reciprocated between the origin position and the most advanced position simply by rotating the side accessory motor 1440 in one direction (the same direction). The rotation angle of the side accessory motor 1440 required for the 1450 to move from the origin position to the most advanced position, and the rotation of the side accessory motor 1440 required for the movable decorative body 1450 to move from the most advanced position to the origin position. By making it smaller than the angle, the movable decorative body 1450 from the origin position to the most advanced position is compared with the movement from the most advanced position to the origin position without changing the rotation speed of the side accessory motor 1440. It is possible to move quickly.

The independent movable body 1454 moves from the origin position to the most advanced position together with the movable decorative body 1450 when the movable decorative body 1450 moves from the origin position to the most advanced position. By making the 1454 operate in accordance with the main body 1452, the operation effect of the side accessory 1400 can be made more dynamic. However, instead of or in addition to this, when the movable decorative body 1450 is waiting between the origin position, the most advanced position or the origin position and the re-advanced position, the independent movable body 1454 is attached to the main body 1452. It may be activated.

[Structure of the second middle panel 1550]
The configuration of the second middle panel 1550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 to 131. FIG. 129 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the second middle panel 1550 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 130 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the second middle panel 1550 viewed from diagonally above the rear left (left in front view). FIG. 131 is an example of a front view of (A) the second middle panel 1550, and an example of a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC shown in (B) and (A).

The second middle panel 1550 includes a panel mounting case 1556 to which various members constituting the second middle panel 1550 are mounted, an LED substrate 1560 on which LEDs 1562 and 1564 are arranged, a light guide lens 1570, a black sheet 1580, and an inner. It includes a lens 1583, a decorative sheet 1584, a half mirror 1585, a window edge 1586 having the opening window 1552 described above, and a panel cover 1590.

The panel mounting case 1556 is a case-shaped member that is fixedly mounted to the lower right portion of the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 described above.

The LED substrate 1560 is a plate-shaped member having an annular protrusion 1561 having a shape corresponding to the opening window 1552 described above and having a plane region 1563. On the LED substrate 1560, a plurality of (five in this embodiment) LEDs 1562 are arranged in an annular shape inside the annular protrusion 1561 in the radial direction, and a plurality of LEDs 1564 are arranged in the plane region 1563. The LED 1562 is provided so as to emit light outward in the radial direction. The LED 1564 is provided so as to emit light toward the front in a front view.

The light guide lens 1570 is provided so as to accommodate the LED substrate 1560 with the panel mounting case 1556. The light guide lens 1570 has a function of dispersing the light emitted forward from the LED 1564 arranged on the LED substrate 1560 and emitting the light in a planar manner. Further, the light guide lens 1570 is formed with a hole having a shape corresponding to the opening window 1552.

The black sheet 1580 is attached to the back surface of the panel cover 1590. The front side of the black sheet 1580 is black, and the back side is watermarked with characters or the like. The watermark cannot be visually recognized from the front in the normal state (when the LEDs 1562 and 1564 are not emitting light), but when the predetermined conditions are satisfied and the LEDs 1562 and 1564 emit light, the watermark appears to appear on the panel cover 1590. The black sheet 1580 is formed with holes having a shape corresponding to the opening window 1552.

The half mirror 1585, the decorative sheet 1584, and the inner lens 1583 are stacked in this order from the front and arranged so as to face the opening window 1552. At this time, the inner lens 1583 is arranged so that the LED 1562 fits inside in the radial direction (so that it is located outside in the radial direction of the LED 1562).

The inner lens 1583 has a flange 15832 (see FIG. 131 (B)) that projects toward the back side in front view along the outer circumference. A part of the light emitted from the LED 1562 toward the outside in the radial direction is absorbed by the inner lens 1583, and the unabsorbed light is transmitted through the inner lens 1583. Further, the inner lens 1583 is divided into five fan-shaped regions 15831,15833,15835,13837,13839 (see FIG. 130). Further, a plurality of notches are formed in each of these five regions 15831,15833,15835,13837,13839 in a direction substantially orthogonal to the radial direction. Further, since the boundaries of each of the five regions 15831, 15833, 15835, 13837, and 13839 are inclined so as to decrease in height from the peripheral portion toward the center of the circle, the light incident on the inner lens 1583 is generated. It flows along the notch formed in the inner lens 1583 and gathers toward the center of the inner lens 1583 in the radial direction. When light is incident on the inner lens 1583, the light intensity is stronger at the outer peripheral portion than at the center portion in the radial direction, but by collecting the incident light toward the center in the radial direction, the surface of the inner lens 1583 can be gathered. It is possible to make the surface emit light more uniformly.

The decorative sheet 1584 is a light-transmitting sheet on which a picture of a character or the like is drawn on the front surface. The character drawn on the decorative sheet 1584 cannot be visually recognized from the front by the half mirror 1585 in the normal state (when the LED 1562 is not emitting light), but when a predetermined condition is satisfied and the LED 1562 emits light, the area inside the opening window 1552 is displayed. Appears to emerge.

The window edge 1586 is gloss-plated and is configured to reflect light. Further, the opening window 1552 described above is formed in the window edge body 1586, and the outer peripheral portion is decorated so as to maintain the aesthetic appearance.

The panel cover 1590 is a transparent plate-shaped member, and as described above, a black sheet 1580 is attached to the back surface side. Further, the panel cover 1590 is formed with a hole corresponding to the opening window 1552.

The light emitted from the LED 1562 emits light outward in the radial direction. A part of the light is incident on the flange 15832 (see FIG. 131) of the inner lens 1583, a part of the incident light is absorbed in the inner lens 1583, and the other light is transmitted through the inner lens 1583 and has a diameter. It emits light toward the outside of the direction. The light transmitted through the inner lens 1583 and emitted outward in the radial direction is reflected on the radial inner surface 15862 (see FIG. 131) of the outer peripheral edge of the window edge body 1586. The light reflected on the radial inner surface 15862 of the outer peripheral edge of the window edge 1586 changes the traveling direction of the light in the radial inward direction and is incident on the inner lens 1583. In this way, the light emitted from the LED 1562 is prevented from leaking to the outside as much as possible, and is absorbed by the inner lens 1583 as much as possible. Further, since the light is incident on the inner lens 1583 from the outer peripheral portion of the inner lens 1583 including a part of the above light, the light can be dispersed along the surface of the inner lens 1583 and the surface can be uniformly distributed. It is possible to make it emit light.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, the following gaming machines can be provided.

[Appendix 1]
Conventionally, there are known gaming machines such as pachinko machines or pachislot machines that perform a winning determination and execute a game advantageous to the player according to the result of the winning determination.

In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the winning judgment is displayed, a movable body effect is performed in which the movable body is operated in order to expect the result of the winning judgment to be a favorable result for the player. There is something that can be enhanced.

As such a movable body effect, for example, a technique is known in which the movable body is moved by the expansion / contraction operation of the pantograph and the movable body is tilted at the same time when the expansion / contraction operation of the pantofluff is started (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229582). See).

However, for example, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229582, when the operation of the movable body is started, a plurality of operations by the movable body such as movement and inclination of the movable body can be grasped, and the effect is produced. There was a limit to increasing the effect, and there was a risk that the interest would decline.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to enhance the effect of producing a movable body and suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a main movable member (for example, movable) configured to be operable between a first position (for example, an origin position) and a second position (for example, an operation limit position). A decorative body 1110), a sub-movable member (for example, a covering decorative body 1120) configured to be operable in association with the operation of the main movable member when the main movable member is activated, and one end thereof are predetermined. An arm mechanism (eg, pantograph mechanism 1170) that is attached to the base member (for example, base member 1180) and whose other end is attached to the sub-movable member, and the main movable member at the first position. When the operation is started, the sub-movable member is also operated accordingly, and the arm mechanism is operated during the period from the start of the operation of the main movable member to the second position. A regulating means for regulating (for example, a regulating member 1190) is provided, and the sub-movable member is provided so as to be relatively movable with respect to the main movable member, and the arm mechanism can be operated by the regulating means. When regulated, the main movable member operates up to the second position, while the sub-movable member step operates relative to the main movable member.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the operation of the main movable member at the first position (for example, the origin position) is started, the auxiliary movable member is also operated accordingly. However, the operation of the arm mechanism (for example, the pantograph mechanism 1170) is restricted until the main movable member reaches the second position, and the sub-movable member operates relative to the main movable member. Therefore, when the operation of the main movable member and the auxiliary movable member is started, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp how these movable members operate, and the movement of the movable member can be made difficult. It is possible to make people interested in and improve their interests.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the arm mechanism (for example, the pantograph mechanism 1170) is a pair of first arms (for example, upper left arm 1172, upper right arm) attached to the predetermined base member. 1176) and a pair of second arms (eg, lower left arm 1174 and lower right arm 1178), one end of which is connected to the first arm and the other end of which is attached to the sub-movable member. When the operation of the main movable member and the sub-movable member that operates accompanying the main movable member is started, the pair of first arms and the pair of second arms form a substantially rhombus shape. Is.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since a substantially rhombus shape is formed so as to avoid the central portion that is easily in the player's field of view, the player can provide a mechanism for operating the main movable member and the sub-movable member. It can be difficult to see.

As for the "substantially diamond shape", of the four sides (for example, the four arms of the upper left arm 1172, the lower left arm 1174, the upper right arm 1176, and the lower right arm 1178), two sets of opposite sides are parallel. (For example, the upper left arm 1172 and the lower right arm 1178 are parallel, the lower left arm 1174 and the upper right arm 1176 are parallel), and in addition to the case where the four sides have the same length, a parallelogram or a square Is also assumed. Also, of the four sides, two pairs of sides facing each other have the same length (for example, the upper left arm 1172 and the lower right arm 1178 have the same length, and the lower left arm 1174 and the upper right arm 1176 have the same length). However, the lengths may not be the same, and further, the sides of one pair of the two facing pairs may have the same length and the sides of the other pair may have different lengths. .. That is, the lengths of the four sides are not limited to a specific length, and various variations can be adopted. Also, considering that each side operates, it is not always necessary for the opposite sides to be parallel. For example, in the case where an accessory is connected to the arm, the accessory is driven (that is, the operation of the arm). It may be a form in which the opposite sides are changed from a non-parallel state to a parallel state, or a form in which the opposite sides are changed from a parallel state to a non-parallel state. In addition, regarding the above "opposite sides are parallel", considering the structure when the accessory is driven, it may be difficult to obtain perfect parallelism, so the inclination direction of the facing sides is If they face in the same direction, they are considered to be parallel (approximately parallel). Further, considering that the accessory can move from the standby position (for example, the origin position) to the drive position (for example, the operation limit position) even if each of the four sides has a different length. The lengths of the four sides vary.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (2) above, the main movable member (for example, the movable decorative body 1110) is directed from the first position (origin position) to the second position (for example, the operating limit position). When the operation is started, the main movable member moves in a direction away from the predetermined base member (for example, the base member 1180), and the arm mechanism (for example, the pantograph mechanism 1170) is the pair of the first movable members. One arm (for example, the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176) is composed of a transparent member, and the pair of second arms (for example, the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178) are moved by the main movable member. It is configured to move with the movement and to be located behind the main movable member.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the main movable member (for example, the movable decorative body 1110) starts operating from the first position (origin position) to the second position (operating limit position), the operation is performed. Since the main movable member moves in a direction away from the predetermined base member (for example, the base member 1180), the arm mechanism (for example, the pantograph mechanism 1170) is easily visible to the player. Therefore, the pair of first arms (for example, the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176) are made of transparent members, and the pair of second arms (for example, the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178) are mainly movable. By configuring the member so as to move along with the movement of the member and to be located behind the main movable member, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize both the pair of first arms and the pair of second arms. Can be done.

(4) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a main movable member (for example, an operation limit position) that can be operated from a first position (for example, an origin position) to a second position (for example, an operation limit position) by applying power. , Movable decorative body 1110) and a sub-movable member (for example, a covering decorative body) provided incidentally to the main movable member and operably provided accompanying the main movable member when power is applied to the main movable member. 1120) and, after power is applied to the main movable member at the first position and both the main movable member and the sub-movable member start operating toward the second position, the second By restricting the operation of only the sub-movable member of the main movable member and the sub-movable member until the position is reached, the main is located between the first position and the second position. It is provided with a regulating means (for example, a regulating member 1190) capable of giving a change to the operation of the movable member.

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, after both the main movable member and the sub-movable member start operating toward the second position, the main movable member and the sub-movable member reach the second position. By restricting the operation of only the sub-movable member, the operation of the main movable member can be changed between the first position and the second position. Therefore, when the operation of the main movable member and the sub-movable member is started, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp how these movable members operate, and to make the movement of the movable member interesting. It is possible to improve the interest.

As described above, according to the invention described in Appendix 1, it is possible to enhance the effect of the movable body effect and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

[Appendix 2]
Conventionally, there are known gaming machines such as pachinko machines or pachislot machines that perform a winning determination and execute a game advantageous to the player according to the result of the winning determination.

In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the winning judgment is displayed, the expectation effect is performed to expect the result of the winning judgment to be advantageous to the player, so that the effect of the effect is enhanced. There is something.

Examples of such an expected effect include a display effect displayed on a liquid crystal display and a movable body effect for operating a movable body. As a gaming machine for producing a movable body effect, a technique for moving a movable body in the vertical direction using a plurality of motors is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-76208).

However, if a plurality of motors are used to move the movable body in the vertical direction, not only the structure becomes complicated, but also control for operating the movable body is required, for example, it becomes necessary to synchronize the plurality of motors. May become complicated.

In particular, in recent years, many gaming machines are provided with more movable bodies to enhance the effect of the effect, and therefore, it is required to produce the movable body with a simple configuration.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of producing a movable body with a simple configuration.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a determination means for determining profit granting when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a movable member (lower accessory) configured to be operable according to the determination result of the determination means. Decorative cover 12104) and an operating mechanism capable of operating the movable member upward by receiving power from a predetermined drive source (lower accessory drive motor 1230) according to the determination result of the determination means. (Lower accessory fixing base 1220 and lower accessory drive motor 1230), and the operating mechanism serves as an operating mechanism for operating the movable member (lower accessory decorative cover 12104) upward in the left-right direction. It has a pair of first gear (left driven gear 12404) and second gear (right driven gear 12406) having the same diameter, and both the first gear and the second gear are predetermined in the radial direction from the center of rotation. It is characterized by having bosses (bosses 12405 and 12407) at portions separated from each other and rotating in synchronization with each other with the same height direction position of the center of rotation.

According to the game machine of (1) above, since the movable member can be moved up and down with one drive source, the movable member can be moved up and down with a simple configuration, and a pair of gears (left) provided in the left-right direction. The driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406) allow the movable member to be operated upward in a well-balanced manner in the left-right direction.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the first gear corresponding to the movement locus of the first boss (boss 12405) of the first gear when the first gear (left driven gear 12404) rotates. Hole (hole 12204) and a second hole (hole 12206) corresponding to the movement locus of the second boss of the second gear when the second gear (right driven gear 12406) is rotated are formed. A base member (lower accessory fixing base 1220) is further provided so that the first boss can move the first hole and the second boss can move the second hole. The first hole and the second hole regulate the rotation range of the first gear and the second gear.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the rotation of the first gear (left driven gear 12404) and the second gear (right driven gear 12406) by the first hole (hole 12204) and the second hole (hole 12206). Is stable, and the movable member can be moved up and down stably while maintaining its posture.

As described above, according to the invention described in Appendix 2, it is possible to enhance the effect of the movable body effect and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

[Appendix 2-2]
Conventionally, there are known gaming machines such as pachinko machines or pachislot machines that perform a winning determination and execute a game advantageous to the player according to the result of the winning determination.

In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the winning judgment is displayed, the expectation effect is performed to expect the result of the winning judgment to be advantageous to the player, so that the effect of the effect is enhanced. There is something.

Examples of such an expected effect include a display effect displayed on a liquid crystal display and a movable body effect for operating a movable body. As a gaming machine for producing a movable body effect, a technique for moving a movable body in the vertical direction using a plurality of motors is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-76208).

However, if a plurality of motors are used to move the movable body in the vertical direction, not only the structure becomes complicated, but also control for operating the movable body is required, for example, it becomes necessary to synchronize the plurality of motors. May become complicated.

In recent years, the size of movable bodies of gaming machines has tended to increase, and the issue is how to move such a large-sized movable body at high speed while maintaining stability with a simple configuration. It has become.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of moving a movable body at a high speed while maintaining stability with a simple configuration.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a movable member capable of operating in the vertical direction (for example, a lower accessory movable decorative body 1210), a predetermined drive source (for example, a lower accessory drive motor 1230), and the predetermined predetermined. A force acting member (for example, boss 12405, 12407) capable of operating the movable member upward by receiving power from the driving source of the above, and a movement regulating means (for example,) for restricting the movement of the force acting member. , The holes 12204, 12206) formed in the lower accessory fixing base 1220, and the force acting members are provided on the left and right, and the first force acting member (for example, the boss 12405) that can move synchronously and The movement restricting means has a second force acting member (for example, a boss 12407), even if the first force acting member and the second force acting member are powered by the predetermined drive source. It is characterized in that it is configured to regulate the movement of the first force acting member and the second force acting member at a predetermined limit position.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the movable member (for example, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210) can be moved up and down by one drive source (for example, the lower accessory drive motor 1230), it can be moved with a simple configuration. In addition to being able to move the members up and down, the first force acting members (for example, bosses 12405 and 12407) provided in the left-right direction can operate the movable members upward in a well-balanced manner in the left-right direction.

Moreover, since the movement of the first force acting member (for example, the boss 12405) and the second force acting member (for example, the boss 12407) is restricted by the movement restricting means, the movable accessory (for example, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210) ) High-speed movement can be realized with a simple configuration without stalling the movable accessory at the upper position to be stopped.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, first rotating members having substantially the same diameter (for example, provided in pairs in the left-right direction) while rotating in synchronization with each other assuming that the positions in the height direction of the rotation center are the same. The left driven gear 12404) and the second rotating member (for example, the right driven gear 12406) are further provided, and the first force acting member (for example, the boss 12405) and the second force acting member (for example, the boss 12407) are respectively provided. It is characterized in that it is formed at a portion radially separated from the rotation center of the first rotating member and the second rotating member by a predetermined distance.

According to the game machine (2), the first force acting member (for example, boss 12405) is formed at a portion radially separated from the rotation center of the first rotating member (for example, the left driven gear 12404) by a predetermined distance. Since the second force acting member (for example, the boss 12407) is formed at a portion radially separated from the rotation center of the second rotating member (for example, the right driven gear 12406) by a predetermined distance, the first rotating member is formed. And, with a simple configuration of simply rotating the second rotating member, stable high-speed movement of the movable member can be realized.

As described above, according to the invention described in Appendix 2-2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of moving a movable body at a high speed while maintaining stability with a simple configuration.

[Appendix 3]
Conventionally, there are known gaming machines such as pachinko machines or pachislot machines that perform a winning determination and execute a game advantageous to the player according to the result of the winning determination.

In this type of gaming machine, a movable body effect in which a movable body is moved upward in order to expect the result of the winning judgment to be a favorable result for the player before the result of the winning judgment is displayed. There is a product that enhances the effect of the production.

As such a movable body effect, for example, when the motor rotates, a protrusion of the rotating body rotates to the upper end portion, and a technique of moving the arm upward by receiving a pressing force from the protrusion is known. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-76208).

However, in a gaming machine in which a movable body effect of moving a movable body upward is performed, in order to maintain the movable body moved upward, the load of the movable body is counteracted. Therefore, it is necessary to keep applying a load to the motor or to newly provide a lock mechanism or the like for holding the movable body that has moved upward.

However, it is naturally not preferable to continue to apply a load to the motor, and if a new locking mechanism is provided, not only the structure but also the control becomes complicated, which is not preferable. This is especially noticeable when the movable body is held upward for a certain period of time or longer.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to make it possible to hold a movable accessory that has moved upward in a simple configuration.

(1) In the gaming machine according to the present invention, a movable member (lower accessory decorative cover 12104) having elongated holes (oblong holes 12106, 12108) formed in the left-right direction and movable in the vertical direction and the movable member are operated. A drive source (lower accessory drive motor 1230) capable of being operated, and an operating mechanism (lower accessory fixing base 1220 and) capable of operating the movable member upward by receiving power from the drive source. A lower accessory drive motor 1230) is provided, and the operating mechanism receives power from the drive source while forming bosses (bosses 12405, 12407) at a portion radially separated from the center by a predetermined distance. Rotable gears (left driven gear 12404, right driven gear 12406) and holes through which the boss penetrates, in a specific direction (left driven gear 12404 clockwise in front view, right driven gear 12406 front view). With the rotation of the gear toward (counterclockwise), holes (holes 12204, 12206) are formed corresponding to the movement locus of the boss from the lowermost position to the uppermost position, and the inside of the hole is formed. The boss has a base member (lower accessory fixing base 1220) configured so that the boss can move, and the boss penetrating the hole of the base member is a long hole (long hole 12106) formed in the movable member. , 12108), and the movable member is operated upward while moving in the elongated hole with the rotation of the gear in the specific direction. The source moves at least up to a vertical virtual line (LL, LR) through which the boss passes through the center of the gear when the gear is rotated in the particular direction to actuate the movable member upward. It is characterized in that the gear is rotated as described above.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the gear (left driven gear 12404, right driven gear 12404, right driven gear 12404, right driven gear 12404 is clockwise for the left driven gear 12404 and counterclockwise for the right driven gear 12406). When rotating the gear 12406) to operate the movable member (lower accessory decorative cover 12104) upward, the boss should move at least to the vertical virtual line (LL, LR) passing through the center of the gear. The gear rotates. At this time, the movable member is locked, and can be locked in a series of operations for moving the movable member upward with a simple configuration without newly providing a member as a locking mechanism, and at the uppermost end position. It is possible to maintain the movable member in. The movable member is locked in this way when the boss is on a vertical virtual line passing through the center of the gear (that is, when the movable member is in the uppermost position), the gravity of the movable member acts in the vertical direction. However, the component force of such gravity does not act in the rotation direction of the gear (at the uppermost position, the left driven gear 12404 is in the left direction in the front view, and the right driven gear 12406 is in the right direction in the front view).

(2) In the gaming machine according to the present invention, a movable member (lower accessory decorative cover 12104) having elongated holes (oblong holes 12106, 12108) formed in the left-right direction and movable in the vertical direction and the movable member are operated. A drive source (lower accessory drive motor 1230) capable of being operated, and an operating mechanism (lower accessory fixing base 1220 and) capable of operating the movable member upward by receiving power from the drive source. A lower accessory drive motor 1230) is provided, and the operating mechanism receives power from the drive source while forming bosses (bosses 12405, 12407) at a portion radially separated from the center by a predetermined distance. Rotable gears (left driven gear 12404, right driven gear 12406) and holes through which the boss penetrates, in a specific direction (left driven gear 12404 clockwise in front view, right driven gear 12406 front view). When the gear is rotated toward counterclockwise), the holes (holes 12204, 12206) correspond to the movement locus of the boss so that the boss can move from the lowermost position to a position beyond the uppermost position. ) Is formed, and the boss has a base member (lower accessory fixing base 1220) configured so that the boss can move in the hole, and the boss penetrating the hole of the base member is the movable member. The movable member is movably connected in the elongated holes (oblong holes 12106, 12108) formed in the above, and the movable member is moved upward while moving in the elongated holes as the gear rotates in the specific direction. The drive source is a vertical virtual line through which the boss passes through the center of the gear when the gear is rotated in the specific direction to operate the movable member upward. It is characterized in that the gear is rotated so as to move to a position exceeding (LL, LR).

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the gears (left driven gear 12404, right driven gear 12404, right driven gear 12404, right driven gear 12404 are clockwise for the left driven gear 12404 and counterclockwise for the right driven gear 12406). When rotating the gear 12406) to operate the movable member (lower accessory decorative cover 12104) upward, the boss moves to a position beyond the vertical virtual line (LL, LR) passing through the center of the gear. The gear rotates. At this time, the movable member is locked, and can be locked in a series of operations for moving the movable member upward with a simple configuration without newly providing a member as a locking mechanism, and at the uppermost end position. It is possible to maintain the movable member in. The movable member is locked in this way because the (holes 12204, 12206) formed in the base member (lower accessory fixing base 1220) functions as a locking mechanism.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the gears are the first gear (left driven gear 12404) and the second gear (left driven gear 12404) that rotate synchronously in response to power from the drive source. It has a right driven gear 12406), and the first gear and the second gear receive power from the power source and synchronize with each other in opposite directions (the left driven gear 12404 is clockwise and right driven in front view). The gear 12406 is characterized in that the movable member is operated upward by rotating the gear 12406 counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the first gear (left driven gear 12404) and the second gear (right driven gear 12406) are synchronized with each other in opposite directions (the left driven gear 12404 is clockwise in front view). Since the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, it is possible to move the movable member up and down stably while maintaining the posture of the movable member.

As described above, according to the invention described in Appendix 3, it is possible to hold the movable accessory that has moved upward in a simple configuration.

[Appendix 3-2]
Conventionally, there are known gaming machines such as pachinko machines or pachislot machines that perform a winning determination and execute a game advantageous to the player according to the result of the winning determination.

In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the winning judgment is displayed, the expectation effect is performed to expect the result of the winning judgment to be advantageous to the player, so that the effect of the effect is enhanced. There is something.

Examples of such an expected effect include a display effect displayed on a liquid crystal display and a movable body effect for operating a movable body. A technique for moving a movable body in the vertical direction is known as a gaming machine for producing a movable body effect (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-76208).

In recent years, variations of production have been diversified. For example, not only the movable body is moved in the vertical direction as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-76208, but also after the movable body is moved upward. It is still preferable to perform an effect of holding the movable body at an upper position.

However, for example, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-76208, when the movable body is moved upward and then the movable body is held in the upper position, the movable body is moved to the upper position. After moving to, it is necessary to continue to apply a load that opposes the load of the movable body to the motor, or to newly provide a lock mechanism or the like that holds the movable body in the upper position. In addition, since there are some players who shake the gaming machine, it is necessary to consider the possibility that an external force such as vibration acts on the movable body.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably holding a movable body in an upper position with a simple configuration.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention receives power from a movable member capable of operating in the vertical direction (for example, a lower accessory movable decorative body 1210) and a predetermined drive source (for example, a lower accessory drive motor 1230). A force acting member (for example, bosses 12405 and 12407) capable of receiving and operating the movable member upward is provided, and the force acting member is arranged side by side and the movable member is placed side by side. It has a first force acting member (for example, boss 12405) and a second force acting member (for example, boss 12407) configured so that the movement locus of the force acting member draws an arc when it is operated upward. When the movable member is operated upward, the first force acting member and the second force acting member are at positions where the movement locus draws an arc and at least the movement direction is horizontal (for example, the uppermost position). It is characterized in that the first force acting member and the second force acting member are configured to move in substantially opposite directions when the first force acting member and the second force acting member move in the horizontal direction.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the movable member (for example, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210) moves to a position where the moving direction is horizontal, the movable member is operated with the movable member facing upward. After that, a device such as a lock mechanism for continuously giving an addition to the drive source (for example, the lower accessory drive motor 1230) to counter the load of the movable member in the upper position and holding the movable member in the upper position is newly added. It is possible to hold the movable body in the upper position with a simple configuration without providing it. This is because, at the position where the moving direction of the movable member is in the horizontal direction, the gravity of the movable member acts in the vertical direction, and the component force of the applied gravity acts in the rotation direction of the force acting member (left driven gear 12404, right driven gear 12406). Because it doesn't work.

Moreover, when the moving directions of the first force acting member (for example, boss 12405) and the second force acting member (for example, boss 12407) are in the horizontal direction, the moving direction of the first force acting member and the second force acting. Since the moving direction of the member is substantially opposite, for example, even if an external force acts on the movable member (for example, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210) in any one direction, the movable member Can be prevented from falling.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, first rotating members having substantially the same diameter (for example, provided in pairs in the left-right direction) while rotating in synchronization with each other assuming that the positions in the height direction of the rotation center are the same. The left driven gear 12404) and the second rotating member (for example, the right driven gear 12406) are further provided, and the first force acting member (for example, the boss 12405) and the second force acting member (for example, the boss 12407) are respectively provided. It is characterized in that it is formed at a portion radially separated from the rotation center of the first rotating member and the second rotating member by a predetermined distance.

According to the game machine of (2) above, a first force acting member (for example, boss 12405) is formed at a portion radially separated from the center of rotation of the first rotating member (for example, the left driven gear 12404) by a predetermined distance. Since the second force acting member (for example, the boss 12407) is formed at a portion radially separated from the rotation center of the second rotating member (for example, the right driven gear 12406) by a predetermined distance, the first rotating member is formed. The movable member can be held in the upper position with a simple configuration in which the second rotating member is simply rotated in the opposite direction.

As described above, according to the invention described in Appendix 3-2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably holding a movable body at an upper position with a simple configuration.

[Appendix 3-3]
Conventionally, there are known gaming machines such as pachinko machines or pachislot machines that perform a winning determination and execute a game advantageous to the player according to the result of the winning determination.

In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the winning judgment is displayed, the expectation effect is performed to expect the result of the winning judgment to be advantageous to the player, so that the effect of the effect is enhanced. There is something.

Examples of such an expected effect include a display effect displayed on a liquid crystal display and a movable body effect for operating a movable body. A technique for moving a movable body in the vertical direction is known as a gaming machine for producing a movable body effect (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-76208).

In recent years, variations of production have been diversified. For example, not only the movable body is moved in the vertical direction as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-76208, but also after the movable body is moved upward. It is still preferable to perform an effect of holding the movable body at an upper position.

However, for example, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-76208, when the movable body is moved upward and then the movable body is held in the upper position, the movable body is moved to the upper position. After moving to, it is necessary to continue to apply a load that opposes the load of the movable body to the motor, or to newly provide a lock mechanism or the like that holds the movable body in the upper position.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of holding a movable body in an upper position with a simple configuration.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a movable member capable of operating in the vertical direction (for example, a lower accessory movable decorative body 1210), a predetermined drive source (for example, a lower accessory drive motor 1230), and the predetermined predetermined. A force acting member (for example, boss 12405, 12407) capable of operating the movable member upward by receiving power from the driving source of the above, and the force acting member moves the movable member upward. The movement locus of the force acting member is configured to include a moving locus that draws an arc when the force acting member is operated toward, and the predetermined drive source is a position where the moving direction of the force acting member is in the horizontal direction. Alternatively, it is characterized in that power is applied so that the force acting member moves to a substantially horizontal position exceeding the horizontal direction.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the movable member (for example, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210) moves to a position where the moving direction is horizontal, the movable member is operated with the movable member facing upward. After that, a device such as a lock mechanism for continuously giving an addition to the drive source (for example, the lower accessory drive motor 1230) to counter the load of the movable member in the upper position and holding the movable member in the upper position is newly added. It is possible to hold the movable body in the upper position with a simple configuration without providing it. This is because, at the position where the moving direction of the movable member is in the horizontal direction, the gravity of the movable member acts in the vertical direction, and the component force of the applied gravity acts in the rotation direction of the force acting member (left driven gear 12404, right driven gear 12406). Because it doesn't work.

The number of force acting members (for example, bosses 12405 and 12407) is not limited to a specific number, and may be one or a plurality of two or more. Further, the arc drawn by the movement locus of the force acting member includes not only a perfect circular arc but also an elliptical arc. Furthermore, the arc drawn by the movement locus of the force acting member does not have to have a constant curvature, and the curvature may change in the middle of the movement locus. Further, the movement locus of the force acting member may include a straight line portion. That is, in view of the gist of the present invention, it is sufficient if the moving direction of the force acting member is horizontal, so that the number of the force acting member is limited to a specific number or the arc drawn by the moving locus of the force acting member. It is clear that is not required to be limited to a specific arc, or the arc drawn by the movement trajectory of the force acting member is not limited to a constant curvature.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, a substantially perfect circular rotating member (for example, left driven gear 12404, right driven gear 12406) is further provided, and the force acting member (for example, boss 12405, 12407) is provided. , The rotating member is formed at a portion radially separated from the center of rotation by a predetermined distance.

According to the game machine of (2) above, the force acting member (for example, the boss 12405, 12407) is formed at a portion radially separated from the rotation center of the substantially perfect circular rotating member by a predetermined distance, and thus rotates. With a simple configuration of simply rotating the member, the movable member (for example, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210) can be efficiently operated upward.

As described above, according to the invention described in Appendix 3-3, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of holding a movable body at an upper position with a simple configuration.

[Appendix 4]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a winning determination is made according to a prize at the starting port, and when the winning determination result is a specific result, a gaming machine that is in a big hit gaming state is known.

In this type of gaming machine, a big winning opening is provided in the right gaming area, and the big winning opening is opened when the big hit game state is reached. When the game ball driven into the right game area enters the big winning opening, it is detected by the count switch. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (see, for example, [0032] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-110483). Game balls that have not entered the big winning opening are discharged from the out opening.

However, even in the big hit game state, not all the game balls driven into the right game area enter the big winning opening, and such a game ball is accepted in the out opening, so the game that saw this. Those may feel disadvantaged and their interests may decline.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to preferably suppress a decrease in interest even if a game ball is not accepted by a large winning opening provided in the right game area. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that is capable of doing so.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention can launch a gaming ball toward a gaming area (for example, a gaming area 20) in which a gaming ball can flow down into a left side region and a right side region, and the gaming region. A hit based on the launching means (for example, the launching device 15), the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) provided in the left side region and capable of accepting the game ball, and the acceptance of the game ball into the starting port. Acceptance of a game ball into the large winning opening based on the determination means for making the determination, the large winning opening (for example, the large winning opening 540) provided in the right area, and the result of the winning determination being a hit. A jackpot game executing means capable of executing a jackpot game, and a game ball provided on the most downstream side of the game area and not accepted by any winning slot including the starting slot and the jackpot. Even if the game ball launched toward the right side region during the execution of the jackpot game is not accepted by the jackpot, the jackpot is provided with an out port (for example, the out port 55). Further provided with a guiding member (for example, a game ball guiding member 580) that guides the game ball that has not been accepted by the winning opening to the left side region beyond the upper part of the out opening and enables acceptance to the starting opening. It is characterized by.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, even if the gaming ball launched toward the right side region is not accepted by the large winning opening, the gaming ball that is not accepted by the large winning opening moves above the out opening. It is guided beyond the left area and can be accepted into the starting port. Therefore, even if the game ball launched toward the right side area is not accepted by the big winning opening, the expectation for the game ball can be continued and the interest can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) is a movable member (for example, a blade member 4620) that facilitates acceptance of a game ball into the starting port. ) Is provided, and the game ball that is not accepted by the big winning opening (for example, the big winning opening 540) and is guided to the starting port by the guiding member is always guided to the upstream of the starting opening. Is.

According to the gaming machine (2) above, a gaming ball that is not accepted by the large winning opening (for example, the large winning opening 540) and is guided to the starting port by the guiding member is always guided to the upstream of the starting opening. Even if the game ball launched toward the right side area is not accepted by the big winning opening, the expectation for the game ball can be continued for a long time until the end.

As described above, according to the invention described in Appendix 4, even if the game ball is not accepted by the large winning opening provided in the right game area, it is possible to suitably suppress the deterioration of the interest.

[Appendix 4-2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a winning determination is made according to a prize at the starting port, and when the winning determination result is a specific result, a gaming machine that is in a big hit gaming state is known.

In this type of gaming machine, a big winning opening is provided in the right gaming area, and the big winning opening is opened when the big hit game state is reached. When the game ball driven into the right game area enters the big winning opening, it is detected by the count switch. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (see, for example, [0032] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-110483). Game balls that have not entered the big winning opening are discharged from the out opening.

However, even in the big hit game state, not all the game balls driven into the right game area enter the big winning opening, and such a game ball is accepted in the out opening, so the game that saw this. Those may feel disadvantaged and their interests may decline.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to preferably suppress a decrease in interest even if a game ball is not accepted by a large winning opening provided in the right game area. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that is capable of doing so.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention can launch a gaming ball toward a gaming area (for example, a gaming area 20) in which a gaming ball can flow down into a left side region and a right side region, and the gaming region. A starting port (for example, a second starting port 440) that activates a launching means (for example, a launching device 15) and a movable member (for example, a blade member 4620) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition to facilitate acceptance of a game ball. ), A determination means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a winning determination (for example, a jackpot determination process in step S118) based on the acceptance of the game ball into the starting opening, and a large winning opening (for example, the big winning opening) provided in the right side region. , The big winning opening 540) and the big hit game (for example, the big winning opening opening process in step S106) that facilitates the acceptance of the game ball into the big winning opening based on the result of the winning determination. ), And a game ball provided on the most downstream side of the game area and not accepted by any of the winning openings including the starting opening and the winning opening. As a flow path of a game ball that is provided with an out port (for example, an out port 57) and is not accepted by the grand prize opening even though it has flowed down the right side area. A flow path connecting the downstream side of the big winning opening and the out opening (for example, a flowing path connecting the exit side of the game ball guiding member 580 and the out opening 57) is formed, and the downstream side of the big winning opening is formed. The flow path connecting the machine and the out port allows a game ball that has flowed down the right side region but was not accepted by the grand prize opening to be accepted by the starting port when the movable member is activated. It is characterized in that it is configured to flow down toward the out port after passing through an acceptable area (for example, a second start port receiving area).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, a game ball that has flowed down the right side area but is not accepted by the large winning opening (for example, the large winning opening 540) is placed in the out opening (for example, the out opening 55). In the meantime, it goes through the above-mentioned acceptable area (for example, the second start port receiving area). Therefore, even if the game ball launched toward the right side area is not accepted by the big winning opening, the expectation for the game ball can be continued and the interest can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) is a movable member (for example, a blade member 4620) that facilitates acceptance of a game ball into the starting port. ) Is provided, and the game ball that has passed through the acceptable area (for example, the second starting port receiving area) without being accepted by the large winning opening (for example, the large winning opening 540) is said by the movable member. As long as the acceptance of the game ball into the starting port is facilitated, it can be accepted by the starting port.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the gaming ball that has passed through the acceptable area (for example, the second starting port receiving area) without being accepted by the large winning opening (for example, the large winning opening 540) is a movable member (for example). For example, as long as the blade member 4620) facilitates the acceptance of the game ball into the start port, the game ball launched toward the right region because it can be accepted by the start port (for example, the second start port 440). Even if is not accepted by the big prize opening, the expectation for the game ball can be continued for a long time until the end.

As described above, according to the invention described in Appendix 4-2, even if the game ball is not accepted by the large winning opening provided in the right game area, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in interest. ..

[Appendix 4-3]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a winning judgment is made according to a prize in the first starting port or the second starting port, and when the result of this winning judgment is a specific result, the game machine is in a big hit game state. It has been known.

In this type of gaming machine, for example, a path for the gaming ball to roll toward the first starting port is provided in the left gaming area. Some of the game balls launched into the left game area roll this path toward the first starting port, and some do not roll this path (without winning a general winning opening). Some game balls are discharged from the outlet (see, for example, FIG. 1 of JP2011-092643).

However, in the conventional gaming machine represented by the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-092643, when the launched gaming ball does not roll the path toward the first starting port, or Even if the path to the first starting port is changed, if it is not accepted by the first starting port, there is a high possibility that the game ball will be accepted by the out port, and the interest may be reduced at this point. There is.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to suppress a decrease in interest even if a game ball launched into a game area does not win a prize at the first starting port. The purpose is to provide possible gaming machines.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a gaming area (for example, a gaming area 20) in which a gaming ball can flow down, and a launching means (for example, a launching device) capable of launching a gaming ball toward the gaming area. 15), a first starting port (for example, the first starting port 5442) provided in the game area and capable of accepting the game ball, and receiving the game ball into the first starting port or the second starting port. A determination means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a winning determination (for example, the jackpot determination processing in step S118) based on the winning determination, a large winning opening (for example, a large winning opening 540) provided in the game area, and the result of the winning determination. A jackpot game executing means (for example, a jackpot game execution means (for example,) capable of executing a jackpot game (for example, a jackpot opening process in step S106) that facilitates acceptance of a game ball into the jackpot based on the fact that The main CPU 101) and an out port (for example, an out port 57) provided on the most downstream side of the game area and ejecting a game ball that is not accepted by any of the winning openings including the starting opening and the large winning opening. And a second starting port (for example, a second starting port 440) that can accept a game ball that was not accepted by the first starting port up to the out port, and the gaming area is provided. , The game ball that was desired to be received by the first starting port flows down toward the out port after passing through an acceptable area that can be received by the second starting port when the movable member is activated. It is characterized in that it is configured to do so.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the game ball that is not accepted by the first starting port (for example, the first starting port 5442) is the first game ball before reaching the out port (for example, the out port 55). (Ii) It passes through an acceptable area (for example, a second starting port receiving area) that can be received into the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440). Therefore, even if the game ball launched toward the game area does not go to the path toward the first starting port, or even if it goes to such a path but is not accepted by the first starting port, there is a sense of expectation for the game ball. It can be continued and the interest can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the second starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) is a movable member (for example,) that facilitates the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port. , The blade member 4620) is provided, and the game ball that has passed through the acceptable area (for example, the second start port receiving area) without being received by the first starting port is started by the movable member. As long as the acceptance of the game ball into the mouth is facilitated, it can be accepted by the second starting port.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the gaming ball that is not accepted by the first starting port (for example, the first starting port 5442) and passes through the acceptable area (for example, the second starting port receiving area) is movable. As long as the member (for example, the blade member 4620) facilitates the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port (for example, the second starting port 440), the game ball can be accepted by the second starting port, and thus is directed toward the game area. Even if the game ball launched in the game is not accepted by the first starting port, the expectation for the game ball can be maintained for a long time until the end.

As described above, according to the invention described in Appendix 4-3, even if the game ball launched in the game area does not win the first starting port, it is possible to suitably suppress the deterioration of the interest. ..

[Appendix 5]
Conventionally, there are known gaming machines such as pachinko machines or pachislot machines that perform a winning determination and execute a game advantageous to the player according to the result of the winning determination.

In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the winning judgment is displayed, a movable body effect is performed in which the movable body is operated in order to expect the result of the winning judgment to be a favorable result for the player. There is something that can be enhanced.

As such a movable body effect, for example, the movable body is moved by the expansion / contraction operation of the pantograph mechanism in which the link member and the link member are overlapped in the front-rear direction, and the movable body is tilted at the same time as the expansion / contraction operation of the pantofluff mechanism is started. The technique is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229582).

However, for example, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229582, since the link member and the link member are overlapped in the front-rear direction, the thickness of each link member must be reduced. As a result, there is a limit to enhancing the effect of the operation of the movable body, and there is a limit to further enhancing the interest.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to enhance the effect of the movable body effect and further enhance the interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is operably supported by a predetermined member (for example, a base member 1180 (more specifically, a central plate 1188)), has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and intersects in the front-rear direction. It is operably connected to the first longitudinal member (for example, the upper left arm 1172 (upper right arm 1176)) which is long in the direction and has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. A second longitudinal member (for example, a lower left arm 1174 (lower right arm 1178)) that is long in a direction intersecting in the front-rear direction is provided, and the first longitudinal member and the second longitudinal member operate together. The first longitudinal member and the second longitudinal member are any of the first longitudinal member and the second longitudinal member. The rearmost position of the longitudinal portion of one of the longitudinal members in the anteroposterior direction (eg, the rearmost position of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 (lower right arm 1178) in the anteroposterior direction B2) is the longitudinal portion of the other longitudinal member. Frontmost position F1 and upper left arm 1172 (upper right arm 1176) in the anteroposterior direction of the longitudinal portion of the longitudinal portion between the frontmost position and the rearmost position in the anteroposterior direction of (for example, upper left arm 1172 (upper right arm 1176)). ) Is arranged in a positional relationship (between the rearmost surface position B1 in the front-rear direction).

(2) The gaming machine according to the present invention is operably supported by a predetermined member (for example, a base member 1180 (more specifically, a central plate 1188)), has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and intersects in the front-rear direction. It is operably connected to the first longitudinal member (for example, the upper left arm 1172 (upper right arm 1176)) which is long in the direction and has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. A second longitudinal member (for example, lower left arm 1174 (lower right arm 1178)) that is long in a direction intersecting in the front-rear direction is provided, and the first longitudinal member and the second longitudinal member operate together. The first longitudinal member and the second longitudinal member are any of the first longitudinal member and the second longitudinal member. The rearmost position in the anteroposterior direction of the longitudinal portion of one of the longitudinal members (eg, the rearmost end position B2 of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 (lower right arm 1178) in the anteroposterior direction) is the longitudinal portion of the other longitudinal member. It is characterized in that it is arranged in a positional relationship that is substantially the same as the rearmost position in the front-rear direction (for example, the rearmost surface position B1 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 (upper right arm 1176)).

(3) The gaming machine according to the present invention is operably supported by a predetermined member (for example, a base member 1180 (more specifically, a central plate 1188)), has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and intersects in the front-rear direction. It is operably connected to the first longitudinal member (for example, the upper left arm 1172 (upper right arm 1176)) which is long in the direction and has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. A second longitudinal member (for example, a lower left arm 1174 (lower right arm 1178)) that is long in a direction intersecting in the front-rear direction is provided, and the first longitudinal member and the second longitudinal member operate together. The first longitudinal member and the second longitudinal member are any of the first longitudinal member and the second longitudinal member. The frontmost position in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of one of the longitudinal members (eg, the foremost front position F2 of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 (lower right arm 1178) in the longitudinal direction) is the longitudinal portion of the other longitudinal member. It is characterized in that it is arranged in a positional relationship that is substantially the same as the frontmost position in the front-rear direction (for example, the frontmost position F1 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 (upper right arm 1176)).

According to the gaming machines (1) to (3) above, the total thickness of the longitudinal members can be reduced without reducing the thickness of each of the longitudinal members (for example, each arm 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178). It is possible to stack a plurality of accessories in the front-rear direction and to make the movable accessories larger. As a result, it becomes possible to execute a more dynamic movable effect, and it is possible to enhance the game entertainment by the movable effect more than ever. The "total thickness of the longitudinal member" does not mean the sum of the thickness of the first longitudinal member and the thickness of the second longitudinal member, but is the most forward of the first longitudinal member and the second longitudinal member in the front-rear direction. It means the thickness from the position of to the rearmost position. That is, it means a value obtained by subtracting the thickness of the first longitudinal member and the second longitudinal member from the sum of the thickness of the first longitudinal member and the thickness of the second longitudinal member.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, the one longitudinal member includes the upper end of the longitudinal portion of the one longitudinal member (for example, the upper end 11743 of the lower left arm 1174 (for example). An extension portion (for example, extension portion 11741 (extension portion 11781)) extending to a position beyond the upper end (11783) of the lower right arm 1178 is formed, and the extension portion is connected to another longitudinal member. It is characterized by being done.

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, since an extension portion (for example, an extension portion 11741 (extension portion 11781)) is formed on one longitudinal member, one longitudinal member and another longitudinal member (for example, For example, the operating range of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (upper right arm 1176 and lower right arm 1178) can be increased.

As described above, according to the invention described in Appendix 5, it is possible to enhance the effect of the movable body effect and further enhance the interest.

[Appendix 5-2]
Conventionally, there are known gaming machines such as pachinko machines or pachislot machines that perform a winning determination and execute a game advantageous to the player according to the result of the winning determination.

In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the winning judgment is displayed, a movable body effect is performed in which the movable body is operated in order to expect the result of the winning judgment to be a favorable result for the player. There is something that can be enhanced.

As a gaming machine of this type, for example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-76208, a pair of left and right movable bodies are connected to each of the synchronous arms, and one motor is used to operate the synchronous arms, whereby a pair of left and right movable bodies are movable. A movable accessory device that moves a body in a direction of approaching and separating from each other is disclosed.

However, for example, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-76208, the player can visually recognize the synchronous arm connected to the movable body, and the player's interest in the movable body production is diminished, and the interest is reduced. There was a risk that it would end up.

In recent years, a gaming machine in which a connecting member connected to a movable accessory (for example, a support member supporting the movable accessory) is hidden behind the movable accessory has been disclosed, but such a gaming machine Then, the arrangement and movement of the movable accessory are restricted, and the original fun of the movable accessory may be lost, and a fundamental solution has not been reached.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to suppress a decrease in interest by making it difficult to visually recognize a connecting member connected to a movable accessory.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention comprises a movable accessory (for example, a movable decorative body 1110 and a covering decorative body 1120) that can be operated based on the establishment of predetermined conditions, a predetermined base member, and the movable accessory. When the movable accessory is provided between the first position (for example, the origin position) and operates from the first position (for example, the origin position) to the second position (for example, the operation limit position of the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176), the movable accessory A connecting member (for example, lower left arm 1174, lower right arm 1178) that operates by changing its posture in accordance with the operation of an object is provided, and the connecting member includes the movable accessory in the first position and the first position. When it is between the two positions, even if the posture is changed in a specific area behind the movable accessory (for example, the back surface of the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120), it becomes difficult to see in front view. The movable accessory is configured as a main movable accessory (for example, a movable decorative body 1110) that can operate beyond the second position, and the main accessory exceeds the second position. A secondary movable accessory (for example, a covering decorative body) that makes it difficult to see the connecting member in a front view by operating so as to be located in front of the connecting member that changes its posture beyond the specific area when it is operated. It is characterized by having 1120).

According to the gaming machine (1), when the movable accessory is between the first position and the second position, it is assumed that the connecting member changes its posture with the operation of the movable accessory. However, since the posture of the connecting member only changes within a specific area behind the movable accessory, it is difficult to visually recognize the connecting member from the front. Then, when the main movable accessory operates beyond the second position, the connecting member operates so as to be located in front of the connecting member, although the connecting member changes its posture beyond the specific area. Therefore, even in such a case, it is difficult to visually recognize the connecting member from the front. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the connecting member without restricting the arrangement and movement of the main character, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the connecting member (for example, the lower left arm 1174, the lower right arm 1178) has the movable accessory (for example, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120). When operating from the first position (for example, the origin position) to the second position (for example, the operating limit position of the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176), it is vertical between the horizontal direction and the vertical direction. It is an arm-shaped member that changes its posture in the direction.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the connecting member is an arm-shaped member that changes its posture between the horizontal direction and the vertical direction, the connecting member is preferably used while increasing the operating range of the movable accessory. It becomes possible to make it difficult to see.

(3) In the game machine according to (2) above, the arm-shaped member is a first arm-shaped member (for example, lower left arm 1174, lower right arm 1178), and one end is the predetermined base member. A second arm-shaped member (for example, upper left arm 1172, upper right arm 1176) that is attached to the (for example, base member 1180) side and whose other end is connected to the first arm-shaped member side. Further provided, in the second arm-shaped member, the movable accessory (for example, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120) is moved from the first position (for example, the origin position) to the second position (for example, the upper left portion). When it is operated toward the arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 (operation limit position), the posture is changed in the vertical direction between the horizontal direction and the vertical direction, and at least the movable accessory is in the second position. Sometimes, it is visible from the front view, and the portion visible from the front view is made of a transparent member.

In the gaming machine of (3) above, even if the auxiliary movable accessory is operated, the second arm-shaped member that cannot be completely hidden in front view when the movable accessory is operated beyond the second position is in front of the machine. It is made of transparent members so that it is difficult to see.

As described above, according to the invention described in Appendix 5-2, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by preferably making it difficult to visually recognize the connecting member connected to the movable accessory.

[Appendix 6]
Conventionally, there are known gaming machines such as pachinko machines or pachislot machines that perform a winning determination and execute a game advantageous to the player according to the result of the winning determination.

In this type of gaming machine, as an expected effect for expecting the result of the winning determination to be an advantageous result for the player, there is one in which a movable accessory is operated so that the effect of the effect is enhanced.

A gaming machine in which a movable accessory is operated so that an effect of effect is enhanced is disclosed in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-76208. In the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-76208, in order to operate a plurality of movable accessories, a plurality of motors for operating each of the plurality of movable accessories are provided.

However, in recent years, there has been an increasing demand for productions using movable characters such as productions using more movable characters and productions using large movable characters, and in order to meet such demands, installation is required. Space must be secured and control should not be complicated.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of operating a plurality of movable accessories independently with a simple configuration. be.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a protagonist (for example, a movable decorative body 1110) that can be operated in a predetermined direction by controlling one operation from a predetermined drive source (for example, left side motor 1151 and right side motor 1161). And, while being rotatably supported by the main character at one fulcrum (for example, holes 11102, 11106), the main character is not controlled by any power source including the predetermined drive source. A fulcrum (for example, covering decorations 1120, 1124) that can operate following the operation, and a regulating means (for example, a pantograph mechanism 1170) that regulates the operation of the fulcrum that follows the operation of the main object. , And the auxiliary accessory is separated from the main accessory by rotating with respect to the main accessory around the one fulcrum when the operation following the main accessory is regulated by the regulating means. One operation control from the predetermined drive source to the main object (for example, one operation control such that the left motor 1151 only rotates counterclockwise, and the right motor 1161 clockwise). It is characterized in that the main accessory and the secondary accessory are configured to be able to perform different operations independently of each other only by one operation control such as rotation).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, one motion control from a predetermined drive source to the main character (for example, one motion control such that the left motor 1151 only rotates counterclockwise, and the right motor 1161 clockwise. The main character and the secondary character can perform different operations independently of each other with only one operation control (such as rotating the clock). That is, the main character (for example, the movable decorative body 1110) and the auxiliary product can be operated by controlling one operation for one drive source without providing a power source for driving each of the main character and the secondary product. (For example, the covering decoration bodies 1120 and 1124) can be independently operated to perform another operation. As a result, space saving and simplification of configuration and control can be achieved.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the auxiliary accessory (for example, the covering decorative body 1120, 1124) follows the operation of the main accessory (for example, the movable decorative body 1110) by the action of gravity. In addition to being operational, the regulatory means (eg, pantograph mechanism 1170) regulates the operation of the accessory by gravity.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the auxiliary accessory (for example, the covering decoration body 1120) is operated by utilizing a natural force such as gravity action, a drive source for operating the auxiliary accessory is used. It is not necessary and can contribute to space saving and simplification of configuration and control.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (2) above, the regulating means has a longitudinal member (for example, lower left arm 1174, lower right arm 1178) connected to the auxiliary accessory, and has the longitudinal shape. The member is located behind the main accessory and / and the auxiliary accessory, and is oriented in the vertical direction between the horizontal direction and the vertical direction with the operation of the auxiliary accessory (lower arm 1174). , 1178 (direction toward which) changes, and the accessory acts so as to be located in front of the longitudinal member when the posture of the longitudinal member changes beyond a certain range. It is configured so as not to be exposed from behind the main character and / or the secondary character.

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when the posture of the longitudinal member (for example, the lower left arm 1174, the lower right arm 1178) changes beyond a certain range, the secondary member is positioned in front of the longitudinal member. Since the accessory (for example, the covering decorative body 1120, 1124) operates, it is possible to prevent the longitudinal member from being exposed from behind the main accessory (movable decorative body 1110) or the auxiliary accessory.

As described above, according to the invention described in Appendix 6, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of operating a plurality of movable accessories independently with a simple configuration.

[Appendix 6-2]
Conventionally, there are known gaming machines such as pachinko machines or pachislot machines that perform a winning determination and execute a game advantageous to the player according to the result of the winning determination.

In this type of gaming machine, as an expected effect for expecting the result of the winning determination to be an advantageous result for the player, there is one in which a movable accessory is operated so that the effect of the effect is enhanced.

A gaming machine in which a movable accessory is operated so that the effect of effect is enhanced is disclosed in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-13599. In the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-13599, the movable accessory is operated in the vertical direction by a linear motion in the vertical direction by drive mechanisms provided on both sides of the movable accessory.

However, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-13599, the movable accessory is operated by a linear motion in the vertical direction by the drive mechanisms provided on both sides of the movable accessory to move the movable accessory in the vertical direction. Although the operating range of the movable accessory can be increased, a large area is required for the installation space of the drive mechanism.

In recent years, a gaming machine has been proposed in which the installation space of the drive mechanism is reduced by operating the movable accessory by circular motion, but such a drive mechanism cannot linearly move the movable accessory. ..

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to make it possible to linearly move a movable accessory in a larger operating range while saving space for installing a drive mechanism. It is to provide a game machine to play.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a winning determination means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S118 and S119) for performing a winning determination (for example, a winning determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the winning determination. It is possible to execute a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) in which a predetermined display is performed based on the result of the determination, and a specific game advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning determination being a specific result. A movable accessory (for example, movable) configured to be operable in front of the display means based on the specific game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the large winning opening opening process in step S106) and the result of the winning determination. The decorative body 1110), the first arm (for example, the left transmission arm 1154) and the second arm (for example, the right transmission arm 1164) that support the movable accessory from both sides, and a predetermined drive source (for example, the left motor 1151). , The first drive transmission member (for example, left arm member 1155, driven gear 1156, drive gear 1157) that transmits the power from the right motor 1161) to the first arm and the second drive transmission member that transmits the power to the second arm. (For example, right arm member 1165, driven gear 1166, drive gear 1167), and the first drive transmission member and the second drive transmission member are the movable accessories on both sides of the display means in front view, respectively. The first arm and the second arm each support one end of the first arm and the second arm, and the first arm and the second arm use the one end as a fulcrum. It is characterized in that the movable accessory is slidably supported from both sides at the other end while performing the arc motion.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the first arm (for example, the left transmission arm 1154) and the second arm (for example, the right transmission arm 1164) each perform an arc motion with one end as a fulcrum. On the other hand, the movable accessory is slidably supported from both sides at the other end. Therefore, the installation space of the first drive transmission member (for example, left arm member 1155, driven gear 1156, drive gear 1157) and the second drive transmission member (for example, right arm member 1165, driven gear 1166, drive gear 1167) can be used as a movable combination. The movable accessory can be linearly moved in a larger operating range while keeping the range smaller than the operating range of the object (for example, the movable decorative body 1110).

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the movable accessory (for example, the movable decorative body 1110) is controlled by one operation from a predetermined drive source (for example, the left motor 1151 and the right motor 1161). For example, a protagonist (for example, a movable decoration) that can be operated in a predetermined direction by one operation control such that the left motor 1151 only rotates counterclockwise and one operation control such that the right motor 1161 only rotates clockwise). The body 1110) and the main character are rotatably supported by one fulcrum (for example, holes 11102, 11106), and a secondary character (for example, an auxiliary material that can be operated following the operation of the main character by gravity). It has a covering decoration body 1120, 1124), and when the operation of following the main character is restricted by the action of gravity, the auxiliary material rotates with respect to the main character around the one fulcrum. By doing so, the operation is different from that of the main character.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, one operation control (for example, the left side motor 1151) from a predetermined drive source (for example, the left side motor 1151 and the right side motor 1161) to the main character (for example, the movable decorative body 1110) Only one motion control such as rotating counterclockwise and one motion control such as rotating the right motor 1161 clockwise) are the main character (for example, movable decorative body 1110) and the secondary character (for example, covering decoration). The bodies 1120, 1124) can perform different operations independently of each other. That is, by operating the secondary accessory by using a natural force such as gravity, one motion control is performed for one drive source without providing a power source corresponding to each of the main accessory and the secondary accessory. It is possible to make the main character and the secondary character perform different operations independently by simply performing. As a result, space saving and simplification of configuration and control can be achieved.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (2) above, the operation of the secondary accessory (for example, the covering decorative body 1120, 1124) following the main accessory (for example, the movable decorative body 1110) by the action of gravity is restricted. A longitudinal member (eg, lower left arm 1174, lower right arm 1178) is further provided, the longitudinal member being located behind the protagonist and / and the sub-role and the sub-role. The posture (the direction in which the lower arms 1174 and 1178 face) changes in the vertical direction between the horizontal direction and the vertical direction with the operation, and the posture of the longitudinal member of the auxiliary accessory is constant. When it changes beyond the range, it operates so as to be located in front of the longitudinal member.

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when the posture of the longitudinal member (for example, the lower left arm 1174, the lower right arm 1178) changes beyond a certain range, the secondary member is positioned in front of the longitudinal member. Since the accessory (for example, the covering decorative body 1120, 1124) operates, it is possible to prevent the longitudinal member from being exposed from behind the main accessory (movable decorative body 1110) or the auxiliary accessory.

As described above, according to the invention described in Appendix 6-2, the movable accessory can be linearly moved in a larger operating range while saving the installation space of the drive mechanism.

[Appendix 6-3]
Conventionally, there are known gaming machines such as pachinko machines or pachislot machines that perform a winning determination and execute a game advantageous to the player according to the result of the winning determination.

In this type of gaming machine, as an expected effect for expecting the result of the winning determination to be an advantageous result for the player, there is one in which a movable accessory is operated so that the effect of the effect is enhanced.

As a gaming machine of this type, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-76208 discloses a movable accessory device that operates such a movable body by operating a synchronous arm connected to the movable body. (See, for example, FIG. 16). Further, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-67739 discloses a gaming machine in which a drive mechanism for driving a movable body is hidden behind the movable body (see, for example, FIG. 33-8).

For example, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-76208, the synchronization arm may be visible to the player when the movable body is operated, which may reduce the interest.

Further, for example, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-67739, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the drive mechanism for driving the movable body, but the drive mechanism should not be exposed from the back surface of the movable body. Therefore, the arrangement and movement of the movable body may be restricted.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to suppress a decrease in interest that may occur due to the player being able to see the connecting member connected to the movable accessory. To do.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention can be operated based on the establishment of predetermined conditions, and has a movable accessory (for example, a movable decorative body 1110 and a covering decorative body 1120) decorated on the front surface, and a predetermined one. Drive transmission support member (for example, drive transmission arm 1154, 1164) that can transmit the power from the drive source and the predetermined drive source to the movable accessory and can support the movable accessory by being connected to the movable accessory. ), And a decorative member (for example, decorative covers 1130, 1140) provided between the predetermined drive source and the drive transmission support member and having the same type of decoration as the movable accessory on the front surface. The drive transmission support member is provided so as to be visually recognizable between the movable accessory and the decorative member, and the movable accessory and the decoration of the same system as the decorative member are provided on the front surface. Therefore, it is characterized in that it is configured so as to maintain continuity with the movable accessory and the decorative member.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, on the front surface of the drive transmission support member (for example, drive transmission arm 1154, 1164), a movable accessory (for example, a movable decorative body 1110 and a covering decorative body 1120) and a decorative member (for example) For example, decorations of the same type as the decorative covers 1130, 1140) are provided on the front surface, whereby the continuity between the drive transmission support member and the movable accessory and the decorative member is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest that may occur due to the player being able to visually recognize the drive transmission support member connected to the movable accessory. That is, the present invention is different from the conventional idea that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the member that supports or connects the movable accessory (corresponding to the drive transmission support member of the present invention). After making it visible to the player, the focus was on how to make the player not aware of the movable accessory. It is assimilated with the member of.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, in the drive transmission support member (drive transmission arm 1154, 1164), the movable accessory (for example, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120) is the movable accessory. It is characterized in that the front surface is decorated so as to maintain continuity with the movable accessory and the decorative member regardless of the operating range of the object.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, even when the movable accessory (for example, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120) is activated, the drive transmission support member and the movable accessory and the decorative member are continuous. Since the property is maintained, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the drive transmission support member will be noticed by the player due to the operation of the movable accessory.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, at least the movable accessory (for example, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120) and the drive transmission support member (drive transmission arm 1154, 1164). And the decorative members (decorative covers 1130, 1140) form one character shape.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, at least movable accessories (for example, movable decorative body 1110 and covering decorative body 1120), drive transmission support member (drive transmission arm 1154, 1164) and decorative member (decorative cover 1130, 1140). In addition to the same type of decoration on the front surface of), the same character shape is formed by these, so that the drive transmission support member can be combined with other peripheral members such as movable accessories and decorative members. It can be further assimilated.

As described above, according to the invention described in Appendix 6-3, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest that may occur due to the player being able to visually recognize the connecting member connected to the movable accessory.

[Appendix 7]
Conventionally, there are known gaming machines such as pachinko machines or pachislot machines that perform a winning determination and display an effect image according to the result of the winning determination on a display device such as a liquid crystal display.

In this type of gaming machine, for example, a gaming machine that displays a notice image (reach notice) indicating that the reach effect display mode is displayed with a predetermined probability is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-200274). reference). In this way, by performing the notice image to the effect that the reach notice is performed, the visual effect can be improved, and by extension, the interest in the reach notice can be improved.

However, the amount of information displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display, including the reach notice information, is very large, and the player may miss important information related to the progress of the game. Especially in recent years, the tendency is remarkable because the frequency of reach notices has been increased and the production itself has become flashy in order to excite the entertainment of the game.

In addition, the player gets bored just by looking at the display displayed on the display device such as a liquid crystal display. In recent years, in addition to the effect performed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display, an effect using a movable accessory has been performed. In this case, the player performs the effect on a display device such as a liquid crystal display. It was necessary to pay close attention to both the production and the production by the movable characters, which put a heavy burden on the player.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can easily convey important information related to the progress of a game to a player without increasing the burden on the player. To provide.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a first movable body (for example, a first movable body 1330) and a second movable body (for example, a first movable body) having a display body attached to the front surface and arranged so as to be difficult to see in front view. 2 Movable body 1340), a determination means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the processing of step S118 and step S119) that performs a winning determination (for example, a hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the result of the winning determination. The first movable body and the said The display body attached to the second movable body does not indicate information related to the progress of the game by itself, but is attached to the display body attached to the first movable body and the second movable body. When the display bodies are arranged side by side, information related to the progress of the game (for example, execution suggestion information of a specific reach with a high expectation of a big hit) can be shown, and the first movable body is arranged so as to be difficult to see from the front view. Based on the result of the hit determination, the body and the second movable body are configured to be movable in a direction close to each other in front of the display means from a position outside the view from each other in the front view. When moving in the directions close to each other, the display bodies attached to the front surfaces of the display bodies can indicate information related to the progress of the game.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the first movable body (for example, the first movable body 1330) and the second movable body (for example, the second movable body 1340) are separated from each other outside the field of view in the front view. By moving from the position in front of the display means in a direction close to each other, it is possible to shift the gaze of the player from the display means to the first movable body and the second movable body. Neither the first movable body nor the display body attached to the second movable body shows information related to the progress of the game by itself, so when they are located outside the field of view and separated from each other in the front view. The player's gaze tends to be directed toward the display means rather than the first movable body or the second movable body. However, when the display body attached to the first movable body and the display body attached to the second movable body are arranged side by side, information related to the progress of the game (for example, execution suggestion information of a specific reach with a high expectation of big hit). Therefore, it is considered that the player's gaze shifts from the display means to the first movable body and the second movable body by moving in the direction close to each other in front of the display means. Further, for example, since the player is not required to pay attention to both the display means and the first movable body and the second movable body, there is little possibility of increasing the burden on the player unnecessarily. It becomes easier to convey important information related to the progress of the game to the player.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the first movable body (for example, the first movable body 1330) and the second movable body (for example, the second movable body 1340) are the predetermined base members (for example, the second movable body 1340). For example, it is attached to the rear box 1800), and a linear slope (for example, slopes 13307, 13407) is formed along the moving direction on the side facing the predetermined base member, and the linear slope is formed. Is characterized by having a chevron shape that rises from both sides in the longitudinal direction toward the center.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the first movable body (for example, the first movable body 1330) and the second movable body (for example, the second movable body 1340) have a predetermined base member (for example, a rear box). A linear slope (for example, slopes 13307, 13407) is formed along the moving direction on the side facing the 1800), and the linear slope is a mountain that rises from both sides in the longitudinal direction toward the center. Due to the shape of the mold, smooth transition between the first movable body and the second movable body can be realized.

As described above, according to the invention described in Appendix 7, a gaming machine having a simple configuration and easily transmitting important information related to the progress of the game to the player without increasing the burden on the player is provided. be able to.

It should be noted that all the inventions described in this embodiment and other embodiments may be applied to pachinko machines, game machines, slot machines and all other gaming machines without departing from the spirit of the invention. can.

1 Pachinko game machine 1110 Movable decorative body 1120 Covered decorative body 1180 Base member 1170 Pantograph mechanism 1190 Regulatory member 1172 Upper left arm 1174 Lower left arm 1176 Upper right arm 1178 Lower right arm

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines or pachi-slot machine performs Toraku determination, effect images corresponding to the result of this Toraku determination is the game machine is known that is displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device.

In this type of gaming machine, for example, there is known a gaming machine that displays a notice image (reach notice) indicating that a reach effect display mode is displayed with a predetermined probability (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In this way, by performing the notice image to the effect that the reach notice is performed, the visual effect can be improved, and by extension, the interest in the reach notice can be improved.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2002-200274

However, the amount of information displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display, including the reach notice information, is very large, and the player may miss important information related to the progress of the game. In particular, in recent years, in order to liven up the gaming interest, or increase the frequency of reach prior notice, in order to produce itself has become to those flashy, the trend is Ru remarkable der.

In addition, the player gets bored just by looking at the display displayed on the display device such as a liquid crystal display. In recent years, in addition to the effect performed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display, an effect using a movable accessory has been performed. In this case, the player performs the effect on a display device such as a liquid crystal display. It was necessary to pay close attention to both the production and the production by the movable characters, which put a heavy burden on the player.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having a simple configuration and easily transmitting important information related to the progress of a game to a player.

(1) game machine according to the present invention,
A first movable unit having one or a plurality of first movable bodies having a first display body on the front surface (for example, an upper corner accessory 1320) and
A second movable unit having a second display body different from the first display body on the front surface and having one or a plurality of second movable bodies that can operate at different timings from the first movable body ( For example, the lower corner accessory 1350) and
A third movable unit (for example, an upper back accessory 1100) having a first movable unit and a third movable body (for example, a movable decorative body 1110) different from the second movable unit.
A determination means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S118 and S119) that performs a winning determination (for example, a winning determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and
A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for displaying information based on the result of the winning determination, and
An effect executing means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of executing a predetermined effect by the display means, and
With
The effect executing means has a reach effect executing means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of executing any one of a plurality of types of reach effects.
Based on the movement of the first movable unit or the second movable unit, it is possible to show predetermined information related to the reach effect that can be executed by the display means.
When the first movable unit moves to the front of the display means based on the result of the winning determination, it is possible to show the first information (for example, the second design) as the predetermined information.
When the second movable unit moves to the front of the display means based on the result of the winning determination, the second information (for example, a third design) different from the first information is shown as the predetermined information. Is possible,
When the first movable unit and the second movable unit move to the front of the display means based on the result of the winning determination, the predetermined information is different from the first information and the second information. It is possible to show a third piece of information (eg, a first design),
The third movable unit is
With a base member (eg, base member 1180)
A connecting member (for example, a pantograph mechanism 1170) provided between the third movable body and the base member and operated in association with the operation of the third movable body.
With
The connecting member includes at least a connecting portion (for example, lower left arm 1174, lower right arm 1178) connected to the third movable body side.
The connecting portion is difficult to see in front view even if the posture of the third movable body is changed within a specific region (for example, behind a movable accessory) when the third movable body is between the origin position and the operating position. It is characterized in that it is configured as follows.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the first movable unit (for example, the upper corner accessory 1320) moves to the front of the display means (for example, the display control circuit 204), the first information is given as predetermined information. (For example, a second design) can be shown, and when the second movable unit (for example, the lower corner accessory 1350) moves to the front of the display means, the predetermined information is different from the first information. It is possible to show the information of 2 (for example, the 3rd design), and when the 1st movable unit and the 2nd movable unit move to the front of the display means based on the result of the winning determination, the first movable unit is the predetermined information. It is possible to show a third piece of information (eg, a first design) that is different from the first piece of information and the second piece of information. Further, the third movable unit is provided between the base member (for example, the base member 1180) and the third movable body and the base member, and is a connecting member (for example) that operates with the operation of the third movable body. , Pantograph mechanism 1170), the connecting member includes at least a connecting portion (eg, lower left arm 1174, lower right arm 1178) connected to the third movable body side, and the connecting portion is a third movable body. Is configured to be difficult to see in front view even if the posture is changed within a specific area (for example, behind a movable accessory) when is between the origin position and the operating position.

According to the present invention, a simple structure, can it to provide a transmitted easy game machine to the player important information relating to the progress of the game.

Claims (1)

Winning judgment means that makes a winning judgment based on the establishment of predetermined conditions,
A display means for performing a predetermined display based on the result of the winning determination, and
A specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning determination being a specific result, and
Based on the result of the winning determination, a movable accessory configured to be operable in front of the display means,
A first arm and a second arm that support the movable accessory from both sides,
A first drive transmission member that transmits power from a predetermined drive source to the first arm, a second drive transmission member that transmits power from the second arm, and a second drive transmission member.
With
The first drive transmission member and the second drive transmission member are respectively.
When viewed from the front, both sides of the display means are housed within a range smaller than the operating range of the movable accessory, and support one end of each of the first arm and the second arm.
The first arm and the second arm
A gaming machine characterized in that the movable accessory is slidably supported from both sides while performing an arc motion with one end as a fulcrum.

Images